Home

"user manual"

1. Text Editor Exa_1 atp File Edit Character Help BEGIN NEW DATA CASE a ENEE E E EE AE ee EE a AAE EEEE EE ee E C Generated by ATPURAW December Friday 21 2001 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H E Haidalen at SErAs NORWAY 1944 2001 Cc a a a E C Example 1 C Your first circuit C Rectifier bridge C AT gt lt Tmax zc Aopt zc Copt gt ie G 205 s00 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 C 1 A E d 5 D C 3456709012 5456 70901254567 09012 5456 7090125456 7090145456 7 o901l45456 BRANCH C lt n 1 lt eee rei ee Ek oe L ee 3 C lt n let n 23 lt refl gt lt rer2 gt lt E gt lt A b4 B 3 Leng gt lt gt lt gt 30 VA SAU0S1 a3 1 we 4 a Cl Fig 4 23 The main window of the built in text editor The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and column position of the text cursor and the buffer modified status Basic text editing facilities Open Save Print Copy Paste Find amp Replace are supported The default text font can be changed by selecting the Font option in the Character menu A detailed description of all the available options can be found in the menu options help topic The text buffer of this editor is limited to maximum 32kB in size however the user can specify his own favorite text editor wordpad exe write exe notepad exe on the Preferences page of the Tools Options dialog box Text Editor option in the Tools menu provides an alternative way of invoking t
2. c cc cccccccccscsecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 PA A BE EE 22 Co CE E A E A eee Pane eee 23 2 6 Interfacing ATPDraw with other programs of the ATREMIRoackage 23 2 6 1 Calling Watcom ATP and GNU MingW32 ATP from ATBlraw 25 2 6 2 Running Salford ATP from inside ATPDraw ccceeeeessssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeaeaeeessseeees 25 203 Calline PloxY ebe ATP Terres 26 eee Rume TFPPLOT Dom A TPD onecie NE E E E 26 2605 PUIG c mmand in EIERE eege EE 26 21 Howo pet kep eenen rinn r E nd ce natin and NE EE SENER 27 OMe miler ie E RRE 2 LA ee ne asec sss renee EE NEOR EAE SaS 27 Lla Helpyia the A ME EE eieiei 21 2 8 Available circuit objects in ATPDraw 200 0 cccccccsssssssesssseceeecccccccceeeeeeeeeaaaaaesnesseeees 28 3 BEE EAE E 31 STEE EE 33 KE eg re 36 E E ee 36 34 Overview of working ER KE 37 2o FO E E 38 S SE neet E EE 39 Laa EEN ihe poeci eon genee Ee ee eee 49 fe Bee ic Me Oe a Et EE 49 gek EE e ee eee eee er ee arse arr ee err er 51 SS MR Nee bra AOUD ee i I en ee 52 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 3 SINTEF 4 ioe at en NEE 55 SL E here e SR 4 2 Main MenUu eeeneeeeeeeeeseeeesoessrerssesssesssesssesrsesrsesrsescseersesrssscsssosssresssesssesssestsestsestseersesenes 58 Ae ES Gu 58 w CC EE 61 E Wer eee neo CO oP oe 66 E A a EE 70 VAE 6 E E ee eee eee ee eee ene eae eee en etre 79 San KEE 85 a A tte EE 92 GE E FAG EE 93 A3 Shortcut MENi nr rn EN nee ene re ve ase ae ne eee 96 de Component on E a
3. SINTEF Application Manual BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Wednesday 3 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 5 E 5 s05 60 1 9 0 0 il 1 0 1 0 5 5 20 20 100 100 0 0 MODELS MODELS INPUT TXO0001 v CR30A TXO0002 v CR20A TX0003 1L CRZ22A TX0004 v CR30B TX0005 v CR20B TXO0006 i CRZ2B Ix0007 v CR30C TX0008 v CR20C TXOO009 i CRZ2C OUTPUT GAPA GAPB GAPC MODEL FLASH 1 comment KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK E EE E EE xe sr aa ae Te He ae Oe leo so kee x Function set or cancel the gap firing control signal e ii Inputs voltage and current across ZnO resistor e x Output the firing signal to the electrical ZnO component x kk kk Ek kA kk kk Ek kk kk Ek Ek kk kk Ek Ek kk kk Ek kk kk Ek Ek Ak kk Ek kk endcomment INPUT V1 Voltage on positive side of ZNO V V2 Voltage of negative side of ZNO V Seet ZNO current Amps DATA Pset power setting Megajoules msec Eset energy setting Megajoules fdel firing delay msec fdur firing duration msec VAR power power into ZnO resistor Watts Grip gap firing control signal LO Or ki energy energy into ZnO resistor Joules tfire time at which the gap was last fired sec vcap voltage difference across series caps Volts OUTPU
4. View menu M Save toolbar state M Save status bar state Save comment state Openfsave dialog Frogram T Windows 3 1 style Save options on exit Window options M Save window size and position Save window s current state Save Load Apply Help Fig 4 33 Customizing program options 88 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Reference Manual General The General tab specifies the project file and ATPDraw main window options The following list describes the available options Option Autosave every 2 minutes Create backup files Save window size and position Save window s current state Save toolbar state Save status bar state Save comment State Windows 3 1 Description Saves all modified circuits to a separate disk file every specified interval of minutes The file name is the same as the project file but with extension Sad Modified state of the circuit window does not change as a consequence of autosave operation Changes the extension of the original project file to ad each time the circuit is saved This option does not apply to autosave operations Records the current size and position of the main window When ATPDraw is started next it will be displayed with the same size and in the same position as the previous instance maximized or it will be Records the current main window state normalized The next time ATPDraw is started displayed
5. Parameters Number of simulations f OK Cancel Fig 4 22 Actions to take when non defined parameters are found 4 2 4 2 Run ATP Executing the run ATP command at the top of the ATP menu or pressing the F2 function key first will create an ATP input file with the same name as the circuit file with extension atp in the ATP system folder Then an ATP run will be performed via the default ATP command which is specified in the ATP field of the Preferences page under Tools Options The current ATP file is sent as parameter to the ATP EMTP It is important to note that users do not need to select Make Names and Make File As before running the simulation These commands are internally executed before the ATP run If the user needs to do manual changes of the ATP file and run the modified case a new command must be created with the current ATP file as parameter using the ATP Edit Commands feature After 76 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual executing ATP ATPDraw examines the LIS file and displays any error or warning messages if exist 4 2 4 3 Edit ATP file This selection calls a text editor which enables the user to contemplate or edit the ATP file When the Edit File option is selected or the F4 function key is pressed a file having the same name as the active circuit file with extension atp is searched for and will be opened in the built in Text Editor as shown in Fig 4 23
6. Zero sequence short circuit impedance real and imaginary part Zo Ro L n Each phase of a circuit is connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with zero phase angle The other end of the line is grounded Zp is calculated as the inverse of the injected current divided by the number of phases in the circuit All phase conductors of other phases are open Positive sequence short circuit impedance real and imaginary part Z R pX4 The phases of a circuit are connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with phase angle 360 i 1 n where i is the phase number 1 2 3 and n is the number of phases of the tested circuit The other end of the line is grounded Z is calculated as the inverse of the positive sequence current All phase conductors of other phases are open Zero sequence line charging Qo Each phase of a circuit is connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with zero phase angle The other end of the line is open Qo is the injected reactive power multiplied by the square of the user specified base voltage multiplied with 2 n All phase conductors of other phases are open Positive sequence line charging Q The phases of a circuit are connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with phase angle 360 i 1 n where i is the phase number and n is the number of phases of the tested circuit The other end of the line is open Q is calculated as the average injected reactive power multiplied by the square of the us
7. lt Et las Ampl gt lt Freg 4SOURCA 0 326600 4SOURCB 0 326600 4SOURCC 0 326600 INITIAL OUTPUT SUPLA SUPLB SUPLC H BUSAH BUSBH BUSC LANK BRANCH LANK SWITCH LANK SOURCE LANK INITIAL LANK OUTPUT LANK PLOT EGIN NEW DATA CASE LANK Te gt lt Phase TO0O gt lt 50 50s 50 e CAE 120 O0 s094 92395191772 0 0 4246234872161 e RE 4246234872161 e IED 2095 LILI 7 CO Ch CC Ch Ch Ch CH Oh Ch Ch CH Ch CH CH CH On CC CH CH CH CH CH CC CH CHOCO JC CC CH On CHOCO CH CH O CO CC CHOCO CC Chi Ch Ch CC CC Chi Ch Ch Ch CC CC CO CC CO COk cC CC COkh cChCOCOCO CH ie ie ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt 1 1 1 1 1 1 Al gt lt T1 gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt ls cee SS EN SS i ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual Some results of the simulation are shown in Fig 6 40 In the reported case the steady state magnetizing current of the unloaded transformer is interrupted at 45 ms producing high residual flux in two phases As a result a high amplitude inrush current may occur at a subsequent transformer energization 1 0 A 0 5 0 0 0 5 1 0 0 10 20 30 40 ms 50 file exa_10 pl4 x var t c SUPLA H_BUSA c SUPLB H_BUSB c SUPLC H_BUSC 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 5 0 15 file exa_10 pl4 x var t c SUPLA H BUSA c SUPLB H_BUSB c SUPLC H_BUSC Fig 6 40 Steady state magnetizing current upper curves and the inrush current lower curves at a
8. 0 reset flag i gy Sn applying trapezoidal rule calculate from v t is kt t history term from trapezoidal rule for next step ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL The use of a Type 94 Norton model in the ATPDraw generated input file is shown next The Type 94 declaration refers to the Use As name of the MODEL in which the operation of the object is described C Time varying inductor 94TOP BOT IND1IN NORT 1 gt DATA Ll 0 1 gt 59V 59 TOP gt 99V 5S BOT gt SSI SS I gt END ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 119 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 10 TACS The TACS menu gives access to most type of TACS components of ATP Exceptions are Device 55 and multi line Fortran statements continuation which are not supported The TACS sub menu on the component selection menu contains the following items Coupling to Circuit SOUrCeS Transfer functions F Devices Initial cond Fortran statements Fig A 67 Supported TACS objects Draw relation 4 9 10 1 Coupling to circuit The Coupling to circuit object y provides an interface for TACS HYBRID simulations This object must be connected with an electrical node to pass node voltages or the branch currents switch status to TACS The type of the variable sent to TACS is controlled by the Type settings in the EMTP OUT component dialog box Users are warned that only single phase electrical variables can be interfaced with TACS input nodes this way In case of 3 phase modeli
9. 0 otherwise type 98 Output 1 if x gt y 0 otherwise ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 123 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 10 7 Draw relation When you select TACS Draw relation the mouse cursor will change to a pointing hand and the program is waiting for a left mouse click on a circuit node to set the starting point of a new relation You can then draw multiple relations until you click the right mouse button or press the Esc key Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements These objects are drawn as blue connections but have no influence on the component connectivity You can work with relations exactly the same way as with connections relations can be selected rotated deleted or moved to another position 4 9 11 User Specified Library Selecting the Library item will draw the predefined user specified object LIB Det Lob This object has no input data and cannot be connected with other objects because Ref 3 ph it has no input or output nodes Files Fig 4 69 Supported user specified objects Library Using this object will result in a Include statement in the ATP file The User specified field at the bottom of the component dialog box specifies the name of the file and path if Prefix misc request is unselected under ATP Settings Format that is included by ATP at run time The user must keep track of internal node names in this file and if an internal node is connected wi
10. 13 0 m NB 4 EEE EE EEE EEE Fig 6 21 Tower configuration of the 750 kV line The line parameters are given in Metric units The Auto bundling option is enabled to simplify the data entry for this 4 conductor phase in rectangular arrangement system Tubular assumption has been applied as in the previous example with the following parameters DC resistance 0 0585 Q km Outside diameter of the conductors 3 105 cm Inner radius of the tube 0 55 cm ATPDraw calculates the thickness diameter value internally T D 0 32 Sky wires are made from steel reinforced conductors thus tubular assumption applies here too DC resistance 0 304 Q km Outside diameter of the sky wire 1 6 cm Inner radius of the tube 0 3 cm ATPDraw calculates the thickness diameter value internally T D 0 187 The resistivity of the soil equals to 20 Qm The conductor separation in the bundle is 60 cm Entering the geometrical material data and model options of the line then executing Run ATP will produce a LIB file in the LCC folder Since the length of each section is different four LCC objects with different name are needed The Save As button of the LCC dialog box can be used to save the ALC file with the new length thus the line parameters need not be entered from scratch 196 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual Line Cable Data D LATPDRAWS4Icc LIN 50_ 1 alc x Model Data Standard d
11. ArmafitCommand The default command which executes the ARMAFIT program 7 1 3 Directories This section contains information on the default directories for projects ATP files and user generated components These are the directories suggested by the Open and Save file dialogs in ATPDraw initially When a project is opened ATPDraw will unzip the files on these directories 1f the stored path does not exist The user 1s free to store his components in any directory however Parameter Range Description Projects The folder name where you store the project files adp ATP Specifies the folder in which the ATP files created atp Models Default folder for the MODELS definition mod and ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 231 SINTEF a support files sup Parameter Range Description Group Container of the compressed GRP object support files sup UserSpecified The default folder of the DBM library lib and support files sup for user specified components LineCables Container of the Line Cable objects related files alc am lib lis pch Bctran The default folder for the BCTRAN transformer object related files bct atp lis pch The default settings can be modified on the Tools Options Directories page Fig 7 3 ATPDraw Options wl General Preferences Directories view ATP Undo reda Buffers 10 Colors Background window Custom Frograms Text editor Jnotepad exe Brows
12. Global Automatic Tolerance kk Prediction 0 1885 MODE PHASE MAME Group Mo fo Label Comment Qutou TOOUT OMOT FC THOLIT eoricera eoci rec T CURR KT PETI a n n a io OK Cancel Help Fig 5 44 Universal machine input dialog The dialog boxes for all the universal machines are similar The type 4 induction machine does not have the Rotor coils group since this 1s locked to 3 None of the type 3 and 4 induction machine have the field node of course The single phase machine type 6 and the DC machine type 8 do not have the Stator coupling group For the type 6 machine the number of d axis is locked to 1 Even if the number of rotor coils or excitation coils can be set to maximum 3 only the first d axis coils will have external terminals for a type 1 6 and 8 machine The other coils will be short circuited Rotor coils are short circuited in case of type 3 machine while the type 4 machine has an external terminal for all its 3 coils Fig 5 45 shows the various pages for universal machine data input The buttons under the Saturation on the Magnet page turns on off the various saturation parameters for the d and q axis This is equivalent to the parameter JSATD and JSATQ in the ATP data format Selecting symm is equal to having JSATD 5 and JSATQ 0 total saturation option for uniform air gap On the Stator page you specify the Park transformed quantities for resistance and inductance f
13. Goede Zo 2 IS 2s Aa Ble E Sie e aa 2S g S27 29 98 21 2 19 82 Sis S245 F zalilo 221i 2 J Co Spo 39 PoF F e FY So F 25 KEND 8 8 817 24 8 74 8 25 18 817 8 8 37 24 17 8 74 17 8 74 17 8 74 i7 8 74 Et 8 74 18 30 2 18 30 p 16 60 8 I8 30 2 18 30 6 30 te P is 9 32 44 13 25 8 20 I3 25 8 20 7 25 20 22 7 29 20 14 7 25 20 14 7 14 70 7 14 70 7 14 70 13 8 70 13 8 70 13 8 70 FTES L amp PT 2 2 1 L de 1 1 2 L I 2 2 1 1 I2 2 T I J LLL a Ta 1l 22 1 4a rr I 24a 1l 1L Ee 2 1 1 1 f LLO O gd 4 2 1 12 1 baa L sted kt 1 4 11 1 1 1 4 I LLLA a2 L ete TT LLA k 2 4 SERASE TACS LIDLY6O0D 00Z77777e 9OREFPOS S9QOREFNEG 98VAC REFPOS REFNEG 98RAMP1 58 UNITY 120200 HH 1 Q0VAC I0GOMPI RAMP1 ANGLE 180 AND UNITY 98DCMP1 54 COMP1_ 5 0E 3 98PULS1 NOT DCMP1 AND COMP1_ 98PULS2 54 PULS1_ DLY60D 98PULS3 54 PULS2 DLY60D 98PULS4 54 PULS3 DLY60D 98PULS5 54 PULS4 DLY60D 98PULS6 54 PULS5 DLY60D 98GATEL PULS1 OR PULS2_ 98GATE2 PULS2 Op PULS3_ 98GATE3 PULS3 Op PULS4 98GATE4 PULS4 Op PULS5 98GATE5 PULS5 Op PULS6 O8GATE6 PULS6 Op PULSI BRANCH SVINTAGE 0 POS U A Rsnub Csnub POS U BPOS U A POS U CPOS U A U ANEG POS U A U BNEG POS U A U CNEG POS UU A SWITCH Kn APOS _ GATE1_ 11U BPOS GATE3 LIU CPOS GATES 11NEG U A GATE4 11NEG U B GATE6 11NEG U C GATE2 SEOF User supplied header cards follow 31 May 02 15 46 06 ARG U POS NEG __ REFPOS REFNEG ANGLE _ Rsnub_ Csnub_ NUM ANGLE Rsnub_ Csn
14. Kets 116 E 19 on line licensing eee cece ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19 Armafit commande 138 ATP ATP E 22 benchmark Die 148 RI KEE 166 GNU yersiOl eeror nn 25 OET E 49 te TE 136 PUI TING ee 136 PRC TS OOK sessed iccaicosssscectescsddeoneneitus 43 EE ee 24 51 simulation 0 cece cece ccc eeeccceeeecceeecceeeecseeees 49 Watcom version 25 EE ee 24 70 ATP e ea on eee 70 AIP WEA EEN 9 E OSD sags Gee as ee 23 230 EE EE 79 configuration eegener 23 download 20 EE 177 hardware regurementg 20 WAC IGS KU 22 istala OD E 20 DLEE Ee 23 33 Geer e ee Sai 1 le EE 88 B 0 6161 0p EE 21 SUDPOr Ee 2 ATP EMTP L mailing bet 27 inter 38 Auto detect Crrors ccccccceeeccceeecceeeeesceeees 71 auto Dranstormer e eeeenseseeeeerseeereseeeee 214 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 Appendix B 31 Ga 26 ege 23 115 171 BCTRAN dualog 154 214 BCTRAN Die 22 156 Bonneville Power Administration 9 C CABLE CONSTANTS osise 23 111 cable data EE 143 CABLE PARAMETERS sajeciccicatawnsatinetdahneeads 111 Canadian American EMTP User Group WSUS Lii os sesasncesaereavisennsesootesonncueeens 10 We S00 Eegen 10 Characteristic ab 98 circuit comments 2 0 eee eeeecceeeeceeeeeeceeeee 34 EEGEN et 59 EE HE 69 circuit WINKOW ec cece cc ceeeccceeeecceeeeceeeeeceeeees 34 Circuit window 2 0 0 c ce eeecceeeccceecceeeeceeee 33 34 eebe 13 Command line Options cccceeeeeeeeeees 26 comment
15. No control Two categories of electrical machines are available in Tee 3 eoria ATPDraw Synchronous Machines and Universal Machines UM Induction ATPDraw does not support machines in parallel or back to UMA Induction back UME Single phase VM DC Fig 4 60 Supported electric machine alternatives The Synchronous Machine models in ATPDraw have the following features limitations With and without TACS control Manufacturers data No saturation No eddy current or damping coils Single mass The Universal Machine models in ATPDraw have the following features limitations Manual and automatic initialization SM IM and DC type supported Raw coil data internal parameters Saturation is supported in d q or both axes One single excitation coil in each axis d q Network option for mechanical torque only Single torque source The Component dialog box of Universal Machines 1s significantly different than that of the other objects A complete description of parameters in this dialog box is given in chapter 5 7 2 of the Advanced Manual The popup menu under Machines contains the following items No control type 59 control 3 phase armature 8 control type 59 TACS control 3 phase armature Synchronous type 1 under A7P Settings Switch UM na type 3 ATP Settings Switch UM Induction UM UM4 U UM MACHINE Induction Set initialization under Induction type 4 ATP Settings Switch UM UM MACHINE Single phase
16. Non linear branches 1 phase nonlinear R and L components Current dependent resistor type 99 Type 93 96 and 98 nonlinear inductors including initial flux linkage conditions Time dependent resistor type 97 Single and 3 phase MOV type 92 exponential resistor TACS controlled resistor Line models Lumped PI equivalents type 1 2 and RL coupled components type 51 52 RL symmetric sequence input 3 and 6 phase Distributed lines of constant parameters Transposed Clarke untransposed KCLee LCC objects Bergeron nominal PI JMarti Semlyen and Noda models Switches Time controlled 1 and 3 phase Voltage controlled Diode thyristor triac type 11 switches Simple TACS controlled switch of type 13 Measuring switches Statistic and systematic switches independent and master slave Sources DC type 11 Ramp type 12 Two slope ramp type 13 AC source and 3 phase type 14 Double exponential surge source type 15 28 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ee Heidler type source type 15 Standler type source type 15 CIGRE type source type 15 TACS source type 60 Ungrounded DC source type 11 18 Ungrounded AC source type 14 18 Machines Synchronous machine type 59 with no control or max 8 TACS controls Universal machines Universal machines type 1 3 4 6 and 8 Transformers Single phase and 3 phase ideal transformer Type 18 source Single phase saturable transformer 3 phase 2 or 3 winding saturable transforme
17. TMP gt ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF 2 Installation Manual ATPDraw for Windows ZF 3 5 SINTEF ee 2 1 ATP licencing policy ATPDraw and the present documentation includes ATP proprietary information thus ATP licensing is mandatory prior to get permission to download the program from the Internet ATP license is free of all charge for all who have not engaged in EMTP commerce and it can be obtained from the Canadian American EMTP User Group or an authorized regional users group In general organizational licensing is preferred over licensing of individuals Undergraduate students are not licensed personally If ATP usage is to be organizational rather than personal 1 e if ATP materials are to be used by in for or on behalf of a company university etc the licensee must certify that the organization has not participated in EMTP commerce nor has any employee contractor or other agent who would be granted access to ATP materials Once one is licensed he she is authorized to download ATP materials from the secure Internet sites or obtain them from a similarly licensed user or order these materials from the regional user groups At present the Canadian American European and the Japanese user groups accepts ATP license applications via the Internet Interested parties are requested to visit the on line licensing page at www emtp org fill in and submit the appropriate web form Potential users of
18. UNI Te Slepa USE RL EE ee lt lt ase Sepatacok 42 TASR nenen SEOF User supplied header cards follow 20 Jan 02 1A 28 28 ARG HVBUSA HVBUSB HVBUSC LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC STRPNT 5 8 2 2 Creating new support file and icon Next step is to create a new user specified object via the Object User Specified New sup file menu of ATPDraw The process of creating a new object consists of two steps creating parameter support and creating an icon Since no NUM card exists in the DBM header the number of data is 0 the number of nodes 1s 3 1n this example as shown in Fig 5 52 On the Nodes tab a Name can be assigned to each nodes The number of phases and the node position on the icon border must also be specified here The name of the nodes may differ from the name used in the ib file but the node sequence must be the same as specified on the ARG list Each user specified component might have an icon and an optional on line help which describes the meaning of input parameters The appearance of this icon is up to the users creativity but it is ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 173 SINTEF Advanced Manual recommended to indicate three phase nodes with thick lines and to locate them according to the Pos 1 12 setting on the Nodes tab Finally the support file of the object must be saved to disk using the Save button the default location is the USP folder to make the new USP object accessible via the User Specified Files op
19. and the number of nodes in the range of 0 to 12 Control parameters for the object data can be entered on the Nodes and Data pages of Fig 4 29 Edit D ATPDRAW3 Usp Noname sup wl Data Nodes Name Jeekelen Standard data IT High precision M Output enable IT Nonlinear Type UserSpe sl Num Data D Num Node E Dae Save AS Cancel Help tw 11 1 3 3 d Fig 4 29 Control page of a new user specified object 82 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual Each user specified components must have an icon which represents the object on the screen and may have an optional help text assigned to it which describes the meaning of parameters These properties can be edited using the built in Help and Icon Editor exactly the same way as described in session 4 2 5 1 Finally Save or Save As buttons can be used to save the new support file to disk User specified support files are normally located in the USP folder 4 2 5 3 Edit User Specified sup file An existing user specified object can be edited in the same way as any standard components as described in session 4 2 5 1 4 2 5 4 New Model sup file Usage of MODELS 4 in ATPDraw is described in the Advanced Manual To use this feature the user first must write a model file using the built in Model Editor as shown in section 4 2 5 5 This file must have a legal MOD
20. cccceceeeeeeeees 124 G generate MN E E 78 ro 615 01 e 37 ground symbol 5 2scussavnndraserwnaenadessaracernceencies 49 group CUStom12aton 134 EO ANOS aes cengtetees e eennssaceotneanentenes 102 group Tolder 131 Group no TCI cco cuscsminnsioandonosacceasssssvinndesns 97 group Selec UO eege 44 210 0 0 100 eerie 129 174 183 PVA VE 13 H HARMONIC FREQUENCY DSCAN 29 Harmonic Source 2cssecsaceraiesaniesscencvecteans 165 Help edilon E 82 86 Help menu 93 244 Appendix eet 93 Hide button 98 hierarchical omodelng cee ceecceeceeeeeeeeees 9 Hpoidale EE H 27 I con edtor oo ceeeeccceeeccceeecceeeeseens 81 85 Import button 2 0 0 0 cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 157 TIMOR ee 60 Include characteristic cccceeeeecccee eee 115 induction machine eee eeeeee ees e eee 160 Initial conditions 2 0 cece ee eeeec ewes 10 122 J JMarti line oo ceeecccceeeeeccseeeeesseeenes 140 L LO Wi EE 136 190 library object cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 184 LINE CONSTANTg 23 111 line ER E 141 LINE MODEL FREQUENCY CAN 145 line cable dialog cccceeeeeeeeeees 111 137 line cable Mle nsssesssissssisorissosroresssissoisssssres 22 linear branchn eee ccc ceeeeccceeeeecseeeeees 106 eelere 103 109 TANGA EE 13 NOS EE 50 M NEIER 104 Main Menu ede wodacccnsseteniacsunveseeceewcbeossaes 34 58 Main Window cceeccccseecccseecceeeescens 33 57 Make INS apse sates nee eset iee eere
21. possible to use the ATPDraw program as a graphical operating environment and execute the other ATP programs in a user friendly way as shown in Fig 2 2 ASCII text TPPLOT E editor m t t4 ATP l SY input file gt PlotXY ATP Analyzer gt gt GTPPLOT gt DspATP32 Data 2 Suerge Info rm ation cb DisplayNT v Fig 2 2 Interaction between ATPDraw and the other ATP programs ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 23 SINTEF installation Manual Edit Commands ATP settings F3 run ATP P Gd Edit ATP file F4 Farameter St l Edit LIs tle FS C Mone Make File As ous Make Names Name SLES Edit Commands C Current PLA Run ATF Ctrl Alt 0 Run ATP O ZS Run ATP file Ctrl Alt Command Run Plots Ctrl Alt e C atodraw3runATP_w bat Run LOC Cirl Alte 3 Edit text Ctrl Alt 4 fe Browse Update w Exit Pun GTPPLOT Ctrl Alt 5 Run ATP Mingde Ctrl Alt b Fig 2 3 The Edit Commands dialog box Fig 2 4 User specified commands In the Edit Commands dialog box of Fig 2 3 the user can specify the name of a bat or an exe file and the name of a file which then will be sent as parameter e g ATP bat lt current atp file gt or PlotXY exe lt current pl4 file gt when ATPDraw executes these external programs The Name field specifies the name of the command while the Command and Parameter fields specify the name of the file to be executed and the optional parameter Selecting
22. 184 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual The reference objects are not represented in the at p data file Their role is just the visualization of the connectivity The ATPDraw generated ATP file 1s shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW June Sunday 30 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 SDUMMY XYZ000 C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 1 E 6 001 500 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n Jee n 2 gt lt rerl gt lt rer2 gt lt R X L xC gt C xn 1 gt lt n A gt lt refl gt lt sref ER K lt A lt B gt lt leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 X0011A 10 O X0011B 10 O XxX0011C 10 O X00134 10 0 X0013B T0 0 X0013C 10 0 XOO LSA 10 O X0015B 10 O X0015C TO 0 XOOLTA 10 O X0017B 10 O X0017C 10 O C Study of ground tault in lane A B SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 USP LIB LIB SWITCH C r lx n 22x Telos gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt X0011AF1A s033 Oa O X0011BF1B De Se O X0011CF1C A ae O X0013AF2A 2 2 O X0013BF2B 2 2 O X0013CF2C Aa Se O XOO15AF3A ce ae O X0015BF3B Aia Se O XOO1LSCF3C Ss Ss O X0017AF4A 2 Se O X0017BF4B Aa ae O X0017CF4C E ais O SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt EL gt lt TSTART
23. 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt L X lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 x0078AX0076A AO O X0078BX0076B 400 O X0078CX0076C 400 O XO0074AX0072A 400 O X0074BX0072B 400 O XO074ACX002C Aog O 1Xx0068AX0001A Ls 00 22485 L704 14 Q O 2X0068BX0001B ee 200 2Zeoko 1 0 ER O 3X0068CX0001C O 1X0072AX0001A Le O00 224h5 AS dk P O 2 X007 A BX000 1B aL 400 Zeeks Ga E P O 3X0072CX0001C O x0070AX0068A Aog 0 X0070BX0068B 400 O X0070CX0068C 400 O XO0074AX0072A ES SE O X0074BX0072B As oe O XO07 4CX0072C E 10 O XO0078AX00760A Oe ldi O X0078BX0076B Oe Ladi O X0078CX0076C Oe Ledi O XOO070AX0068A ES 03 O X0070BX0068B As Q03 O X0070CX0068C E 03 O XxX0076AX0001A Fe 220 O X0076BX0001B Je AAi O X0076CX0001C Js 229 O Jz ENDA EE O SR SS 1 Do bs 29881849 Ze 203439051 0 532072093164 340 265559425 6 92064963 7 Os 70533333535 ZL ae 36322 L6 914334208 Ones 266236077118 LY sZ220050335 0 916060606067 ZO 2259985055 bietZ23L900S3 Lp ISS S933 32 662 1475665 LOs 1871736309 IPM e OO 2 oO 9999 SR ENDB ENDA bonr 0 92 ENDC ENDA JoJ 0 XO032AX0033A 2x LOU O X0032BX0033B 2 LOUS O XUOS2CX00343C Zs LOUS O Ja BEGA SE O GES la 1 Do ba 39881849 340 2 865955 9425 2L 1 64036322 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 Ae 20343900 1 Tea I20649637 L6e9L4 334208 0 5352072093164 Us 70633333330 1 225 SINTEF Application Manual
24. 2O62 30 7118 LO 2220050355 AAR 282 39443055 72425190053 EE 662 1475865 LO dS T1265 69 e 9999 92 BEGB BEGA EH 0 92 BEGC BEGA ooo 0 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC C_400 LIB BEGA BEGB BEGC XO044A X0044B r X0044C SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC C_400 LIB X0044A X0044B X0044C MIDA MIDB MIDC SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC C_400 LIB MIDA MIDB MIDC X0048A X0048B X0048C SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC C_400 LIB X0048A X0048B X0048C ENDA ENDB ENDC SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt Vf CLOP gt lt type gt ENDA X0032A i s001 0 ENDB X0032B l rk 0 ENDC X0032C is SE O X0001ABEGA 035 001 STATISTICSTARGET 0 x0001BBEGB 00666 OO STATISTICSXOOOLABEGA O X0001CBEGC 00333 OU STATISTICSXOQOO1ABEGA 0 J STATISTICS 0 MIDA MIDB MIDC SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt x T gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14X0078A 0 3243E5 GER Slee Is 14X0078B 0 3 43E5 SR e CAE SS Ie 14X0078C OQ 3 43E5 50s de SE Ig 14X0074A 0 3443E5 sop Se Is 14X0074B 0 3443E5 GER 120 SE Lg 14X0074C 0 EE 50 120 SE Is 14X0070A 0 3 43E5 BO SE Lg 14X0070B 0 3 43E5 50 s e AE SH UR 14X0070C OQ 3 43E5 50 s lUe ls Ig 14X0033A 0 3 43E5 50 s SH Ie 14X0033B 0 3 43E5 50 s e CAR e a 14X0033C 0 3 43E5 ode TAU l is INITIAL OUTPUT MIDA MIDB MIDC BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BLANK STATISTICS BE
25. 3 chapter XIX F explains in detail how to create such a file The output of the DBM supporting routine is a ib file that can actually be considered as an external procedure which is included to the ATP simulation at run time via a SINCLUDE call 5 8 2 1 Creating a Data Base Module file for the BCTRAN object The DBM file begins with a header declaration followed by the ATP request card DATA BASE MODULE and ends with a SPUNCH request The ARG declaration together with the NUM card if needed specifies the external variables numerical node names and the sequence of arguments for the SINCLUDE procedure The rest of the file describes the BCTRAN model Note that data sorting card BRANCH 1s part of the file but no BLANK BRANCH indicator is required The ARG declaration of the DBM file includes 7 node names in this example HVBUSA HVBUSB HVBUSC The 3 phase node of the high voltage terminal LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC The 3 phase node of the low voltage terminal STRPNT The 1 phase node of the HV neutral The rest of the DBM file is the transformer model description as produced by the BCTRAN supporting routine of ATP The structure of the DBM input file 1s shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE NOSORT DATA BASE MODULE SERASE ARG HVBUSA HVBUSB HVBUSC LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC STRPNT lt lt lt lt The PCH file generated by the gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt BCTRAN supporting routine must gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt be inser
26. 38 Make File E 49 Make names cccccccsseescceeceeeescens 38 78 Map Window ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 92 ENEE 223 Eeer 61 147 miscellaneous parameters s00000000eeeeeee 49 model UE 22 MODELS eee 10 11 104 116 148 input file structure 117 model Tile Ee 149 Te EE 84 BEE 150 TOCOMG enra rreran 75 154 203 UDE ee 84 Type 94 mod Die 118 Use As Te WEN 118 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF MODELS language oooannnnnnnneneeeeeeeeesne 148 Modified e EE 49 Mouse OCI ALONG earnais enii 36 move label innsensennsesssrsssrssersssns 35 63 multi layer CAT CUIL c seaccersnecceatanteesessactexseees 129 multilevel modelmng 129 multiple simulations cccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 136 N HEW CG UIE eege 39 58 TINO Ga MING oc cep ee E A 140 ee ale 151 Node data wmdow sinisimirissisisisiiisivenss 36 Node dialog eee nee eee eee 100 nonlinear branch eeeeeeeeeeeeees 108 nonlinear charactertstc 99 nonlinear transformer cccccceeeeeeeeeees 171 O Objecis MENU sa escaacteeearaccneteeerorenecoresecseet 38 Open group dialog cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeees 36 Open probe dialog iaidccciiccerserssavviersooniensteners 38 IER e R 58 Output combo box 47 EENEG 98 Output SE MINGS ee 71 P Pacific Engineering Corporation 9 Eege 62 ig ol e 14 DM ASS REI 52 plotting programs tennis Eegen 13 POA a 14 Nee e 135 polygon selechon cc eeeeeeeeeeee
27. 4 14 Simulation settings when checked the SYSTEM FREQUENCY request card is written in ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual Prequency Scan If Frequency scan is selected the FREQUENCY SCAN option of ATP is enabled min Starting frequency for the frequency scan max Ending frequency for the frequency scan df Frequency increment Leave 0 for logarithmic frequency scale NPD Number of frequency points per decade in logarithmic scan Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS Selecting HFS will run the ATP data case so many times as specified in the Harmonic source component dialog box see chapter 4 9 12 The frequency of the harmonic source will for each ATP run be incremented The basic frequency specification is mandatory for HFS simulations which can be set as Freq parameter on Fig 4 14 If Frequency scan or HFS is selected the user must specify which component of the solution to print out Magnitude only Default request Magnitude amp Angle Results are printed in POLAR Magnitude amp Angle amp Real Imag Both POLAR and RECTANGULAR Real Imag RECTANGULAR output request Other combinations are illegal and are prevented by button logic Output settings Output JUtpuUC COnmErol E Print freq Frequency of LUNIT6 I Network connectivity output within the time step loop For example a value of 500 means Plot freq E WM Steady state phasors that every 500 simulation time step will be
28. 4 2 2 13 Extract This is the reverse operation of Compress The group is extracted on the current circuit layer To perform the operation a compressed group and only one must be selected first 4 2 2 14 Edit Group This command shows the group content Short key Ctrl G The group is extracted in a separate window To perform the operation a compressed group and only one must be selected first It is possible to edit the group in a normal way except deletion of the reference components Le components having been referenced in one of the Added to group lists cannot be deleted If the user tries a Marked objects are referenced by compressed group warning message appears 64 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual Compress Group EI Objects Data Available Added to group OK Cancel RLC CLOSED I Nonlinearity Nodes Available Added to group ER CAT VA ANO T Position E M 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 mies Fig 4 8 a The Compress dialog box Group GRP00004 x Attributes Group No fo Label Comment T Hide TC Lock OK Cancel Help Fig 4 8 b Component dialog box for a sub group object 4 2 2 15 Edit Circuit Displays the circuit where the current group belongs Short key Ctrl H Actually the grouping structure can be taken as a multi layer circuit where the Edit Group brings the user one step down in details while Edit Circuit bring
29. 4 2 3 4 Zoom In Enlarges the objects in the active circuit window by increasing the current zoom factor by 20 percent Short key plus sign on the numeric keypad or alphanumeric key 4 2 3 5 Zoom Out Reduces the icon size in the active circuit window by 20 percent Short key minus sign on the numeric keypad or the _ alphanumeric key 4 2 3 6 Zoom Selecting this field brings up the Zoom dialog box shown in Fig 4 11 Short key Z In the Zoom dialog the zoom factor of the active circuit window can be specified The actual zoom factor is given in the input field at left in percent The normal view has a zoom factor of 100 percent To zoom in increase the zoom factor to zoom out and view a larger portion of the circuit decrease the factor Upper and lower limits are 400 and 25 percent respectively To accept the new zoom factor and return from the Zoom dialog select the OK button To set a new zoom factor and view the result without closing the dialog box select the Apply button Fig 4 11 The Zoom dialog box 4 2 3 7 Refresh This command redraws all objects in the active circuit window Short key R This command can also be activated by clicking the Toolbar icon 68 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 2 3 8 Set Circuit Font Enables you to select a font type and size for the node names and labels on the screen and also for the metafile export The default font is MS S
30. 52X0003BBUSB 711 11 857 53x0003CBUSC XOOO3ABUSA 200 O X0003BBUSB 200 0 XO0O0O03CBUSC 2010 O XOO1LOA 2 51 O X0010B Zero O xX0010C Apal 0 BEGA 57 O BEGB ae O BEGC Lae O SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt BUSA BEGA 0 3333 ag O BUSB BEGB ue nom O BUSC BEGC sU BB TU 0 XOO1OABUSA e Eeer Er O X0010BBUSB 1361 10 O XO0O010CBUSC DN e r O SOURCE ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 179 SINTEF Application Manual C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt SE gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14X0003A 0 408248 60 1 1 14X0003B 0 408248 60 120 1 Ag 14X0003C 0 408248 60 EZ 1 ig INITIAL JOUTPUT BEGA BEGB BEGC ENDA ENDB ENDC BUSA BUSB BUSC BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK 1 26 Mi o 7 4 O 245 fle Exa_3 pl4 x vwart wi USC wh EGC vENDC factors i i i i onsets D P65 D 7 565 6 2 TACS controlled induction machine Exa_4 adp This example shows the usage of the Universal Machine type 3 manual initialization along with usage of TACS The use of info arrows whose purpose is to visualize information flow between the TACS FORTRAN objects are also shown here The info arrows can be selected under TACS Draw relation in the component selection menu and they are handled graphically as normal connections Th
31. 61 DEN Le EDI SS TACS type Signal selector T 88 98 or 99 SEN E Si D de E i Se ZS The initial condition of a TACS variable can be specified by selecting TACS object type 77 TACS under the TACS Initial cond menu The name of this component is INIT T and its icon is Mit 4 9 10 6 Fortran statements The component dialog box of the Fortran statements General object provides a Type field where the user is allowed to specify the type of the object input output inside and an OUT field for the single line Fortran like expression These statements are written into the TACS subsection of the ATP input file starting at column 12 122 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual The Fortran statements Math and Logic sub menus include additional simple objects for the basic mathematical and logical operations General General FORTRANI TACS type User specified FORTRAN S 88 98 or 99 expression Fortran statements Math y 2 x K MULTK a Multiplication by a factor of K ype type 98 y MM gt x NEG TACS Change the sign of the input type 98 signal Fortran statements Logic NOT NOT fe TACS Logical operator type 98 OUT NOT IN AND AND hes TACS Logical operator type 98 OUT IN 1 ANDIN 2 TACS Logical operator type 98 OUT IN_1 ORIN 2 NAND NAND TACS Logical operator type 98 OUT IN I NANDIN 2 type 98 OUT IN 1 NOR IN 2 type 98 Output 1 if x gt y
32. 661699553750516840E 02 963926784 3994590E70L 3 IZSTC40 791 S4220E705 rl06254 10963532 740 01 se 4e241252635050ER 01 09037789940054400E 00 249697064932 160820E 01 213057 lLe63S61L530870E 01 04681439259560140E 05 71298258454233264 65000E 04 2Z07 31340332155 700 03 386Z10124111 855760E 00 10224088106603180E 00 41335010019846590E 00 15548032274707750E 03 gt 448807323801 0960E 05 65367800810841260E 05 66683013561545090E 08 05671037383603570E700 2989784144227 71360103 0233891L0685068050E 03 1230672162608 1530E 03 llJO0 76568271057 80R704 94008668415039310E 05 L9007030519145770E 06 8950733239403340E 06 22 1429239095041497 5 530ET02 06162432351867040H 03 NO 9982809433488110 0E 1 15829187052544840E 00 4539655669052 3950ET00 16271239076000870E 01 30400350959367960H 03 DO NM o amp F NY 8 80044308390158510E 03 G41 2931976921 8620E700 321253501L75557480E 00 s TL2 1443571 90S55300E70L 94708706438469110E 03 90321051349664770E 05 L8542118698838620E1 06 3 GO OS On sad l 530290E 00 24770604565210580H 03 164221877933526 0E 03 s07 3275186402 612950E704 58660280161038010E 04 07878665220420980E 05 2629034239221 79640E 06 d OonwIrFWwWNS A 200 bOSZ 11 00000000 598881414 00000000 sO7 1932 11 00000000 A 0 0 0 0 00000000 O 0 Q0000000 IN 70710678 00000000 00000000 70710678 B a r 0 QO 0 e 0 41762016 00000000 8
33. Ch CC Ch Ch Ch CC Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch CC Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch CH Ch CH CH CH CH CH CHOCO CH CH CO CH CH O 3 CHOCO CHOCO CH COOC CHOCO CH CH ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual 9999 I PT1A LINEA 20s 650 25465 024 L Q 0 2PT1B LINEIB da DOU 2 9RS O24 L A O 3PT1C LINE1C 0 1X0118AX0293A 20 00 254R5 UZ L 0 O 2XOLISBXO2Z93B 2a LGUs 259RS UL 2 A O 3X0 L L 8CX0293C O 1X0083AX0120A 204 2400 ER sUlr L Q O 2X0083BX0120B 2a LGUs 229HS Ulo 2 A O 3X0083CX0120C O TR400A 003 O TR400B 003 O TR400C s003 O 1X0105AX0108A 20s 6o0a rk US1 L Q O 2X0105BX0108B Za 200s 2 9RS Qol L Q O a X0 LOSCXO LOC O 1SICA X0108A 20 00 2 465 007 L 0 O LEE XOLOEB 2a LGUs 259RS O07 L Q 0 351CCG EU O 99SICA Le 1EG ile 1 100 Pk LEs T0 5 EK SE GK 8 34E5 Dade n E UK ee 2 n4 1 082E6 3 E4 1 2E6 2999 XO132AX0133A 1 DU O X0132BX0133B 1 DU O XOLSZCXO1 330 1 DU O 1XX0135XX0075 lOs 200 2 5BS 007 2 Q O 1X0083APTIA 20s AUU 254R5 085 E 0 O 2X0083BPT1B 2a 200s 2s9FS 065 1 Q O 3XO0CICPILC O PTIA 0005 O PTIB s0005 O BIL s0005 O 1X02 93AX0269A 20s Ooue 2r4mo ES 1 0 O 2 X029 3BX02 69B Z SGUs 2s9ES O22 L 0 O 3X02 9 3CX02 69C O 1XX0143XX0135 JE 2002 250RS s lg 1 Q O XX0062 AQ O XX0062 ioe i005 O 1XX0149XX0069 Os 2002 Zeeks s007 2 Q O 1XX0151XX0149 lOs 200 cke Kos 2 A O XXO151 AQ O XX0151 Los 2005 O XX0143 40 O XX0143 Los 005 O 1 LINE2A
34. Fig 5 4 The user is then allowed to connect this group object to the rest of the circuit Torque Fig 5 4 On return from the Compress the circuit 1s redrawn Group objects operate like any other objects You can drag and place the new group in the desired location The component dialog of the group can be opened by a right or double mouse click and it appears as shown in Fig 5 5 The data and node values are specified as in Fig 5 2 and Fig 5 3 Group GRP00007 Attributes NODE PHASE NAME IN Anc WM Group Mo fo Label Comment Hide TC Lock oy a 0 ORK Cancel Help Fig 5 5 Opening the new group dialog box When changing the data parameter in this window the value will be transferred to the member components A change in the node name will be transferred in the same way In this specific case the Fortran TACS objects are connected to the single phase side of a splitter The name of the 3 phase node V will be transferred as the names VC VB and VA from left to right to the Fortran objects output node The user must follow this phase sequence in the PWM group object too The Compress process for the mechanical load of the induction machine and the component dialog of the new group can be seen in Fig 5 6 and Fig 5 7 respectively ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 131 SINTEF Advanced Manual Compress Group xX Objects Data Available Added to group a RES AA Uf
35. ITIPE LEVEL Request Armco M4 oriented silicon steel only 1 availab C 1 4 That was ITYPE 1 As for LEVEL 2 moderate accuracy outp G chee OT a7 Current and flux coordinates of positive saturat 3 68750000E701L 9 49129417R701 2 45500000E 01 9 43411765E 01 1 10475000E 01 9 23400000F 01 4 91 000000F 00 9 033e6235E 0 1 1 84125000E 00 8 86235294E 01 6 13750000F 01 6 51929412E 701 2s 14812500E 00 8 11905882E 01 349397590 00E 00 7 43294118E 01 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 215 SINTEF Application Manual EE 6 23894 1 EE 4 9L QOQQQOR O0 4 2 4L1L76GE UL 6 L37SO0000RTOO 3 056041 enrol 6 75 L25000F700 4 231056862E701 S20 7ZO0000RTO0 S271 764 EEN 701 Ll lO47S000R 01 626611764 SEET Pe S373 7500RTOL 7 432941 SEET le 74918 1 50E401 6 004 705 6er 01 Aes ocOUCRTOL S 01 92041 2F 701 Jed BIIO URTOL 8291952940 e701 4 29629000EF01 9 205411 76E701 6 13 HEET 9 491294 2R 01 9 S82000000E 01 9 72000000E 01 Le JOUZS000R 02 9 7 771764 EPUL goo Such a nonlinear characteristic can be connected to the Type 96 inductor in two ways include as an external file or enter flux current data pairs directly in the Characteristic page as shown in Fig 6 39 The Copy and Paste buttons of the dialog box provide a powerful way to import the whole characteristic from an external text file via the Windows clipboard or export it to another Type96 objects It is thus possible to bring a HYSDAT punch file up in a text
36. It is very important to ensure a correct ATP installation and setup of the run ATP F2 command in ATPDraw This is done under Tools Options Preferences It is recommended to use batch files Three such files are distributed with ATPDraw runATP S bat for the Salford version DBOS required runATP W bat and runATP G bat for the recommended Watcom or GNU versions of ATP If the setup of the ATP command is incorrect the line and cable models will not be produced The punch file output is transferred to a DATA BASE MODULE file by ATPDraw after the successful line parameter calculation so that the node names are handled correctly The lib file required to build the final ATP file is given the same name as the alc file with extension lib and stored in the same folder The user can also run ATP at any time by clicking on the Run ATP button store the alc data on a different file Save As or import old alc file data Import Clicking on the View button displays the cross section of the line cable as shown in Fig 5 16 For overhead lines the phase number is displayed with zero as ground For cables the grounded conductors are drawn with a gray color while the ungrounded conductors are black The phase number is according to the rule of sequence first comes the cable with the highest number of conductors and the lowest cable number The thick horizontal line 1s the ground surface Zooming and copying to the Windows clipboard is supported in m
37. L voltage kV om herr fe Power Mva Jan 20 75 BE Wl Ebh H Phase shift deg o mifa x Facto ry te _ _ o A EEE Msssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Performed at Lv sl Connect at Tv sl positive sequence positive sequence eea Pora e 15 250 710 250 168 159 Positive core magnetization View Cop ic Linear internal f External Lm C External Lm Am C Rm C Lmmmmms fe Lm tlux Group Mo fo Label Aata Factory test data E Hide Comment 0 OK Cancel Import Save As Pun ATP View Copy Help Fig 6 37 BCTRAN dialog box of the 400 132 18 kV transformer Following data specification the program offers to generate a BCTRAN input file and run ATP It can either be performed by a Run ATP requests without leaving the dialog box or selecting OK If the BCTRAN file is correct a punch file will be created This file is directly included in the final ATP file and there is no conversion to a library file as for lines cables The BCTRAN input file generated by ATPDraw is shown next This file is given extension atp and stored in the BCT folder 214 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF BEGIN NEW DATA CASE ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN SERASE C Excitation test data card Application Manual C lt FREQ gt lt IEXPOS gt lt SPOS gt lt LEXPOS gt lt IEXZERO gt lt SZERO gt lt LEXZERO gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt 3 30 205600056 200 140 E Gr A C Winding data card
38. Linear internal f External Len C External Lm Am C Rm G Lmmmms Lm tlux Group No fo Label Factory test data T Hide Comment OK Cancel Import Save As Pun ATP View Copy Help Fig 5 41 The BCTRAN dialog box Under the Open circuit tab the user can specify where the factory test has been performed and where to connect the excitation branch In case of a three winding transformer one can choose between the HV LV and the TV winding Normally the lowest voltage is preferred but stability problems for delta connected nonlinear inductances could require the lowest Y connected winding to be used Up to 6 points on the magnetizing curve can be specified The excitation voltage and current must be specified in and the losses in kW With reference to the ATP Rule Book the values at 100 voltage is used directly as TEXPOS Curr and LEXPOS Loss kW One exception 1s if External Lm is chosen under Positive core magnetization In this case only the resistive current is specified resulting in TEXPOS Loss 10 SPOS where SPOS is the Power MVA value specified under Ratings of the winding where the test has been performed If zero sequence open circuit test data are also available the user can similarly specify them to the right The values for other voltages than 100 can be used to define a nonlinear magnetizing inductance resistance This is set under Positive core magnetization a Specifying Linear interna
39. Load 1 ph CIGRE Load 3 ph rect ele Fig 4 70 Supported HFS components The Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS is one of the options under ATP Settings Simulation The Frequency comp menu supports four HFS objects for such a simulation HFS Source HFS SOUR gien Harmonic frequency source HFS ype Cigre load I ph CIGRE 1 n Single phase CIGRE load ype Cigre load 3 ph CIGRE 3 BRANCH 3 phase CIGRE load type 0 ype Selecting HFS under ATP Settings Simulation will run the ATP data case so many times as specified in the Harmonic Em Ame lAn source component dialog box The frequency of the harmonic ech source will for each ATP run be incremented In the example F 0 1 0 3 5 115 i shown at left 5 harmonic components are specified in the F n g 0 03 0 column and the ATP data case will run 5 times 11 002 0 zl Fig 4 71 Specification of harmonic source frequencies In the first run the source frequency will be 1x50 Hz the second run 5x50 Hz etc up to the fifth run f 11x50 Hz 550 Hz The Freq value specified by the user under ATP Settings Simulation is used here as base frequency The source frequency can also be specified directly in Hz and in such case the first F n must be greater or equal to the Power Frequency Specifying the frequencies F n like 50 250 350 450 and 550 would be equivalent to what is shown in Fig 4 71 4 9 13 Standard Component In ATPDraw 3 x the standard component support files
40. PI equivalent Semlyen JMarti and Noda is also included in ATPDraw where the user specifies the geometry and material data and has the option to view the cross section graphically and verify the model in the frequency domain Objects for Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS have also been added Special components support the user in machine and transformer modeling based on the powerful Universal Machine and BCTRAN components in ATP EMTP ATPDraw supports hierarchical modeling by replacing selected group of objects with a single icon in unlimited numbers of layers POCKET CALCULATOR and PARAMETER features of ATP is also supported allowing the user to specify a text string as input in a components data field then assign numerical values to these texts strings later SINTEF TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 ELIRA ALUL TE i oo nce cee cea acne nes tee nese acne as saudi 7 EL E A EE EE 9 Bi recesses AE eis steno 10 1 3 Operating priciples and capabilities of ATP TEE 10 13 1 Integrated simulation EECH Eeer eege iiini 11 bos Ge EE 12 1 3 3 Main characteristics of plotting programs for AIR 13 1 3 4 Typical EMTP applications eessen 15 Lo a CLs E 15 L4 Lonen olihe E 15 LS CS Bet 16 2 metaan Maal HEEN 17 cl APEE ag E 19 2 2 How to download ATPDraw ou cceccccsccccssccessccesscceescceescceussscussccessccessceeesseuseseusess 20 43 Hardware Po Oi CEET 20 E AR Pe a ascetic EE E every EE A eect 20 2 5 Files and sub folders in the ATPDraw system folder
41. ROLOLr coils Specify the number of d axis rotor coils Maximum total number is 3 Only terminals for lst d axis coil The other coils are assumed short circuited Global Visualization of mode of initialization and interface Set under the main menu ATP Settings Switch UM for each circuit stator page Specify resistance and inductance in Park transformed quantities d g and U system ROCOr page All anductances in H or pw The total number of coils are listed and given data on the Rotor page First the d axis coils then the q axis coils are listed Specify resistance and inductance for each coil All the coils except the first is short circuited All inductances in H or pu 162 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF gearen Magnet page LMUD d axis magnetization inductance LMUQ q axis magnetization inductance Turn on off the saturation Symm is equal saturation in both axis specified only in d LMSD d axis saturated inductance FLXSD d axis flux linkage at the saturation knee point FLXRD d axis residual flux linkage at zero current LMSQ d axis saturated inductance FLXSQ g axis flux linkage at the saturation knee point FLXRO g axis residual flux linkage at zero current NB All inductances in H or pu Initial page Initial conditions dependent on manual or automatic initialization is chosen under ATP Settings Switch UM A tomatic AMPLUM initial stator coil
42. SS replaces the 1 sign normally used in a batch file ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual ARMAFIT Holds the name of the Armafit program used for NODA line cable models A batch file runAF bat is suggested Directories The following table describes the available options on the Directories page Option Description Project folder The directory where ATPDraw stores the project files adp ATP folder Specifies the directory in which atp files are created Model folder Directory containing support sup and model mod files for MODELS components Group folder The container of the group object support files sup The group support files are automatically deleted when the ATPDraw is closed User spec folder Directory containing support sup library 1lib and punch pch files for user specified components Line Cable folder Default folder for the line and cable models This folder will contain sale files ATPDraw line cable data intermediate atp and pch files and lib files include If the ale files are stored in that directory the resultant lib files used in SInclude statements in the final ATP input file are also stored in this directory The SPrefix SSuffix option should in this case be turned off The Noda format in ATP does not allow to specify the full path for Sinclude files Therefore Noda lines alc files must be stored in the same directory as the final ATP file Bet
43. Set initialization type 6 under ATP Settings Switch UM UM MACHINE DC machine Set initialization type 8 under A7P Settings Switch UM 114 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 UM8 DC gt I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 8 Transformers Ideal 1 phase Ideal 3 phase saturable 1 phase saturable 3 phase sat vir Jeng BCTRAN Fig 4 61 Transformer models in ATPDraw The popup menu under Transformers contains the following items Ideal I phase SOURCE Single phase ideal transformer type 18 Ideal 3 phase TRAFO 13 ip SOURCE 3 phase ideal transformer Pr type 18 Saturable TRAFO 5 aE BRANCH Single phase saturable transformer 1 phase TRANSFORMER Saturable GENTRAFO vu BRANCH General saturable transformer 3 phase TRANSFORMER 3 phase 2 or 3 windings BRANCH 3 phase saturable transformer High Sat Y Y 3 leg TRAYYH S in TRANSFORMER homopolar reluct 3 leg 3 ph node THREE PHASE Preprocessing of manufacturer data Y BCTRAN BCTRAN ZE BRANCH Direct support of BCTRAN transformer Type 1 9 matrix modeling The characteristic of the nonlinear magnetizing branch of the three saturable type transformers can be given in the Characteristic tab of the component dialog box The saturable transformers have an input window like the one in Fig 4 44 In this window the magnetizing branch can be entered in Irms Urms or I4 FLUXy coordinates The RMS flag on the Attributes page select between the two input fo
44. TRAN3B TRAN3C SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC LIN750 4 LIB TRAN3C TRAN3A TRAN3B RECVC RECVA RECVB SWITCH C lt mw 12 lt n 2 gt lt Tolose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie gt lt Vf CLOP gt lt type gt RECVC SLG A s0285 225 10 0 X0017CSENDC he 073 0 X0017ASENDA elle d O X0017BSENDB Se d O SENDC LN1C MEASURING 1 SENDA LN1A MEASURING 1 SENDB LN1B MEASURING 1 ER X0022C ie mates 0 RECVA X0022A eller d 0 RECVB X0022B Se d O SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt ae gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14X0012C 0 612300 SE SH ds 14X0012A 0 612300 SE slps Sch d 14X0012B 0 612300 SE 120s sl slg 14X0021C 0 612300 ert Et als dE 14X0021A 0 612300 SE seals ioe SS V 14X0021B 0 612300 Sr 130 SS d INITIAL OUTPUT SENDC SENDA SENDB RECVC RECVA RECVB BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Fig 6 25 shows the results of the simulation The upper curve is the phase to ground voltage at the receiving end of the line Following the secondary arc extinction an oscillating trapped charge appears on the faulty phase which is the characteristics of the shunt compensated lines The blue lower curve shows the line current at the faulty phase during the fault and henceforth ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 199 SINTEF Application Manual Fig 6 26 shows the recorded phase voltages and li
45. To move around in the circuit you can use the window scrollbars or drag the view rectangle of the Map window to another position Component selection menu This menu pops up immediately when you click with the right mouse button in an empty space of the Circuit window In this menu you select the circuit objects After selecting an object in one of the sub menus the object 1s drawn in the circuit window in marked and moveable mode Circuit comments A comment line below the circuit window shows a user defined circuit comment text MAP window This window gives a bird s eye view of the entire circuit The size of a circuit 1s 5000x5000 pixels screen points much larger than your screen would normally support Consequently the Circuit window displays only a small portion of the circuit The actual circuit window is represented by a 34 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF E EE rectangle in the Map window Press and hold down the left mouse button in the map rectangle to move around in the map When you release the mouse button the circuit window displays the part of the circuit defined by the new rectangle size and position The map window is a stay on top window meaning that it will always be displayed on the top of other windows You can show or hide the map selecting the Map Window option in the Window menu or pressing M character Status bar Action mode field The current action mode of the active circuit window is di
46. Word or WordPerfect having filter available to this format Note Direct printing is not supported in ATPDraw v3 0 due to a scaling problem that made this feature useless anyway 4 2 1 13 Exit This command closes all open circuit windows of ATPDraw User will be asked to save any modified circuits before the application is terminated 4 2 2 Edit This menu contains the various edit facilities of circuit objects in ATPDraw The Edit popup menu 1s shown in Fig 4 6 Edit An object or group of objects must be selected before any edit Undo Gridsnap Alt BkSp operation can be performed on them If the user clicks on an Redo Rotate Shift Alt BkSp object with the left mouse button in the circuit window the icon of Cu Cola the object will be rounded by a rectangular frame indicating that it Copy Ctrl C is selected Paste Ctra Duplicate Lol Clear Del Copy Graphics Ctrl vy Select Move Label Liz Rotate Lt Rubber Bands Ctrl 6 Compress Extract Edit Group Cat Edit Circuit EtritH Comment Fig 4 6 Edit menu 4 2 2 1 Undo Redo The Undo command cancels the last edit operation The Redo cancels the last undo command Short key for Undo Redo Alt Backspace and Shift Alt Backspace The number of undo redo operations depends on the Undo redo buffers setting on the Preferences tab of the Tools Options menu Default value is 10 Almost all object manipulation functions object create delete move rotate etc
47. and Browse to select the name of the executable disk file of the corresponding application Update button adds the new Run command to the ATP menu 2 6 4 Running TPPLOT from ATPDraw TPPLOT is also a DBOS application and it does not run under Windows NT 2000 XP Settings are very similar to that of in section 2 6 2 for Salford ATP When creating the Run TPPLOT command using the ATP Edit Commands submenu select None as Parameter and Drive Path TPPLOT BAT as Command The TPPLOT BAT has a single line run77 Satpdir stpp exe Properties are almost identical as in section 2 6 2 with Screen as exception that should be set full screen Moreover it is suggested to modify the settings at the end of the TPPLOT BEG file as shown below 6 LAB2 comment it out or copy the LAB2 file into your ATPDraw directory FILE ATP PL4 add these two commands at the end of the file CHOLCE 2 6 5 ATPDraw command line options Command lines are rarely used under Windows operating systems nevertheless ATPDraw provides an option to load one or more project files at program start In the example below the project file mylst adp and my2nd adp will be loaded automatically and displayed in separate circuit windows C ATPDRAW gt atpdraw c atpdraw cir mylst adp c cir my2nd adp In MS Windows environment you can use this property to create a shortcuts on the desktop for the ATPDraw project files For instance click with the right mouse button on an em
48. automatic bundling feature of LINE CONSTANTS Skin effect If the button is checked skin effect is assumed IX 4 if unchecked no skin effect correction REACT option is set IX 0 system type Overhead Line Phases 3 M Transposed M Auto bundling vw Skin effect KEE Units IT Segmented ground GG Mett GEESS if English Metric English Switching between the Metric and English unit systems Fig 5 18 System type options for overhead lines Segmented ground Segmented ground wires If button is unchecked then the ground wires are assumed to be continuously grounded Real trans matrix If checked the transformation matrix is assumed to De real The eigenvectors of the transformation matrix are rotated closer to the real axis so that their imaginary part is assumed to become negligible Recommended for transient simulations Otherwise a full complex transformation matrix will be used Recommended for steady state calculations 5 3 1 1 Model Type settings Bergeron No additional settings are required PI For nominal PI equivalent short lines the following optional settings exist under Data Model Type Data Bergeron M Printed output IM ey C print out a Output C C JMarti Cu cj T Ce i Ce C csp Cs C Noda C Semlyen Fig 5 19 Optional settings for PI line models ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 139 SINTEF Advanced Manual Printed output If selected th
49. be used This object is also given in the lower left corner of the circuit as hidden object Fig 6 11 12 pulse HVDC station Exa_6 adp 186 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual User specified H DC_6 Attributes Group Mo fo Label Comment Leer specified Bole M Send parameters 5 Include Ww3 Usp HVDC_6 LIB Browse D fe ae TC Fock nternal phase seq OF Cancel Help Fig 6 12 Input dialog box of the users specified 6 pulse rectifier bridge Fig 6 13 12 pulse HVDC station sa 6g adbp Compressing the valves and their control into a single HVDC group object ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 187 SINTEF Application Manual Group GRP0O0006 x Attributes Group No fo Label Comment T Hide TC Lock Fig 6 14 Input dialog box of the HVDC group object The ATP file created by ATPDraw is shown next BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Monday 1 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 SDUMMY XYZ000 C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 2 E 5 J035 500 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 TACS HYBRID C 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R X lt L gt X lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt
50. box for standard components 100 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual Parameters common to all nodes are Name Display UserNamed A six or five 3 phase components characters long node name The parameter caption is read from the support file If you try to type in a name on the reserved ATPDraw format XX1234 for single phase or X1234 for three phase nodes you will be warned Ignoring this warning can result in unintentional naming conflicts If checked the node name is written on screen regardless of the current setting of the Node names option in the View Options dialog box This checkbox shows whether this node name is specified by the user or ATPDraw If the user wants to change a user specified node name he must do this where the UserNamed box is checked If not duplicate node name warnings will appear during the compilation Node with UserNamed set are also drawn with a black node dot The following list explains the type specific node parameters Standard and USP components Ground If checked the node is grounded MODELS node Type TACS Type TACS Type node O Output 1 Input current 1 2 Input voltage v 3 Input switch status switch 4 Input machine variable mach 5 TACS variable tacs 6 Imaginary part of steady state node voltage imssv 7 Imaginary part of steady state switch current imssi 8 Output from other model Note that the model tha
51. can add additional commands e g Run PlotXY Run Analyzer Run PCPlot Run TPPlot etc to the existing program items which are listed immediately below the Edit commands as shown in Fig 4 13 Fig 4 13 The ATP menu In the A7P Settings dialog box several options for the active circuit window can be specified These settings are used when ATPDraw generates the ATP input file Options are sorted in six tabs such as the Simulation and Output for the miscellaneous data card settings Switch UM for statistical and Universal Machine studies Format for specification of data card sorting options and miscellaneous request Record for MODELS output specification and the new Variables Simulation settings Sl mulation delta T ies Tmax WW opt fo Copt fo Freq E Power Frequency the ATP file 70 simulation type Time domain CG Frequency scan C Harmonic HFS Power Frequency Qutou M Magnitude M Real lmag Simulation type Select between the Simulation methods supported by ATP O O O Time domain Frequency scan Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS Time domain delta T Time step of simulation in seconds Tmax End time of the simulation in seconds Xopt Inductances in mH if zero Copt Freq otherwise inductances in Ohm with Xopt as frequency Capacitances in micro F 1f zero otherwise capacitances in uMho with Copt as frequency System frequency in Hz Fig
52. capacitor with the left mouse button hold down and drag to a desired position then click the right mouse button 3 times or press Ctr R to orient the capacitor as shown in Fig 3 22 Finally click on open space to place the capacitor Fig 3 22 Placing a capacitor with initial conditions Next select the load resistor in the component selection menu Branch linear Resistor The resistor 1s drawn in moveable mode in the circuit window Select Edit Rotate to rotate the resistor Click on it with the right mouse button to rotate then click with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position and place as shown in Fig 3 23 Fig 3 23 Place load resistor The time has come to connect the load to 46 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF E EE the rest of the diode bridge The process has been explained before Click on the component nodes you wish to connect with the left mouse button sequentially A left mouse click on open area while in MODE CONN END generates a new node dot which can be used as the starting point of any new connections This way creating a circuit having only perpendicular connections recommended for complex circuits to improve the circuit readability is a relatively simple task as shown in Fig 3 24 Fig 3 24 Your first circuit is almost ready After you have finished connecting the source side and the load side of the circuit you can specify the load data Click w
53. component selection menu 5 5 1 Creating the model file The actual model file describing the operation of the model must be written outside of ATPDraw using an ASCII text editor or the built in Model Editor under Objects Model New mod file Below the model in DC68 DAT has been modified a bit since it is not allowed to use expressions in the USE of a model Instead of calculating the voltage across the arrester in the USE statement the two node voltages at each side are sent as input parameters and the difference is calculated inside the model vcap V1 V2 MODEL FLASH A comment KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK i Function set or cancel the gap firing control signal a i Inputs voltage and current across ZnO resistor i i Output the firing signal to the electrical ZnO component i kk kk Ek Ak kk kk Ek Ak kk Ek kk kk kk Ek kk kk kk Ek Ak kk Ek Ek Ak kk Ek kk endcomment INPUT V1 Voltage on positive side of ZNO V V2 Voltage of negative side of ZNO V EELER ZNO current Amps DATA Pset power setting Megajoules msec Eset energy setting Megajoules fdel firing delay msec fdur a fairing duration msec VAR power power into ZnO resistor Watts ERC gap firing control signal 0 or 1 energy energy into ZnO resistor Joules tfire time at which the gap was last fired sec vcap voltage difference across series caps Volts OUTPUT trip HISTORY INTEGRAL pow
54. dE counter clock wise Click on the diode with the Transformers Diode type 11 left mouse button hold down and drag to the position shown in Fig 3 14 Fig 3 13 Selecting a diode Click with the left mouse button on empty area to place the diode Remember the grid snap facility and the overlap warning Next you select the snubber circuit across the diode In this example 1 Lois Ba the snubber circuit is a resistor and a capacitor in series Select an RLC g object from the component selection menu Fig 3 5 Fig 3 14 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 43 SINTEF Cur Click on the selected RLC branch with the right mouse button to rotate then click with the left button hold down and drag the RLC branch to be in parallel with the diode Click on the left mouse button to place The idea is further to copy the diode and the RLC branch but before doing so it is wise to give data to them since the data are kept when copied A simple click on the RLC or diode icon with the right mouse button activates the component dialog box to give data to objects Again an explanation of the input parameters is given in a help file Press the HELP button to see this help file The numerical values of the diode are all zero meaning that the diode is ideal and is open during the steady state The RLC branch in Fig 3 14 has been given a resistance of 33 Q and a capacitance of 1 uF You have now given data to the diode and the RLC branch an
55. down and drag it to a desired position as shown in Fig 3 18 You must place the resistor precisely because the next step is to connect the top nodes of the diode bridge with the resistor Before doing so first give data to this resistor opening the component dialog box by a right click on the resistor Specify data value RES 0 01 Q and set Output to 1 Current to get current output in the subsequent ATP run Having closed the component dialog box a small 7 symbol appears on the top left side of the resistor indicating the current output request if not check View Options Now you can start to connect the diode bridge and the resistor together The procedure is to first click with the left mouse button on a starting node as shown in Fig 3 19 The cursor style now changes to a pointing hand and the action mode is MODE CONN START Then release the mouse button and move the mouse a rubber band is drawn from the starting point to the current cursor position To place a connection click on the left mouse button again Click on the right button or press Esc to cancel the connection make operation The connection draw in Fig 3 19 picks up intermediate nodes so all the five nodes will be connected together In this way ATPDraw suits the requirement What you see is what you get and the amount of required connections are significantly reduced k aa RLE RLE RLE RLE Fig 3 19 Click left button Release move then click l
56. drive with mechanical phase shift of 60 electrical degrees The making sequence is A C B with 3 33 ms delay between the poles and the breaking sequence is B C A Some results of the simulation obtained by the elaborated model are shown next Fig 6 44 shows the flux linkage and the phase to ground voltages of the step up transformer during the no load breaking process The residual flux is quite low in all phases thus a subsequent energization will not produce high amplitude inrush current even if the making is done at the voltage zero crossing When synchronizing the first pole to close with the bus voltage and energize the transformer close to the voltage peak the inrush current amplitude will not exceed the peak value of the nominal load current of the transformer see in Fig 6 45 220 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual 80 Vs 60 40 10 5 0 5 Amps 10 file Exa_11 pl4 x var c TR15B TR15C t FLX15C Fig 6 43 Roaming of the operating point on the hysteresis loop in steady state and during the subsequent non sinusoidal oscillations at transformer de energization 320 kV 240 160 80 0 80 160 240 320 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 s 0 10 file Exa_11 pl4 x var t v TR132A v TR132B v TR132C 80 Vs 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 s 0 10 file Exa_11 pl4 x var t t FLX15A t FLX
57. editor mark the characteristic copy it to the clipboard and paste it into the Characteristic page The number of data however must be less or equal to 36 In practice it means that you cannot select HYSDAT input parameter Level 4 No such limit exists for the included nonlinear characteristics TACS MUNO EA amp View Nonlinearity Iof x Attributes Characteristic L 100 0 EE l 944 9129412 93 7694118 40 9105682 68 0517647 61 1905562 58 6117647 49 1717647 70 32 70508 50 0 e Ke a Bae 7 I I I l I l l l l 0 0 50 0 A q File lnclude D ATPDRAW3 Usp y Browse T Include characteristic ee ee e aen eene enne e e len en ee een en e e e I l I l I I l l l r I I I I I l l I l e e e E EE EEN I I I I I I l I l l r I I l l l l l L I A Fig 6 39 Importing the nonlinear characteristic from a HYSDAT puncbh file The complete ATP input file generated by ATPDraw for this study case 1s listed next BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Sunday 21 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 SDUMMY XYZ000 Go di gt lt Max gt lt KOpt 74 COPE gt 5 E 6 BE 500 5 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH G amp A Jon n Arer reiZ R a b 2s CC gt C lt n ie n 2 gt lt refl gt lt rer2
58. eee ee ee ne oer 96 do Component diog E 97 io Node dialop DOF EE 100 Co OOE o O a E EEE 102 do Open EA 102 CAE SS VTLS 0 GT ENN he 103 4 9 1 Probes amp 3 phase ce ececssssssccccccccccceceeeeccaaausssssssseeceecccccceeeeeeessauaaasasssseeeececeeeeeeees 105 SR EE 106 493 Danch E E 108 EE EE EEE EEEE EENE E 109 doa So E EE 112 re 113 a E 114 SE lee rann E 115 4 9 9 MODELS aa 116 NS fl vr a ee 120 4 9 11 Rtg E 124 4 9 12 I crosses codec cas cesta roster E E E E E O E OE 125 4 9 13 Standard EM isos tege ig beer S NNA en EAE iniia 125 5 Advanced EEN 127 5 1 Grouping anew ATPDraw feature for multilevel modeling cece cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 SLL Goune Donnea EE 133 5 2 Support of new ATP features Parameters and Pocket Calculator 0 cece 135 5 3 Using the integrated LCC object for line cable modeling 0 0 0 cc ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 136 5 3 1 Model and Data page settings for Overhead Lines cc ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 139 5 3 2 Model and Data page settings for Single Core Cable aovstems 142 5 3 3 Model and Data page settings for Enclosing Pipe type calles ccccccceeeeeeeeee 144 5 4 Verification of the Line Cable model performance ccccccssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 145 209 BELAIR Eeer E 148 E A i eege 149 e D SC COU LR E E 150 5 53 3 Recording mtermal MODELS A iergent r 154 NS Cl COU suppan in ATPT E 154 5 7 Non standard component dialog boxes eeseseeeeerrerrrrrrrr
59. example circuits but these project files Ga adp are part of the ATPDraw distribution To load these example circuits into ATPDraw use the File Open command or Ctrl O and select the file name in the Open Project dialog box 5 1 Grouping a new ATPDraw feature for multilevel modeling The new grouping facility in ATPDraw allows multilevel modeling by replacing a group of objects with a single icon in unlimited numbers of layers The grouping structure can be taken as a multi layer circuit where the Edit Edit Group brings the user one step down in details while the Edit Edit Circuit menu brings one step back This feature increases the readability of the circuit a great deal and the feature is especially useful for TACS blocks The grouping feature is demonstrated by re designing the circuit Exa 4 adp in the ATPDraw distribution This circuit is an induction machine supplied by a pulse width modulated PWM voltage source The induction machine is represented by a Universal Machine type 3 with a typical mechanical load i Evo odp a ES Fig 5 1 An induction machine supplied by a pulse width modulated voltage source The process of creating a group is as follows Select a group of components inside the polygon in Fig 5 1 Select Edit Compress in the main menu or Shift right mouse click Compress After selecting a group the Edit Compress command will replace it with a single icon As shown in Fig 5 2 in t
60. file editing text viewer for displaying the output LIS file of ATP automatic LIS file checking with special trigger strings to detect simulation errors support of Windows clipboard and metafile export ATPDraw supports multiple circuit modeling that makes possible to work on more circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits Most of the standard components of ATP both single and 3 phase as well as TACS are supported and in addition the user can create new objects based on MODELS or INCLUDE Data Base Module Line Cable modeling KCLee PlI equivalent Semlyen JMarti and Noda is also included in ATPDraw where the user specifies the geometry and material data and has the option to view the cross section graphically and verify the model in the frequency domain Objects for Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS have also been added Special objects help the user in machine and transformer modeling including the powerful UNIVERSAL MACHINE and BCTRAN features of ATP ATPDraw supports hierarchical modeling to replace a selected group of objects with a single icon in unlimited numbers of layers PARAMETER feature of ATP is also implemented allowing the user to specify a text string as input in a components data field then assign numerical values to these texts strings later The circuit is stored on disk in a single project file which includes all the simulation objects and options needed to run the case The project file is in zip c
61. function is to display the results of a time or frequency domain simulation ATP simulation data are stored in a file having extension p14 and it can be processed either off line or on line The latter 1 e to display results while the simulation proceeds is available only if the operating system provides concurrent PL4 file access for ATP and the postprocessor program ATP EMTP TPBIG EXE See one PLA PS file WPCPLOT PlotXY DisplayNT DspATP32 TPPLOT PL42mat GTPPLOT ATP Analyzer HFSPlot PL42mcad Fig 1 2 Plotting programs for ATP TPPLOT program has been written under Salford FORTRAN that requires a DOS extender DBOS is incompatible with NT series of MS Windows thus TPPLOT cannot be used under NT 2000 or XP TPPLOT detects automatically the PL4 file format and reads almost all file formats created by any PC version of ATP TPPLOT has a semi graphical user interface and nearly all commands can be executed by the mouse The program supports up to 20 curves per plot plots versus time as well as X Y plots factor and offset automatic or manual axis scaling and labeling The curves are drawn using solid lines with different colors and user can mark each curve with different characters Visually redundant data points are eliminated on the screen Screen plots can be exported m various text bitmap or vector graphics file formats including Postscript HPGL and COMTRADE The program not only writes but also reads dat
62. gt lt TSTOP gt JINITLAL OUTPUT F2A F2B F2C BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK When creating the ATP file above the nsert Prefix and Suffix cards was unselected on the ATP Settings Format page so the full path of the library file was written to the ATP file in this example Otherwise if this option would have been selected the library files were supposed to be located in the USP folder and have the extension LIB Each library file specification is verified to meet these requirements If the path of a library file specifies a different folder or the extension is not LIB an error dialog is displayed during the ATP file generation process enabling the user to correct the erroneous specification by stripping off the path and extension continue the ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 185 SINTEF Application Manual operation using an un resolvable ATP include reference or cancel the entire ATP file generating process Fig 6 10 shows this error dialog as an example c Unable to resolve path or extension of library file DAATPORAYYS hlo_Lso4LIB LIB When ATP option Auto Path is on library files must be located inthe USP directory and given the extension LIB Strip off file path and extension Fig 6 10 Error dialog when un resolvable LIB file specification was detected 6 4 Modeling an HVDC station Exa_6 adp and Exa_6g adp In sectio
63. in the same state Records the current view state visible or hidden of the main window toolbar so it can be redisplayed in the same state next time when ATPDraw is started Records the current view state visible or hidden of the main window s status bar so it can be redisplayed in the Same state next time when ATPDraw is started the in the Records the current view state visible or hidden of Circuit window comment line so it can be redisplayed same state next time when ATPDraw is started Causes the Open Save dialogs to be drawn in the Windows 3 1 style style Save options Causes program options to be automatically saved to the on exit initialization file when the program is terminated Note that the save state options will have no effect unless program options are saved to the initialization file ATPDraw ini by the Save command at the bottom of the A7PDraw Options dialog or by selecting the Save options on exit check box or by the Tools Save Options menu At the bottom of the ATPDraw Options dialog box the five buttons provide the following functionality Option Description OK Stores current settings into program option variables updates the screen and closes the dialog box Changes made will only affect the current session Save Saves the current settings to the ATPDraw ini file Load Loads settings from the ATPDraw ini file Apply Same as OK but does not close the dialog box Help Displays t
64. is released In most cases when the component icons do not overlap the labels it can be moved by a simple left click then holding the left mouse button down and move Therefore the Move Label command is most frequently used when labels are located close to or behind the component icons and cannot be selected otherwise 4 2 2 10 Rotate This command rotates the selected object s 90 degrees counter clockwise This operation can also be performed by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected group Short key Ctrl R ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 63 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 2 2 11 Rubber Bands If this option is checked connections with one endpoint inside a selected region and one outside are treated as a rubber band between the selected group and the rest of the circuit Short key Ctrl B This command does not work for short cut single component selections e g left click on several components while the Shift key is pressed because this way no connections are selected 4 2 2 12 Compress This command will replace a group of selected objects with a single icon having user selectable external data and nodes ATPDraw supports real grouping or single icon replacement of sub groups in unlimited numbers of layers The process requires a group selection first The Compress dialog box see Fig 4 8 appears where the user designs the new group object In the Compress dialog box the user can specify the external data and
65. lines KCLee Parameters of these nonsymmetrical lines are usually generated outside ATPDraw These components can be characterized as untransposed distributed parameter and lumped resistance models with real or complex modal transformation matrix called as KCLee type in the ATP Rule Book Double phase and 3 phase types are supported Untransposed lines LINEZU_2 BRANCH 2 Phase distributed parameters KCLee 2 phase E untransposed KCLee line model n with complex transformation matrix Untransposed lines LINEZU_ 3 BRANCH 3 phase distributed parameters KCLee 3 phase untransposed KCLee line model e with complex transformation matrix 110 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 4 3 LCC objects In this part of the program you specify the geometrical and Lumped Ge gt material data for an overhead line or a cable and the 1 phase corresponding electrical data are calculated automatically by the Read PCH file Z phase LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETERS praes supporting routine of ATP EMTP d phase 5 phase b phase phase o phase 9 phase Fig 4 56 LCC supports line modeling up to 9 phases To use the LCC module of ATPDraw the user must first select a line cable component with the desired number of phases 1 9 This will display an object in the circuit window that can be connected to the circuit as any other component Clicking on this component with the
66. log scale axis min os max E M log scale M Add 0 0 l l l Copy wmf 0 0 1250 0 K000 3750 0 5000 0 Done Fig 4 45 The View nonlinearity window ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 99 I NT EF Reference Manual The OK button will close the dialog box and the object data and all properties are updated in the data structure Then the red drawing color of the object icon will be turned off indicating that the object now has user specified data When you click on the Cancel button the window will be closed without updating The Help button calls the Help Viewer to show the help text of the object Further help about the Component dialog 1s also available through the Windows standard on line help system of ATPDraw if you press the F7 key The following components deviate somewhat from the above description and will be referenced in the Advaced part of this Manual General 3 phase transformer GENTRAFO Universal machine UM_1 UM 3 UM A UM 6 UM 8 Statistical switch SW_ STAT Systematic switch GW SYST Harmonic source HFS SOUR BCTRAN transformer BCTRANS3 Line Cable LCC objects LCC_x Depending on the type of component opened the group box in lower left corner of the Attributes page may display additional options a you can specify here the name of the mod file name of the MODELS object and the Use As string If the file name does not include a path the file is expected to exist in the MOD fold
67. lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 TRANSFORMER TROOOL 2 Ble 1 9999 IVA wl Bead d 2VSIMA XX0017 sUZ2 Zigoo Apa TRANSFORMER TX0001 TXOO002 1VB 2VS1MB XX0017 TRANSFORMER TX0001 TXO003 TVC 2VS1MC XX0017 VSIMA VS1XXA sUQUT 1 VSIMB VS1XXB s0001 1 VSIMC VG 0001 1 XX0017 i oe O VSA VA O00 1 1 VSB VB C0001 1 VSC VC 0001 1 TRANSFORMER TXO004 1 E12 1 9999 IVA VC E Zoe d 2VS2MA XX0032 MAF E sA 1 OZ TRANSFORMER TX0004 TXOOO5 188 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual 1VB VA 2VS2MB XX0032 TRANSFORMER TX0004 TX0006 1VC VB ZWG AMC XX0UU3Z VS2MA VS2XXA 20001 1 VS2MB VS2XXB s0001 1 VS2MC VS2XXC s0001 1 XX0032 LS 0 POSI XxX0038 EEN O POSL HL 8 83 O XX0038IMP E 1 POS1 POS2 1 E 9 2 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 USP HVDC_6 LIB VS1XX POS1 XX0078 VS1XXA VS1XXC e LOee lt Day 0201 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 USP HVDC_6 LIB VS2XX POS2 HH VS2XXA VS2XXC e tee 200s EE SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Te gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt POS2 XxX0078 MEASURING 1 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase TO gt lt Al gt lt T gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14VSA 0 187794 60 60 St ks 14VSB 0 187794 60 180 SE Es 14VSC 0 187794 G0 60 le is 12IMP 0 229660 Bel INITIAL OUTPUT VA VB VC IMP POS1 POS2 BLANK TACS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BL
68. module file could have detected its own AC input thus the new USP object will have 5 nodes and 3 data U The AC 3 phase node POS The positive DC node NEG The negative DC node REFPOS Positive reference node REFNEG Negative reference node ANGLE The firing angle of the thyristors Rsnub The resistance in the snubber circuits Keeper The capacitance in the snubber circuits Note the importance of the number of characters used for each parameter The U parameter has only 5 characters because it is a 3 phase node and the extensions A B and C are added inside the DBM file Underscore characters has been used to force the variables to occupy the 6 characters space for node names and 6 columns SVINTAGE 0 for the snubber data Running the DBM file through ATP will produce a pch punch file shown below KARD 3 4 3 6 7 7 e 9 9 10 I0 T0 th 121 11 12 12 12 19 13 13 La 14 14 15 1o 1o 16 16 1 17 dy 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 21L 21 21 24 24 24 24 25 2S 29 29 26 20 26 20 2l al 2l 21 2p 2620 26 29 29 29 29 Sch 31 3L 32 32 J2 23 33 32 34 34 34 55 35 35 JG 30 36 KARG 20 4 5 4 oO boslo l eeh eer e 2 a o e A eps Spa L SI a Ss A e ela 4 Eh e eer ek se I EFTel az aza LL I 2 adla salle ada tesa 2 a2 L10 4 2el2 2 welt L Jl L Jsl L Sell KBEG gt a dTa 19 3 69 FAUD rke 38 3 3219 42 oF 36 o2 12 Sho ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 167 SINTEF Advanced Manual la oOo 12
69. nodes of the compressed circuit The selected data and nodes appear as input to the group object that replaces the selected circuit and their values are automatically transferred A nonlinear characteristic common for up to 3 components can also be selected as external data Under Objects all the components in the group are listed with their name support file followed by their label When the user clicks on one of the component s name its data and nodes appear under Available starting with data node name and followed by their names and values Here the user can select a parameter and click on the gt gt button to transfer it to the Added to group list All data and nodes listed in the Added to group will be an external attribute of the new group object The position of the external nodes on the icon border 1 12 can be specified in the lower right corner of the dialog box You can change the Added to group names by double clicking on them Data with the same name are treated as a single data in the component dialog box Fig 4 8 b Selected data and nodes can also be removed from the Added to group by clicking on the lt lt button As all other components the group object is limited to 36 data and 12 nodes When later you open the component dialog box of the group object the selected data values and node parameters will appear as input possibilities The values will automatically be transferred to the sub group as shown in Fig 4 8 b
70. object Fig 4 43 The Component dialog box Component data can be entered in the Value field of the Attributes page The Node Phase and Name fields are initially empty and you are not allowed to enter values here After having node attributes specified by either the user in the Node dialog box or by the Make name or Make File As procedure of ATPDraw the component dialog will exhibit the real values of these fields too Numerical values in the data input fields can be specified as real or integer with an optional exponential integer identified by E or e Many data parameters have a legal range specified To check this legal range place the input caret in a data field and press the Ctrl F1 keys If you specify an illegal value an error message is issued when you move to another data field or select the OK button The user is also free to assign a 6 or less character text string as input data for most of the standard components Numerical values can later be assigned to these variables under ATP Setting Variables using the PARAMETER feature of ATP EMTP see in 4 2 4 1 Just below the data input column there is a Group No input field where an optional group number can be specified to the object It can be used later as optional sorting criteria the lowest group number will be written first in the ATP file on the ATP Settings Format page ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 97 I NT EF Reference Manual The content of t
71. objects with midpoint inside or connections with both endpoints inside the polygon will be included in the selection In the 7ype Group selection mode the group of components can be selected by their type and or group number The type here is the name of the support file and the group number is the identifier specified in the component dialog box The available component types and support names are listed in two combo boxes as shown in Fig 4 7 When you click on OK the components with the selected group number and or support file name become selected Then all kinds of edit operation can be performed on the group copy paste copy graphics rotate edit grouping etc Resistor sl X Cancel Fig 4 7 Selecting objects by name or group no 4 2 2 9 Move Label This menu is used to select and move a component or node text label Short key Ctr L All circuit objects can have a label These labels are displayed on the screen in blue component label or in red color node name Selecting the Move Label menu item the mouse cursor style will change to a pointing hand and move to the middle of the circuit window The action mode indicator in the status bar will also change to MODE MOVE LABEL In this operating mode any label can be dragged to a new position by clicking the label with the left mouse button holding the button down and move This operation ends and the mouse is unlocked when you finish moving a label and the mouse buttons
72. on a 750 kV interconnection are investigated in this study The one line diagram of the simulated network is shown in Fig 6 23 At the sending end of the line shunt reactors are connected with neutral reactors to reduce the secondary arc current during the dead time of the single phase reclosing The staged fault has been initiated at the receiving end of the line 400 kV 750 kV 10000 MVA A Single phase to ground fault 750 kV tr line 4 6000 MVA Se CS 478 km 750 A NU y B 1100 MVA Fig 6 23 One line diagram of the faulted line The layout of the completed ATPDraw circuit is shown in Fig 6 24 Along the route three transposition exist so each LCC object represents a line section between two transpositions with length 84 6 km 162 7 km 155 9 km 75 7 km respectively a Fig 6 24 Line to ground fault study Exa _ 7a adp The supply network model is rather simple a Thevenin equivalent 50 Hz source and a parallel resistor representing the surge impedance of the lines erected from the 400 kV bus An uncoupled series reactance simulates the short circuit inductance of the 400 750 kV transformer bank The single phase shunt reactors are represented by linear RLC components Nononlinearities need not been considered here because the predicted amplitude of the reactor voltage is far below the saturation level of the air gapped core The impedance of the fault arc is considered as 2 ohm constant resistance The ATPDraw gene
73. on the same data case will be different 1 Same result each time the data case is run on the same computer Universal machines Here the user specifies the global data for the Universal electrical machine models in ATP The selections here apply to all universal machines in the CLECULE Initialization Manual Terminal quantities of all machines must be specified Automatic Initial conditions will be calculated by ATP See section 9D1 5 for more details in the ATP Rule Book Units Input variables are specified in SI units or Per unit p u quantities Interface Compensation The machine does appear to be a nonlinear element to the external network Certain rules regarding connecting machines together must be followed Inclusion of stub lines is often required Prediction The machine does not appear to be a nonlinear element to the external network This option is not available for single phase machines Format settings The Format settings page contains four buttons for setting of ATP input file data format a button for controlling the auto path generation and several other buttons for miscellaneous request cards The Additional button supports the user to insert any request card or text strings in the ATP file on precise location Format eon Sorting by cards The sequence of ATP input data follows the default sequence a of data sorting cards i e BRANCH S Oring Ay Caras cards are written first followed by I Sor
74. other continents must follow the licensing procedure of their regional EMTP user group Geographical location of ATP EMTP user groups and contact information details are shown below ei Source www emtp org Fig 2 1 Location of ATP EMTP user groups Name E mail and WWW address Canadian American EMTP User Group canam emtp org European EMTP ATP Users Group EEUG eeug emtp org www eeug org Japanese ATP User Group JAUG jaug emtp org www jaug jp atp index e htm Latin American EMTP User Group CLAUE claue emtp org www furnas gov br atp Argentinian EMTP User Group CAUE caue emtp org http iitree ing unlp edu ar estudios caue caue html j j vancoller ee wits ac za www ee wits ac za atp Chapter 2 7 3 of the Installation Manual gives further information about the ATP related Internet resources ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 19 SINTEF installation Manual 2 2 How to download ATPDraw ATP licensing is mandatory prior to receiving any materials Following the license agreement approval by an authorized user group you are eligible to use the ATP program and all ATP related tools like ATPDraw and this manual There are different sources of obtaining ATPDraw and additional ATP related tools and program manuals Order ATP materials from the Canandian American EMTP User Group http www emtp org canamfl html ger in Oregon USA or from the European EMTP ATP Users Group Association htt
75. output as well GTPPLOT has no graphical interface the user must use the keyboard for all the input commands Developer Mr Orlando P Hevia heviaop ciudad com ar Santa Fe Argentina Licensing Distributed at no cost to the licensed ATP users Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG MTU secure FTP Web sites PlotXY is a WIN32 plotting program originally designed for ATP EMTP The program is mainly designed to make as easy and fast as possible line plots in Microsoft Windows environments It is also able to perform some post processing on the plotted curves algebraic operations computation of the Fourier series coefficients The program has an easy to use graphical user interface and the 32 bit code provides very fast operation Up to 3 PL4 or ADF files can be simultaneously held in memory for easy comparison of different data and up to 8 curves per plots versus time or X Y plots are allowed The program has a clever automatic axis scaling capability and able to make plots with two independent vertical axes and provides easy tools for factors offsets and zoom support and a graphical cursor to see values in numerical format Screen plots can be exported as Windows Metafile via win32 clipboard Developer Dr Massimo Ceraolo ceraolo dsea unip1 it University of Pisa Italy Licensing acknowledgeware Distributed at no cost to the licensed ATP users If user keeps it beyond the 30 day trial period he she must se
76. public domain by U S law ATP is not in the public domain and licensing 1s required before access to proprietary materials is granted Licensing 1s however available free of all charge to anyone in the world who has not participated voluntarily in the sale or attempted sale of any electromagnetic transients program hereafter called EMTP commerce 1 3 Operating priciples and capabilities of ATP The ATP program predicts variables of interest within electric power networks as functions of time typically initiated by some disturbances Basically trapezoidal rule of integration is used to solve the differential equations of system components in the time domain Non zero initial conditions can be determined either automatically by a steady state phasor solution or they can be entered by the user for simpler components ATP has many models including rotating machines transformers surge arresters transmission lines and cables Interfacing capability to the program modules TACS Transient Analysis of Control Systems and MODELS a simulation language enables modeling of control systems and components with nonlinear characteristics such as arcs and corona Dynamic systems without any electrical network can also be simulated using TACS and MODELS control system modeling Symmetrical or unsymmetrical disturbances are allowed such as faults lightning surges and several kind of switching operations including commutation of valves Frequency doma
77. resistance of the magnetizing branch representing the hysteresis and eddy current losses of the iron core JL Fo Rm may be left blank if the magnetizing branch is neglected in the simulation Checking the 3 eg core turns the transformer into a TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE type with high homopolar reluctance that can be specified in the appearing Ro field With the button 3 leg core unchecked the model is a saturable transformer with low homopolar reluctance e g a 3 phase transformer with at least one delta winding 158 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF PEENE Checking the RMS button enables specification of the saturation characteristic in rms values for current and voltage on the Characteristic page A conversion to flux current values is performed internally in ATPDraw If the button is unchecked normal flux current values should be entered The tertiary winding can be turned on or off by checking the 3 wind button The nominal voltage of the transformer windings must be given in kV The short circuit inductances may be specified in mH if Xopt parameter is O default on the ATP Settings Simulation page Otherwise the impedance is given in Q at frequency Xopt Component GenTrafo sup x Attributes Characteristic ER Da Fo 250 Rm 300000 IT 34eg core Group No fo Label vnd11a1 Comment Three winding 120 20 10 k trafo with ndiidii coupling Output l Hide fi Current F Lock a OK C
78. shown next describes a 6 pulse thyristor rectifier bridge based on exercise 54 in 2 The process of creating a DBM file is certainly the most difficult part of adding new circuit objects to ATPDraw The input file to the DBM supporting routine of ATP begins with a header declaration followed by the circuit description The ATP Rule Book 3 chapter XIX F explains in detail how to create such a file The output punch file of the DBM supporting routine can actually be considered as an external library file which is included to the ATP simulation at run time via a INCLUDE call BEGIN NEW DATA CASE NOSORT DATA BASE MODULE SERASE ARG U POS _ NEG__ REFPOS REFNEG ANGLE Rsnub_ Csnub_ NUM ANGLE Rsnub_ Csnub _ DUM PULS1 _ PULS2 PULS3 _ PULS4 PULSS PULS6 MIDI MID2 MID3 DUM GATE1 GATE2 GATE3 GATE4 GATE5 GATE6 MAC RAMP1 COMP1 DUM DCMP1_ DLY60D TACS 11DLY60D 002777778 SOREFPOS OSOREFNEG 98VAC REFPOS REFNEG 98RAMP1 58 UNITY 120 00 0 0 1 0VAC 98COMP1 RAMP1 ANGLE 180 AND UNITY 98DCMP1 54 COMP1 5 0E 3 98PULS1 NOT DCMP1 AND COMP1_ 98PULS2 54 PULS1 DLY60D 98PULS3 54 PULS2 DLY60D 98PULS4 54 PULS3 DLY60D 98PULS5 54 PULS4 DLY60D 98PULS6 54 PULS5 DLY60D 98GATE1 PULS1 OR PULS2_ 98GATE2 PULS2 OR PULS3_ 98GATE3 PULS3 OR PULS4 98GATE4 PULS4 OR PULS5_ 98GATE5 PULSS OR PULS6_ 98GATE6 PULS6 OR PULSI BRANCH SVINTAGE 0 POS U A Rsnub Csnub POS U BPOS U A 166 ATPDra
79. shows how to build a circuit step by step starting from scratch Then special considerations concerning three phase circuits are outlined 3 1 Operating windows ATPDraw has a standard Windows user interface This chapter explains some of the basic functionalities of the Main menu and the Component selection menu of the Main window Main menu Tool bar icons Component Windows tool bar standard buttons E ATPDraw Iof x File Edit View ATP Objects Tools Wow Help Tale a a TE i De s aA HAE TA rat el e S 7 a 4 ia Exa_l adp Bisi Map x h Header project file nee Probes amp 3 phase Branch Linear Resistor a Branch Nonlinear Capacitor Circuit Circuit MEG Lines Cables Inductor map windows a a fm Myfirstadp Switches 4 n RLC 3 ph Example 1 Your first circuit Rectifier brid SECHS SUE xample 1 our first circuit echter Bridge achines RLC D Zb Transformers C Um MODELS L IO CC TACS LIIRp Ge User Specified comments Frequency comp standard Component SS Y 4 e This is my first 47 POraw project 2 MODE EDIT Modified E Ce Current action Bim Status bar with Component mode menu option hints selection menu Fig 3 1 The Main window and the floating Component selection menu The ATPDraw for Windows program is functionally similar to the DOS version 1 The Component selection menu is hidden however but appears immediately when you click the rig
80. state node voltage imssv Imaginary part of steady state switch current imssi Output from other model Note that the model which produces this output must be USEd before the current model This can be done by specifying a lower Group number for the model and then select the Sorting by group number option under ATP Settings Misc OD dG ge Ee Ro SCH The number of Nodes is the sum of inputs and outputs to the Model The number of Data must be equal to the number of DATA declarations of the actual Model The Kind parameter can be changed later in the Model node input window right click on the node dot All model nodes are assumed a single phase one The maximum number of nodes is 12 and the maximum number of data that can be passed into a Model is 36 The Save or Save As buttons can be used to save the new support file to disk Default location of Model support files is the MOD folder 4 2 5 5 New Model mod file In addition to a support file and icon definition each Model component needs a text file which contains the actual Model description This file may be created outside ATPDraw or using the built in Model Editor Selecting the Objects Model New mod file menu the well known internal text editor of ATPDraw pops up ATPDraw supports only a simplified usage of MODELS It is the task of the user to write the model file and ATPDraw takes care of the INPUT OUTPUT section of MODELS along with the USE of each model The following re
81. subsequent energization 6 8 2 Energization of a 132 15 kV generator step up transformer Exa_ adp The use of the icon customization and the advantages of the grouping feature of ATPDraw are demonstrated in this example The simulated case is again a transformer switching study in which a 155 MVA 132 15 kV Y d coupled step up and a 4 MVA 15 6 9 kV D d coupled auxiliary transformer are energized together The fast start gas turbine plant is located near to a 400 220 120 kV substation and the transformers are connected with the substation by a 120 kV single core XLPE cable During the step up transformer energization the generator is still disconnected so need not be considered in this study The ATPDraw circuit of the simulation is shown in Fig 6 41 Fig 6 41 ATPDraw circuit Exa_1l1lg adp ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 219 SINTEF Application Manual Fig 6 41 shows several customized ATPDraw objects created by the Edit Compress command If you are not familiar with this grouping feature please read in section 5 1 of this Advanced Manual This feature provides a powerful tool in advanced modeling On Fig 6 41 the nonlinear hysteretic transformer objects the parallel connected 3 phase breakers and the TACS objects for flux measurement were compressed into single objects and the icon of each group has been customized as well The icon of some non group objects were also customized e g the LCC object of the XLPE cable The
82. the ATPDraw project file just like LCC files for lines cables Then the user is offered to generate a BCTRAN file and run ATP This is really optional since often a new BCTRAN file will be required anyway during the final ATP file generation Trying to run ATP is a good practice however since this will quickly warn the user about possible problems The button Run ATP requests an ATP execution without leaving the dialog box If the BCTRAN file is correct a punch file will be created This file is directly included in the final ATP file and there is no conversion to a library file as for lines cables This 156 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel means in practice that anew BCTRAN file will be created and ATP executed automatically when creating the final ATP file each times the transformer s node names change There is also an mport button available to import existing BCT files The user can also store the BCT file with a different name Save As which is useful when copying BCTRAN objects The View and Copy buttons are for the nonlinear characteristic Copy transfers the selected characteristic to the Windows clipboard in text format with 16 characters fixed columns the first column is the current View displays the nonlinear characteristic in a standard View Nonlin window The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the BCTRAN object This help text briefly
83. the Tools Options General page as shown in Fig 7 1 Parameter Range Description AutoSave On Off Enables disables circuit file auto saving AutoSavelInterval 1 60 5 Specifies the autosave interval in number of minutes CreateBackupFile OnjOff Enables disables the creation of circuit backup files SaveWindowSizePos On Off Enables disables the storing of window size and position SaveWindowstate OnlOff Enables disables the recording of main window current state SaveToolbarState On Off Enables disables the recording of toolbar visibility state SaveStatusBarState OnjOff Enables disables the recording of status bar visibility state SaveCommentLineSt On Off Enables disables the circuit window comment line visibility Win31DialogStyle On Off Enables disables Windows 3 1 style open and save dialogs SaveOnExit On Off Enables disables the auto saving of program options on exit PolyDots On Off Enables disables the removal of extra points left on screen by the polygon drawing function used to select groups of objects in the circuit window PolyBug On Off Enables disables the use of an internal PolyLine function This is a workaround function that corrects a problem which may appear with some display adapters when a polygon is moved DeleteTempFiles On Off Controls whether the user specified components are treated as temporary files and deleted from the default directories at program exit or not Disabled from 3 5p7 Note that the PolyDots and P
84. the source with a three phase switch having independent closing and opening times in all phases The switches are initially open and close at Phase A 33 33 ms Phase B 36 10 ms Phase C 38 80 ms ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 177 SINTEF Application Manual Attributes T start Tstop 1 Group No fo Label Ju Comment Hide Tock OK Cancel Help Fig 6 2 Three phase source input window Capacitor bank The capacitor bank is 2 51 uF in all phases The switches connecting the bank to the network is initially open and close at Phase A 133 33 ms Phase B 136 10 ms Phase C 138 80 ms Pi equivalent line The IJ equivalent line R L C data were calculated by the LINE CONSTANTS supporting routine of ATP outside ATPDraw The line is a 500 kV overhead line with 2x3 phase conductors and 2 ground wires Line parameters were taken from ATP benchmark file DCN3 DAT The calculation resulted in the following line matrices for that 138 miles line only lower triangle part is given Read the inductances in mH the resistances in Q and the capacitances in uF 353 81 315 13 4 71 35 266 15 4 0 3637 2 3684 442 02 353 81 474 76 i 0 2725 0 3637 2 3224 ei el P en mm mm mm wm mm mm pm mm mm mm mm mm em mm mm mm mm oo Ba wm mm em em em pm pm mm mmm mm mm mmm mm mm mm mm mm wm mm mm mm If you click the right mouse button on the line IT icon of F
85. used automatically by ATP DO NOT MODIFY THE SEQUENCING OF THE DATA INPUT AND VAR IN THIS GROUP the names may be modified except nii when built for n 1 the array notation is not required EE endcomment DATA n number of phases ng dflt n nt 1 2 number of conductances INPUT v voltage EH at terminal 1 vO voltage t 0 at terminal 1 10 current t 0 into terminal 1 VAR i current t into terminal 1 is Norton source t timestep at terminal 1 g conductance t timestep at terminal 1 flag set to 1 whenever a conductance value is modified OUTPUT i is g flag COMMEN SSS SS Ae AA eS Next declarations of user defined data for this particular model values which must be defined when using this model as a type 94 component EE EE EE EE EE EE endcomment DATA L1 H reference value of inductance L COMMEN SSS ee eS ee ee EE Next declarations private to the operation of this model SSS SSSS SSS SSeS SS SS SSS EE endcomment VAR Sc used for converting Laplace s to time domain L H variable value of inductance L INIT st 2 timestep trapezoidal rule conversion from Laplace L Ll initialize variable inductance value g 1 st L conductance converted from Laplace 1 sL ENDINIT EXEC L is constant in this example IF t 0 THEN flag 1 conductance values have been changed 1 10 t current through L is 10 g y0 history term for next step ELSE flag
86. user specified lib file into the ATP input file and pass node names and data variables as parameters Each user specified objects must have a sup file containing an icon specification of data and node parameters and a lib file describing the component in the Data Base Module format of ATP o Single and 3 phase reference These objects are not represented in the ATP input data file and serve only as visualization of connectivity Frequency components o Harmonic source for Harmonic Frequency Scan studies o Single and 3 phase frequency dependent loads in CIGRE format o Single phase RLC element with frequency dependent parameters Standard Component o Complete list of standard components in alphabetical order sorted by support file names 4 9 1 Probes A 3 phase Probe Volt The menu Probes amp 3 phase appears when the mouse moves over this Gees Gi val item in the Component selection menu or when the user hits the P Probe Curr Sege character zpi Probes are components for monitoring the node or branch voltage branch Transpl ABC BCA current or TACS values In the Open Probe dialog you can specify the Transp2 ABC CAB number of phases to connect to and select phases to be monitored Transp ABC CBA Transpd 46C 4CB ABC Reference DEF Reference Fig 4 50 Drawing objects on the Probe amp 3 phase menu Probe Volt Selecting this field draws the voltage probe to specify a node voltage to ground output request in the ATP file
87. viewer of component help text editing operations are not allowed and the Fi e menu provides printing options only Additionally the Find amp Replace option is missing in the Edit menu The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and character position of the text buffer caret and the buffer modified status This status bar is not visible when viewing component help A more detailed description of menu options is given in the next sub section 4 2 6 3 Text Editor To invoke the editor you may select the Text Editor option in the Tools menu or the Edit ATP file or Edit LIS file in the ATP menu In the latter case the file having the same name as the active circuit file with extension atp or lis are automatically loaded When the program is called from the Tools menu the text buffer will initially be empty The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and character position of the text buffer caret and the buffer modified status The text buffer of the built in text editor is limited to 32kB therefore not be suitable for editing large files However any other text processor e g notepad exe or wordpad exe can be used if Text editor setting of the Preferences page in the Tools Options menu overrides the default one A detailed description of the menu options are given below File options New Opens an empty text buffer Built in text editor only Open Loads the help text of a supp
88. wave controller P U Fig 6 49 Probability distribution function of the 3 phase reclosing overvoltages ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 227 SINTEF ATPDraw E for Windows 229 SINTEF a 7 1 ATPDraw ini file settings The ATPDraw ini file is optional and it is specified edited under Tools Options in ATPDraw At program startup all optional program variables are given a default value Then ATPDraw searches the disk for an initialization file and if found the new parameters are read from the file into the optional variables overriding the default values If no such file is found the default values apply ATPDraw will create update the file on a Save or Load request under the Tools Options menu The ATPDraw ini file has 8 sections ATPDraw Preferences Directories View Options ATP Settings 1024x768 Reload Objects The ATPDraw ini file is a standard Windows initialization file Each section contains one or more parameter value lines Empty lines or lines beginning with a semicolon are ignored The following sections list and describe the name and legal value range of available parameters as well as the default settings bold One line is required for each parameter and at least one space is needed between the parameter and any in line comment string 7 1 1 ATPDraw The ATPDraw section contains information on the state and general behavior of ATPDraw These settings can be modified on
89. 01 0 05215 0 P75 775 16 0 H 3 E 0 2175 0 601 0 05215 ZU 50 DU 16 0 d d E 0 0 193 Zb le 40 5 40 5 0 0 0 5 q0 0 0 193 Zb 12 9 46 5 95 5 0 0 O Fig 6 18 Model and Data tab of the LCC object with parameters of the 500 kV line Click on OK or Run ATP will produce an ATP file in the LCC folder for the Line Constants run BEGIN NEW DATA CASE JMARTI SETUP SERASE BRANCH IN AOUT AIN BOUT BIN COUT lt LINE CONSTANTS e e ENGLISH 10 364 0 05215 4 1 602 20 50 50 18 0 0 2 20 364 0 05215 4 1 602 0 0 71 5 77 5 18 0 0 2 30 364 0 05215 4 1 602 20 50 50 18 0 0 2 0 0 5 2 61 4 0 386 12 9 98 5 98 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 2 61 4 0 386 12 9 98 5 98 5 0 0 0 0 0 BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS 100 5 E3 138 1 1 100 60 138 1 1 100 0 006 138 d 5 d BLANK CARD BLANK CARD DEFAULT S PUNCH ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BENDING LINE CONSTANT BLANK CARD ENDING JMARTI SETUP BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD 192 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual Running this file through ATP will produce a punch file Exa 7 pch which is not really suitable for human reading but ATPDraw is able to interpret this file and create a corresponding Data Base Module file from it Exa_7 1ib as shown next KARD KARG KBEG KEND KTEX BRANC mrRrRONF Om OO WH e Ber Eet botz ah Gar ter des Ce Eo e MPNHYORrFRDFWANNEF ODF WE W dg co La Oa of SS i di N Aa Ai eF 15 ES 2 2 31 31 38 142 5 3 6 3 9
90. 01CBUSC 200 X0008A St X0008B 2 6A X0008C 2 5A SENA 1 E7 SENB 1 E7 SENC 1 E7 INCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC EXA 7 LIB SENA SENB SENC RECA RECB RECC SWITCH Cx m 122 n 2 gt lt Telose gt x lt Top Tde gt x Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt BUSA SENA 03333 10 BUSB SENB 0361 ken 194 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual BUSC SENC 0388 10 0 XOOO8ABUSA 13333 10 0 X0008BBUSB 1361 10 0 XO0O0O08CBUSC 1388 10 0 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase TO0O gt lt Al gt lt T gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14Xx00014 0 408248 60 1 I 14X0001B 0 408248 60 120 1 V 14X0001C 0 408248 60 120s 1 1 JINITIAL OUTPUT SENA SENB SENC RECA RECB RECC BUSA BUSB BUSC BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The name of the LIB file is specified by complete path in this example If the Auto path Insert Prefix and Suffix option would be selected on the ATP Settings Format page ATPDraw would specify the default prefix D ATPDraw3 USP and suffix LIB in the ATP file In that case the LCC files had to be stored in the USP folder 1 e not in the default LCC folder otherwise an un resolvable path conflict would appear as shown in Fig 6 19 It 1s rather preferred not to use Auto path option if LCC objects are used together with other user specified library objects If
91. 0466014600E 02 428695361 1631455960ER702 d e EAR 206786260934691 5408702 237750525571230360E 04 82293304155450430E705 35545488812076410E 07 sU7TZ812296803 47 20 01 20038562 1 656l6320E700 060242931544000040E 02 48303604468753290E 04 1318396896261490E 05 sVBV5Z95 175560624002 2LVOTOU6GSUS25931090R 01 226165440305 7 58920E 01 2300639455603 98520E70L 09994157407951480E 02 22021 199656093563 90E705 484595775713 28900E 07 9119 75359207063 70E 701 1614313439619750E 01 7978176494747060E 02 97017941683412 1L20E 02 s T230943917L7037L0EF FU3 43552030337 7120560E 04 96904442484739270E 04 903963795059 70650E701 96133850790243510E 02 2423825999032 5933 90E702 35776945398324640E 01 2787566013604 993008701 304743799333311 7 0E 03 2241893239395 751L40BE704 21606 LL1339849532890E 01 0350189240 6855940E 00 306999624182 EIER 2455 3854 950540600E701 sZo02Z2302039 782 1 Z00E 702 19703771 291L1054260E 03 03080060337 777540E 04 005538533901717 750E 00 28 TL72 7349107 023 0E 03 99037583548 l1 862808705 216733065903 7 3 AO AE 137714143264308 40E 03 241477741108265690E 04 O1Z1IZ659209335610E705 0380759058 7109330E 5 053927967744802 20E 01 203 L099 4925397 350E 702 d 88160400497281780E 01 193 3 Ont GO Onbk ba om e MrFePePeWARBNHRFRFR OF OF O1W DN The ATPDraw generated ATP file for this 500 kV example circuit 1s show next The new JMarti SINTEF
92. 0696147 00000000 41762016 00000000 IN C OUT A OUT B OUT C OY LO FF O1W OY O1 FF O1W WF NY DO NM W WN OO Application Manual 219651970923 5000E 02 07857003394846650E 03 699125254 9423187 30E 01 95077180759634070E 00 e Kl KEN 71 S6S698720E700 00 733792506496410E 01 240 2997983652660E103 67347403381400310E 01 090333644325692 208700 207153387662519320E700 E LOT 2221025253008 AE x J OZ290052962539590E704 373731869871937010E 05 64975663973962550E 08 05485324487847550E 01 38901260864032970E 03 41412051470461280E 03 92086218410649090E 04 eI 1296348716925 70E 05 29631312986447 69 70E 05 f 86 2081156244 50E 06 LCC object is interfaced with the rest of the circuit by a Include call BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Monday 1 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 SDUMMY XYZ000 1 O 6 f type gt 8 CO CHOCO CH COOC CH CH O C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 1 E 5 500 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt X lt L X lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 51X0001ABUSA 55 8 98 52X0001BBUSB Pa Sia 2657 53X0001CBUSC XOOO1ABUSA 200 X0001BBUSB 200 XO00
93. 07 sAL23983208602 2930EF06 418731713608 204220E 01 99351376189437840E 0L 5450103780173 62630EF02 12085467108023010E 02 sIZIIIT711I S42 60650403 041986860957 763600E703 96007834650089170E 04 7592748066511 1000E 04 2 2 86043042611746085000E 02 08998260914468980E 02 dg E E ERR e EL EE 361255019474 EE 2913827097 EE REKT 44482788061671540E 03 IL 7 LOS2629592360E703 L 180559427 3183940E 05 95872380578820450E O01 L981 987352401 2580E 00 stlA4eye73l29203 500700 12462616415538130E 01 06200519524050210E 01 46243597095036 80E 03 14419917751103840E 04 016130032323332Z00E706 rPFNOWONDADFNMODdDF BE BAB W d oe 2622847735661 686430E 02 seool9e 7432627 9450E704 LII 08L3029786 890EF 8 14592472486903 13020E 03 92099341206001550E 03 sL 36416970533 73390E 05 03064526061047220H 05 CON WON OAT Ss 2 1204948016650357000E 02 So 9890675968041335000E 04 244 7341 9597275959330E 03 18514563066449690E 02 231231913445598450ER 01 2Z00687547965 e520E 01 94113434544494440E 01 98084617649364590E 02 3669965699992 7960E705 2O2Z2311603343569920E706 el 9519406752903 6910E 700 s06 4530801231 90380R 701 232242024992 78870702 449631608811938940E 02 054023 77130 205200E703 s32780306542535230E703 43985976617333420E 04 e 90516283362 Ek T 618900820032880E 02 0 00 42288050326312 670E 00 T 35238143341787320000E 04 9741730686957 1230E 00 0 00 7211204920995468940E 01 2 92476838
94. 0A CROUB CR50C CRZ2A CRAZE CRZ2C CR25A CRZ0B CRZ0C GRCBA GRCBB GRCBC RAVBA X0048A RAVBB X0048B RAVBC X0048C x0050AX0100A X0050BX0100B XOO50CX01L00C XOO50AX0132A XOO050BX0132B KOOSUCA01LS2C X0073AGRCBA X0073BGRCBB 147500 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 USP ZNO 1 LIB 92X0102BX0104BX0102AX0104A 92X0102CX0104CX0102AX0104A 147500 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 USP ZNO 1 LIB 92CRZ1B CR20B CRZ1A CR20A 92CRZ1C CR20C CRZ1A CR20A alee el l el l l 0 006 0 006 0 006 l l l l l el l el l l 01 01 01 350 150 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ooo O de 1 9935 0 Sree O 5 GH 5 O 5 ene O Da E 0 2003 200 200 O SUD O 200 0 oe 36 14 92 93 4 0 93 4 O 93 4 0 O 0 O 5 oP 5 O 5 E O Da SC O 200 SEN 200 3 O SUD O 200 0 T dl Se E Ee O de 1 OO ors O Soo a O Ie gt lt Vf CLOP gt lt type gt CLOSED GAPA GAPB GAPC CO Ch CHOCO CC Ch CH CH CH CH CC CH CHOCO CO CH CO CHOCO CH O ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual X0073CGRCBC 1 10 CR20A 01998 10 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt inak gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP 14SRC1A OU 4 4E5 60 SS Ove 14SRC1B D d Zb 60 140 14SRC1C 4 4E5 60 100 14SRC2A OU d Zb 60 14SRC2B OU 4 4E5 60 120 14SRC2C 0 d Zb 60 120 JINITIAL OUTPUT BLANK MODELS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SO
95. 0M VA Short circuit loss High to Low 710 kW High to Tertiary 188 kW Low to Tertiary 159 kW ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 213 SINTEF Application Manual In the BCTRAN dialog box you specify first the number of phases and the number of windings per phase under Structure see Fig 6 37 Under Ratings the nominal line to line voltage power ratings the type of coupling of windings and the phase shift must be entered For auto transformers the nominal voltage of the windings which is the required input for BCTRAN is calculated automatically by ATPDraw and the short circuit impedances are also re defined according to the Eq 6 45 6 46 6 50 of the EMTP Theory Book 5 The zero sequence excitation and short circuit parameters are approximately equal to the positive sequence values for an auto transformer having tertiary delta winding so the Zero sequence data available check boxes are unselected in this example The External Lm option is chosen under Positive core magnetization because external Type 96 hysteretic inductors are used to represent the magnetizing inductance Accordingly only the resistive component of the magnetizing current will be entered as EXPOS in the BCTRAN input file E BCTRAN D ATPDraw3 Bct TR400_ 132 18 bct _ O x Structure Number of phases E sl f sl Number of windings Type of core Shell core Test frequency Hz E M AR Output P Auto add nonlinearities Ratings HIV LV IN L
96. 1 SINTEF Application Manual The induction machine was given the data shown in Fig 6 6 Component UM_3 sup Ei Attributes General Magnet Stator Rotor 4 gt RIESS Se Dee ot a a s H nl e E M_NODE BUSMG Rotor coils Meut NEUT d i 4 ho Frequency fen Global Automatic Prediction Group Mo fo Label Comment Qutou Tolerance 0 1885 IT Hide TOOUT OMOWT LG THOLIT e Lock MoOrr t 2 t amp 3 Of 1 CC M CURR O Loc oe OK Cancel Help Fig 6 6 Induction machine input window The numerical values in Fig 6 6 must be specified by the user as in the case for all object input windows The identity text in front of each attribute strictly follows the input variable in the ATP Rule Book 3 The ATP file created by ATPDraw 1s shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C See Ge Ee E E EE E E E E E E E E E EEEE Ee Ed E E ee C Generated by ATPDRAW July Tuesday 30 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 C Sa ee ee ee dE ee ee ee Oe ee E E a ee ee ee SE Se C Induction motor supplied by a C pulse width modulated source C Test example 1 G GF gt lt Tmax gt lt X pt gt lt Coon gt Le sch 500 3 0 O 1 0 0 d O TACS HYBRID TACS 98 FS 1 000 23 PULS 2 001 0005 0004532 98 AMPL 4 0 FS 98 SQPUL AMPL UNITY PULS 98VDELTA SQPUL DELTAT 98VTRI 65 VDELTA 14VCONTC Es 60 eo Oe 14VCONTB SEA 60 2 Li
97. 15B t FLX15C Fig 6 44 Non sinusoidal voltage oscillations appear after de energizing the step up transformer upper curves The residual flux is less then 30 in each phases lower curves ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 221 SINTEF Application Manual 5 0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 ms 50 file Exa_11 pl4 x var t c BREKA CABLA c BREKB CABLB c BREKC CABLC 150 160 kV kV 120 100 80 S A0 0 0 40 50 80 100 oer 150 160 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 s 0 20 0 17 0 18 0 19 s 0 20 file Exa_11 pl4 x var t v iTR132A v TR132B file Exa_11 pl4 x var t viTR132A v TR132B 3200 A 2400 1600 800 0 kb 800 1600 2400 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 ei 0 24 file Exa_11 pl4 x var t c BREKA CABLA c BREKB CABLB c BREKC CABLC 500 A 250 500 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 Is 0 24 file Exa_11 pl4 xvar t c BREKA CABLA c BREKB CABLB c BREKC CABLC Fig 6 45 Interrupting the steady state no load current of the step up transformer upper curves and the inrush current amplitude below when energizing the first pole of the breaker a at the voltage zero crossing b close to the voltage peak 222 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual 6 9 Switching overvoltage studies with statistical approach Exa_ 2 adp The switching impulse withstand level of EHV line insulators are generally lower than the lightning impulse withstand level Therefore some measure
98. 2351 0 04091 Calculated at frequency Hz 50 Reference line voltage kv 120 Report OK Help Fig 5 31 Results of the PFC run If the user clicks on Report the content in the string grids of Fig 5 31 will be dumped to a user selectable text file Further details about the operation of the Verify feature and PFC option can be found in the Appendix part of the Manual ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 147 SINTEF Advanced Manual 5 5 Using MODELS simulation language MODELS is a general purpose description language supported by a set of simulation tools for the representation and study of time variant systems This chapter of the Manual is to a large extent an extract of the MODELS IN ATP Language Manual February 1996 4 reference Please consult this manual for more detailed information on the MODELS language MODELS language focuses on the description of the structure of a model and on the function of its elements There is a clear distinction in MODELS between the description of a model and the use of a model Individual models can be developed separately grouped in one or more libraries of models and used in other models as independent building blocks in the construction of a system The description of a model is intended to be self documenting A system can be described in MODELS as an arrangement of inter related sub models independent from one another in their internal description and in their simulatio
99. 2x lt x R gt L A 3 lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt U 216 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual L BUSA L BUSB L BUSC SOURCASUPLA SOURCBSUPLB SOURCCSUPLC SOURCASUPLA SOURCBSUPLB SOURCCSUPLC T BUSA T BUSB T BUSC oer BUSBT BUSC 36 825 18 4125 651375 R 2140125 4 05075 7 365 11 66125 1657125 24 55 36 21125 56 465 98 2 135 025 9999 oer BUSAT BUSB 36 825 18 4125 651375 R 2140125 4 05075 7 365 11 66125 1657125 24 55 36 21125 56 465 98 2 135 025 9999 ger BUSCT BUSA 36 825 18 4125 651375 R 2140125 4 05075 7 365 11 66125 1657125 24 55 36 21125 56 465 98 2 135 025 9999 H BUSA H BUSB H BUSC SVINTAGE 1 1T BUSAT BUSC 2T BUSBT BUSA JT BUSCT BUSB USE AR 1H BUSAL BUSA SE GE 91053882 O 19053882 6117647 49 2327 0586 s 9035294 85 Ce CES ech 68 70 78 S SE SE SEL 0517047 e SE O Ons 1717047 2327 0586 01 70 Los 85 Ce CES 90 97 SE SE SE SE 49 2327 0586 70 Los 85 Ce CES 90 S ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 od me sch NO OY OO J 200 200 200 04 04 04 01 01 s01 8888 0 0 91294 12 7694118 0517047 1717647 7647059 7694118 Den 7717647 8888 0 0 91294 12 7694118 9105882 6117647 90353294 7647059 7694118 Den 7717647 8888 0 0 a SE el 0517047 7694118 1905882 6117647 1717647 9035329
100. 3 Y 3 8 14 8 14 8 i ae at d l H AOUT A 42120556154755430E 02 62925866209880L00E 02 049222044663597 0E 04 242126255471492070E 06 4962625099340 740ER 01 03651036437042830E 01 14057540636422540E 01 3033 7971722423 290E703 6530147169583 7030E 04 23 BOUT_B 791360180921162 90ER4 02 41824951890 L173740Et0Z 28887340041081960E 02 41505060157885230E 01 26346 501365563950E 01 2 3302142241957 9310E 03 06741633042442760E 05 sA1LO99645 0S206740E 01 0079938870341686 L0R 01 4972420970045048 0E 00 36556697104026020E 01 20063668659757850E 01 2002 160359131408 70E 02 08275779443450440E 03 20479974102484990E 05 12 26187752330893370E 02 22916780804550920E 01 05469736021516550E 04 93793327828267360E 05 79948727634371730E 00 76147405191892080E 03 02817538023626460E 05 30334940965001150E 06 COUT C 16 67817005491046190E 02 06582282356138050E 02 88726504325862150E 02 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 b3k J Go t J J HHR HAHA MO 4 d OO k OB FR W DN 1 Zs 4 8596366020077023000H 02 sZ007 O91 2397029580702 0 00 21I314039036147750E 0L s3LI063 95S 96508240402 96364781680139640E 03 24260863 950692210ET05 378860894143507820E 06 SEET ET EE EL 861278564570460170E 00 8190337914838 9500E70L 49207603871362970ET03 93448889755509940E 05 i G0 369133132474 7308 02 010284976063409940E O1 63690540421784950E 00 1211 8615637608 990ET02 s91 259213953141 1 8200703 92216037007330470E
101. 34507690 234567 e002 3450 7eoUl 234567 CoO LZ a4 So eC l2a4a67 C0 lL 234567690 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R D1ISRC1A RAVBA 52SRC1B RAVBB 93SRCIC RAVBC 5SI1SRC1A RAVBA 52SRC1B RAVBB 53SRC1C RAVBC 51ICR50A CR30A SZCROUE CRSUB SSCROUG CR3JUC CR30A CR20A CRSOB CRZ0B GRIC CRAC CRZ2A CRZI1A CRZ2B CRZ1B CRAZ2C CRAIC ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 yk Dei 300 E s01 SE SE gt lt L gt lt A gt lt C gt lt B SH Losa 14 FAs Dast 934 Dasg gt gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 FrFRrROOO 205 SINTEF Application Manual 92X0102AX0104A SVINTAGE 1 CR25A CR25B CRZ9C CR25A CR25B CR23C CR20A CR20B CR20C CR20A CR20B CRZ0C SVINTAGE 0 51CR20A CROIA 52CR20B CROIB 33CR20C RTE 51Xx0048AX0050A 52X0048BX0050B 53X0048CX0050C XOO50AX0104A XOO50BX0104B XOO50CX0104C xXx0100AX0102A X0100BX0102B X0100CX0102C SVINTAGE 1 XO132AX0104A X0132BX0104B XO132CX0104C XO132AX0104A X0132BX0104B XO132CX0104C SVINTAGE 0 51GRCBA SRC2A 9ZGRCBB SRCZB OSGRCBC SRCZC 51GRCBA SRC2A SZGRCBB SRCZB 93GRCBC SRC2C 5S1X0104AX0073A 52X0104BX0073B 53X0104CX0073C 92CRZ1IA CR20A SWITCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt 10 TO tO d deg d RAVBA RAVBB RAVBC CR30A CR30B CR30C 13CR30A L3CR30B 1L3CR30C 206 CROIA CRO1B CROC CR5
102. 4 7647059 7694118 Dea 7717647 ot a0 eh 6942 8436268432 0 0 6942 8436268432 0 0 0 0 6942 8436268432 E 03009037 06 06 06 42462348721612 3 CHOCO CHOCO CH COOC CHOCO CH CH O 217 SINTEF Application Manual SVINTAGE SUNITS C C d 1 d l B B B B B B B B 218 4231251360149 34 661001957452 2 3450004639366 sp4 G33319214 338 34949308527 pLISCZZ OS IE LD 6 7712744 9R 15 1202491824E 14 J20 B00300296 97 6 7 12 7449R 15 lt 20415378689E 14 28023180600 6E 14 231251360149 34 6810019374532 12024918 24E 14 Z 02318600 6E 14 694267642 R i 2 3450004639366 O4 26703131 92 14 338 34949508527 ell der 6 ET 449E 13 12024918 24E 14 tLISGZZ93 7 RLS 6 7712744 9b 15 1202491824E 14 JaA 060030029697 6 712 449E 13 lt 2041578689E 14 48231800 6E 14 6 712 7449E 13 2041578689E 14 4023180600 6E 14 231251360149 34 681001957452 L202491824b 14 eZ62310006E 14 69426 76842 E74 1202491824 14 262316006h 14 6594267642 E 4 2 24590004639366 O4267 03131 92 14 338134949506527 2L BUSA 3T BUSAT_BUSC 4H BUSBL_BUSB 5L BUSB 6T BUSBT BUSA 7H BUSCL BUSC 8L BUSC 9T BUSCT BUSB 0 he gy Aa USE RL SWITCH lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt Tclose gt lt Top Tde gt lt SUPLA H BUSA miles 045 SUPLB H BUSB l 045 SUPLC H BUSC I WEE SUPLA H BUSA s0 735 Ta SUPLB H BUSB s0793 ile SUPLC H BUSC s0785 Ta SOURCE
103. 4 2002 C dI gt lt Imax gt lt XOpt gt lt emt gt Tsao 001 500 1 1 1 1 G 1 2 3 4 1 O 6 7 8 C 3456 7690123456 890123456 690123456 890123456 690123456 89012345676901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt X lt L p lt C C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R X lt A Se B LIA 2A 10 0001 2 1B 2B 0001 3 1 2C 0001 3B 4B La 001 3C 4C Le 001 3A 4A Le 001 514B 5B SH 524C Gig d 534A 5A 513B 7B 10 523C SE 533A 7A 515B 6B 10 525C 6C 5354 6A Steis 8C 10 lg 557A SA 567B 8B 8C XX0021 1 E3 SA Xx0023 8B XxX0025 10 SWITCH C lt n Le n 2 gt lt Tcelose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Ie 2A 3A 0001 s001 2B 3B 1 001 Sie 3c Il 001 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt 141A 0 1 5E5 60 141B 0 15E5 60 120 LAG 0 1 5m 5 60 120 INITIAL OUTPUT 3A 3B 3C BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK dl ds dl NO NN NO MMO NFRNN EF gt gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 LOs EIERE 0001 5 SA KA SA gt lt VE CLOP gt lt Al gt lt PA 1 1 LOs 2 OC 1 0 O 0 I Aa dE d GC 2a ECH du 2 2 ae ER 1 Le ER C ECH 1 0 O 0 type gt 0 O 0 gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt le deg ie 1 La ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF 4 Reference Manual ATPDraw for Windows 3
104. 6 9 Switching overvoltage studies with statistical approach Exa I7oadnt 223 6 9 1 Setting program options for the statistical simulation cceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 223 O22 Kesus GL i eer E 224 KEE 229 AM NK e ER E 230 G DN E NR EE 230 Ae e E 231 Mi PE EE 231 AF Net nt E 233 d i ES EEN hg rr 233 a 2 ee 235 7 1 7 RR WEE 235 SS SM E ee ee ee a ee ee ee nee AE ee ene ee A 235 7 2 PFC simulations in TE ege ee Eegeregie 236 E rn E settee ag secs eamac E E ane ea teennes 241 E Dh EEN 243 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 5 SINTEF 1 Introduction ATPDraw for Windows 3 9 N Ce SINTEF stones 1 1 Whatis ATPDraw ATPDraw for Windows is a graphical mouse driven preprocessor to the ATP version of the Electromagnetic Transients Program EMTP In ATPDraw the user can construct the digital model of the circuit to be simulated using the mouse and selecting predefined components from an extensive palette interactively Then ATPDraw generates the input file for the ATP simulation in the appropriate format based on what you see is what you get Circuit node naming is administrated by ATPDraw thus the user needs to give a name only to nodes having special interest ATPDraw has a standard Windows layout and offers a large Windows help file system All kinds of standard circuit editing facilities copy paste grouping rotate export import undo redo are available Other facilities in ATPDraw are built in editor for ATP
105. 8 0 304 13 2 41 05 26 15 0 0 0 Add row Delete last row Insert row copy 1 Kove Fig 5 23 Line Data dialog box of a 3 phase line 4 conductors phase 2 ground wires Ph no phase number O ground wire eliminated by matrix reduction Rin Inner radius of the conductor Only available if Skin effect check box is selected on the Model page see in Fig 5 18 If unselected the Rin column is removed and a React column appears where the user specifies the AC reactance of the line in ohm unit length Rout Outer radius cm or inch of the conductor RESIS Conductor resistance ohm unit length at DC with Skin effect checked or AC resistance at Freg init if no Skin effect selected ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 141 SINTEF Advanced Manual Horiz Horizontal distance m or foot from the centre of bundle to a user selectable reference line Vtower vertical bundle height at tower m or foot Vmid vertical bundle height at mid span m or foot The average conductor height calculated from the eq h 2 3 Vmid 1 3 Vtower is used in the calculations If System type Auto bundling is checked on the Model page Fig 5 18 Separ Distance between conductors in a bundle cm or inch Alpha Angular position of one of the conductors in a bundle measured counter clockwise from the horizontal line NB Number of conductors ina bundle 5 3 2 Model and Data page settings for Single Core Cable systems Support
106. 88900000E 05 1 100 000000 Summary of preceding table follows Grouped data Ungrouped data Mean 1 77125000E 00 1 77305706E 00 Variance 5 25173611E 02 Da2 1332819E 02 Standard deviation 2 29166667E 01 2 29637283E 01 Finally a brief summary of the simulation results is given next Considering the metal oxide arresters with 2 p u protection level at both ends of the line the highest overvoltages appear in the inner points of the line As an example Fig 6 49 shows the probability distribution functions of the switching overvoltages arising in the middle of the line The four curves correspond to the following cases a Three phase reclosing with 30 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 1 ms b Three phase reclosing with 100 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 1 ms c Three phase reclosing with 30 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 2 ms d Three phase reclosing with 100 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 2 ms As it can be seen the reclosing overvoltages are quite low even if the trapped charge is close to the voltage peak if the reclosing operations are synchronized to the bus side voltage zero by a point on
107. 9 N 55 I NT EF Reference Manual This part of the manual outlines all menu items and program options and gives an overview about the supported ATP objects TACS LCC components and MODELS features ATPDraw has a standard Windows user interface The Main window of the program is shown in Fig 4 1 The Main menu the Circuit window and the Component selection menu are the most important items of that window Elements of the Main menu and supported ATP components in the Component selection menu will be referenced in this part of the manual 4 1 Main window Main menu Tool bar icons Component Circuit window tool bar E ATPDraw Iof x Eile Edit view T l Objects Tools Window Help Re ol En GER 8 4 O B wl All adp Efa x Map A Window Probes 6 phase Branch Nonlin Lump L distr Switches Sources Machines Trafos Models TACE Devices Over PCH Mie pe oe 4 Ex paie s SCH efile CO F HK l EE a THRE SI b oe Bh ios 2 Si lh Si R Hi kt D er FT Apa Probes amp phase gt de re OF AH Dm S IKA B _ _ AA e Branch Linear d i Li Rl HE S HEI Branch Nonlinear al nig rT l Lines Cables Lumped Se LIME LIME i S CD trite me vi D I P Wels 2 SR SCC SE Read PCH file 2 phase A m ae CH S amha STAT Hoe TT o a 4phase SE 4 Transformers V E ss Ser MODELS k EE ae 6 phase SC TACS 7 phase HA A EE ZC HFS P
108. ANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The new Grouping feature of ATPDraw can be used in a creative way in this example too The pulse width modulated source and the mechanical load might be compressed into a single icon The compressed version of this example circuit is also part of the ATPDraw distribution with the name of Exa 4g adp As shown left an artistic icon may improve the readability of the circuit and help in understanding the circuit for non author users Fig 6 7 PWM source and mechanical load compressed into a single icon ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 183 SINTEF Application Manual 6 3 Usage of the Library and Reference objects Exa_5 adp This example shows how can ATPDraw be used efficiently by a professional ATP user The ATP expert simply creates the required ATP file for a power system which is often already available outside of ATPDraw and then builds a simple ATPDraw case where the power system is included with Include and a limited number of additional components e g switches are added Node names internally in the include file must be the same as those used in the ATPDraw data case F1 F4 left adjusted in this example The data case can then be sent to a person whose knowledge about ATP is rather limited This person can run the case manipulate the switches and establish the ground fault current along a transmission li
109. ANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Note the TACS HYBRID request marked as bold in the ATP file This is the result of the Insert TACS HYBRID card check box selected under the Miscellaneous field of the ATP Settings Format page Leaving this request un selected ATPDraw would not know that TACS is present in the USP library object HVDC 6 Le ATPDraw does not analyze the LIB files before connecting them via Include to the circuit It is similarly important to note that a full 5 character node name e g VS1XX has to be used for the 3 phase node of the HVDC 6 object It is because the structure of the LIB file requires A B and C phase identifier letters are to be added as the 6th character Furthermore the nternal phase seq indicator must be selected see Fig 6 12 to pass the first parameter as a 3 phase node rather than 3 single phase nodes which is the default procedure in ATPDraw Only case 1 below includes the HVDC 6 LIB into the ATP file properly where the node has a 5 character name and the nternal phase seq is active The other two are equally bad and produce a run time error or give incorrect results at the simulation because only 3 character name has been specified in case 2 or the Internal phase seq was unselected in case 3 1 SINCLUDE HVDC_6 VS1XX POS1l XX0011 VS1XXA VS1XXC 2 SINCLUDE HVDC_6 VS1l POS1 XX0011 VS1A VS1C 3 SINCLUDE HVDC_6 VS1XXA VS1XXB VS1XXC POS1 XX0011 VS1XXA
110. ASH_1B power AS powerB FLASH 1C power AS powerl Variables Reference Manual To record a variable one has to click on the Add button The alias name can be changed later by selecting an item in the Record list box and type in a new name This record list is stored in the circuit file but it does not follow the circuit when the circuit is copied to the clipboard or the export group option is used The record requests can be removed by selecting the item and click on the Remove Fig 4 19 Record of MODELS variables The Variables dialog box is new in ATPDraw 3 x to support the PARAMETER feature of ATP EMTP The user is allowed to specify a 6 character text string instead of a numerical value in the component dialog boxes as shown in Fig 4 20 Component RLE SUP xX Attributes MODE PHASE NAME From ii ee E Undeclared variable CERO Do you want to add itto your list of ATF variables Group No fo Cancel Comment Fig 4 20 Using text All string instead of variables in the RLC component dialog box A numerical value then can be assigned later to these text strings under Variables The text strings variables specified by the user appear to the left and the user now has to assign data values for variables This is done in free format in the column to the right as shown by Fig 4 22 Users do not have to think about the number of characters in the final ATP file since ATPDraw autom
111. ATPDRAW version 3 5 for Windows 9x NT 2000 XP Users Manual Laszlo Prikler Hans Kristian H idalen The content of this document is identical to the SINTEF Report No TR F5680 but is not an official document of the SINTEF Energy Research Norway It has been converted to PDF format and made available for distribution via the secure ATP FIP servers and Web sites as well as via the regional EMTP ATP Users Groups ATP license is required to obtain the ATPDraw program and this manual Conversion of this manual to other formats and distribution on any kind of media requires explicit ATPDraw permission from the authors for Windows ZF 3 5 Preliminary Release No 1 1 October 2002 SINTEF www energy sintef no PREFACE This Users Manual documents all main features of ATPDraw version 3 5 The manuscript 1s prepared by Laszlo Prikler at SYSTRAN Engineering Services Ltd in Budapest and based on the previous Users Manual for ATPDraw version 1 0 SINTEF TR A4790 dated November 1998 The Reference Manual gives a summary of menu items and menu options The Advanced Manual covers the new features Grouping Parameter line cable and transformer modeling Finally the Application Manual is extended with several new examples New ATPDraw users are advised to start with the Installation and Introductory manuals ATPDraw is developed by SINTEF Energy Research SEfAS Program and documentation development have been financ
112. ATPDraw offers the most common edit operations like copy paste duplicate rotate and delete The edit options operate on a single object or on a group of objects Objects must be selected before any edit operations can be performed Selected objects can also be exported to a disk file and any circuit files can be imported into another circuit 36 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Or Soni Tool Shortcut key Equivalent in menus UNDO Alt BkSp Edit Undo REDO Shft Alt BkSp Edit Redo Cut Copy Ctrl X Ctrl C Edit Cut Copy Paste Ctrl V Edit Paste Duplicate Ctrl D Edit Duplicate Select All Ctrl A Edit Select All Select Polyg Ctrl P Edit Select Group or left double click in open space Select Type Ctrl T Edit Select Type Group number Label Ctrl L Edit Move Label Rotate Ctrl R Edit Rotate or right click Rubber Band Ctrl B Edit Rubber Bands Edit Group Circuit Ctrl G Ctrl H Edit Edit Group Circuit one layer down or up Zoom In Out View Zoom In Out Zoom window Z View Zoom pups up zoom window Refresh R View Refresh redraw the circuit 3 4 Overview of working with ATPDraw After selecting a component in the Component selection menu the new circuit object appears in the middle of the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button to move or the right button to rotate finally click in the open space to unselect and place the object To select and move an ob
113. BM library file Note that ATPDraw does not perform any diagnosis of the include file before sending the node names Moreover the nternal phase seq option may result in conflict with transposition objects As a result this option should in general not be used in transposed circuits To avoid the conflict use three input names for 3 phase nodes in DATA BASE MODULE files Each user specified objects might have a unique icon which represents the object on the screen and an optional on line help which describes the meaning of parameters These properties can be edited using the built in Help and Icon Editors Fig 5 49 shows an example file that is associated with the user specified 6 phase rectifier bridge ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 169 SINTEF Advanced Manual o Help Editor Bisi x File Edit Character Done User Specified Object 6 pulse rectifier bridge Requires a Data Base Module file HVDC_6 LIB Angle The firing angle of the thyristors Rs The resistance in the snubber circuits Cs The capacitance in the snubber circuits AC The AC S phase node POS The positive DC node NEG The negative DC node Ua Positive reference node Ua Uec is used aS a zero crossing detector Uc Negative reference node Fig 5 49 Help file of the HVDC_6 object Fig 5 50 shows the icon editor window The red lines in the background indicate the possible node positions on the icon border Connecting lines to the externa
114. C INPS1D INPS1E INPSIF Tir FEET HEFER tr FREE PERRE SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INPS2A INPS2B INPS2C INPS2D INPS2E INPS2F EHEHEHEH FETE firt tr Zitt FETE EE SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INMS11 INMS11 INMS11 INMS12 INMS12 INMS12 Tir FETETHE EPER tr FREE FREEEF BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH 14INZO1_ 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 14INZO2 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 14INPO1A 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 14INPO1B 1 1 0 50 120 1 0 14INPO1C 1 1 0 50 240 1 0 14INPO2D 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 14INPO2E 1 1 0 50 120 1 0 14INPO2F 1 1 0 50 240 1 0 14INZS1 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 14INZS2 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 14INPS1A 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 14INPS1B 1 1 0 50 120 1 0 14INPS1C 1 1 0 50 240 1 0 14INPS2D 1 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 237 SINTEF a 1L4INPS2E 1 Leg DU salle Ce Seck E L4INPS2F 1 Leg IU A A e 14INMS11 1 Gg 50 0 0 Sch H BLANK SOURCE INMS12 BLANK OUTPUT BLANK CARD PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The xVerifyF dat file describes the following 9 cases Cir 1 SES Ou EEN IN Q2 Cir 2 cosat SES Q0 IN cosot l l Cir 1 ZO 3 Il l l 1 V D Cir 2 ZO cosat 3 12 IN cosot E 1 0 V UD Cir 1 er j120 IA E M IlC e IB ir 2 9 IIC in O ND NE et 29 np 120 Q2D Q2E Cir 1 Q2F op O ee Cir 2 QIC oy E 1 0 V Q Q2D QE Q2F m Cir 1 Cir 2 Z00 V12 I10 238 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF tege
115. Current ATP radio button the full name of the ATPDraw project in the current circuit window with extension atp will be sent as parameter When selecting the File button the ATPDraw performs a file open dialog box before executing the command where the user can select a file which is then will be passed as parameter The commands are inserted in the ATP menu dynamically when the user activates the Update button as shown above ATPDOraw Options General Preferences Directories View ATP LUndo reda Buffers 10 Colors Background Window x Custom Programs Text editor Browse ATP CAATPDrew3 runATP_g bat Browse Armafit CATP runAF bat Browse Fig 2 5 Default settings to run ATP and Armafit The default batch command that is executed when the user selects run ATP or F2 1s specified under the Tools Options Preferences tab as shown in Fig 2 5 Checking the contents of this batch file is very important following the program installation because ATPDraw needs to be able 24 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ee to execute ATP for several reasons automatically and this has always performed by activating this command It must be noted that ATPDraw has no connection with the main program of ATP TPBIG EXE at the code level or via DLLs The run ATP menu item simply executes the external commands specified by the user So it is always the user s responsibility to install ATP properly a
116. Current dependent resistance e type 99 Lil Tipe 9 1 Type 98 NLININD BRANCH Current dependent inductor Lil Tipe 9 type 98 BRANCH True non linear current L i Type 93 NLIND93 l a SEET type 93 dependent inductor L i Type 96 NLIND96 ffi BRANCH Pseudo nonlinear hysteretic e type 96 inductor i BRANCH Time dependent resistor R t Type 97 NLINR T onmeer Jun Te IZ Treier BRANCH Current dependent resistance on MOV Type 92 MOV m BRANCH 3 phase current dependent MOV Type 3 ph MOV_ 3 SN l MO Type sob Im JI type 92 R TACS Type 91 TACSRES BRANCH TACS MODELS controlled A type 91 time dependent resistor l D N BRANCH Current dependent inductor L i Type 98 init NLIN98_ I ie eer EE memos left type 98 with initial flux l D E BRANCH Pseudo nonlinear hysteretic L i Type 96 init NLIN96_I afi mu ae ee wier jat type 96 inductor with initial flux SC A BRANCH True non linear inductor with L i Type 93 init NLIN93_ 1 ite ae 108 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 4 Lines Cables The Lines Cables menu has several sub menus for different types of line models Available line models are Lumped parameter models RLC m RL coupled distributed parameter lines with constant De frequency independent parameters lines and cables with constant or frequency dependent parameters Bergeron PI JMarti Noda or Semlyen calculated by means of the LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETERS
117. EF Reference Manual bctrane sup bctrans sup Cap_Rs sup Cap_ull sup Capacito sup LIGRE_1 sup LIGRE_3 sup Dc_O1 sup Nene eet Min Max a 0 D 1 12 E Output enable GU 0 0 300000000 0 i 12 Type line e 500 0 12 S um Data fe 0 0 d S 12 IT Nonlinear Speed button to Node E SE Se the Icon Editor wis nae Save As Exit Help Fig 4 26 Control page of object data Speed button to the Help Editor On the Data page of the Edit Object dialog box control variables of the support file one row for each object data can be specified Name Default Min Max Param Digits The name of the parameter Used to identify the parameter in the Component dialog box This name often reflects the name used in the ATP Rule Book Initial value of the parameter Minimum Maximum value allowed If set equal to 1 a variable text string can be assigned to the data value These values are assigned under ATP Settings Variables Maximum number of digits allowed in the ATP file When high precision is checked Vintage 1 is enabled and Digits is split in two values for high and low precision The Digits parameter is in version 3 0 and below used only for user specified components in SINCLUDE statement An error message will appear in the Component dialog box if a parameter value is out of range To cancel range checking set Min Max e g set both equal to zero On the Node page of the Edit object di
118. ELS structure e g starting with MODEL name and ending with ENDMODEL have an extension mod and stored in the MOD system folder ATPDraw is capable of reading such a mod file examining its input output and data variables and suggesting a support file on the correct format see in section 4 9 9 and 5 5 2 2 If the user wants a different icon or other node positions on the icon border he is free to modify the default sup file or create a new one by selecting the Objects Model New sup file menu This menu item will perform the Edit Object dialog as shown in Fig 4 30 Edit DAATPDORAWS Mod Noname sup Data Modes standard data Name Kina Pos 1 12 Phases 1 3 Witzech E M Qutput enable 2 S IT Nonlinear 3 7 S Type Model Mum Data fa Num Node E A S A S Dae Save AS Cancel Help Fig 4 30 Control page for a New Model sup file Name Identifies the node in the Node and Component dialog boxes Kind Specifies the input output type of the node Pos Specifies the node position on the icon border Phases Number of phases must be set to 1 for all Models node i e only Single phase nodes are supported ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 83 I NT EF Reference Manual Supported Kind values for MODELS objects are shown next Output node Current input node Voltage input node Switch status input node Machine variable input node TACS variable tacs Imaginary part of steady
119. EP INTERPOLATION DELAY HISTORY INIT and EXEC are recognized by ATPDraw when reading the mod file o Type 94 When selecting this menu item the user is requested to specify a mod file describing the Type 94 models component ATPDraw then examines this file and creates the required sup file for the component The same rules as specified under MODELS apply ATPDraw does not check if the format of the mod file corresponds to Type 94 declarations TACS o Coupling to Circuit Input to TACS from the circuit must be connected to this object o 4types of TACS sources DC AC Pulse Ramp o Transfer functions General Laplace transfer function If the Limits are not specified or connected no limits apply Simple Integral Derivative first order Low and High Pass transfer functions o TACS devices All devices except Type S55 o Initial condition for TACS objects Type 77 o Fortran statements General Fortran statement single line expression Simplified Math statements or Logical operators o Draw relations Relations are drawn in blue and are used just to visualize connections between Fortran statements and other objects Relations will not affect the ATP input file 104 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual User specified o Library Include is used to include the lib file into the ATP input file The user must keep track of internal node names in the include file o Files Include is used to include the
120. Enables disables the visibility of connection lines Relations On Off Enables disables the visibility of relation lines NodeDots On Off Enables disables the visibility of node dots filled circles DragIcon On Off Enables disables complete icon drawing during single component or selected group move operations NoDataWarning On Off Enables disables the visible warning of components and nodes not opened and given meaningful data BranchOutOn Off On Off Enables disables to show branch output draw small symbols to show branch output requests ATPDOraw Options wl General Preferences Directories Wiew ATP View Options E F Components E Node dots M Tacs T Node names J a Help M Models Detault view options M Drag icon Default ATP settings i Connections kk No Data warning kv Relations M Show branch output Edit settings M Labels OF Ep Load Apply Help Fig 7 4 Setting view options for all new circuits 7 1 5 ATP Settings Specify the default value of ATP specific variables initial miscellaneous data cards The setting for each individual circuit is found under the ATP Settings menu Of special importance is the default time step simulation length and power frequency On the Output page printout control is ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 233 SINTEF a set and Auto detection of simulation errors can also be specified The default values for new projects can be modified on the
121. GIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Following the manual addition of the BLANK STATISTICS request card the statistical tabulation of the overvoltage distribution will be part of the LIS file as shown next L A Statistical output of node voltage 0 3430E 06 0 MIDA MIDB MIDC Statistical distribution of peak voltage at node MIDA The base voltage for per unit printout is V base 3 43000000E 05 Interval voltage voltage in Frequency Cumulative Per cent number in per unit physical units density frequency GE current value 51 1 2750000 4 37325000E 05 0 0 100 000000 52 1 3000000 4 45900000E 05 2 2 98 000000 87 2 1750000 7 46025000E 05 1 99 1 000000 88 2 2000000 7 54600000E 05 1 100 000000 Summary of preceding table follows Grouped data Ungrouped data Mean 1 66850000E 00 1 66882696E 00 Variance 3 85116162E 02 3 81739314E 02 Standard deviation 1 96243767E 01 1 95381502E 01 The following is a distribution of peak overvoltages among all output nodes of the last data card that have the same base voltage 226 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual This distribution is for the maximum of the peaks at all output nodes with V base 3 43000000E 05 Interval voltage voltage in Frequency Cumulative Per cent number in per unit physical units density frequency GE current value 51 1 2750000 4 37325000E 05 0 0 100 000000 52 1 3000000 4 45900000E 05 1 1 99 000000 91 2 2750000 7 80325000E 05 1 99 1 000000 92 2 3000000 7
122. LBLINELCTWR4A TWR4B TWR4C TR400ATR400BTR400CPTIA PTIB PTIC BLANK MODELS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Some results of the simulation are drawn in Fig 6 34 The blue line is the voltage stress appearing at the transformer terminal the red line shows the incoming surge measured at the voltage transformer of Linel node PT1 of the circuit The discharge current of the gapped arrester is drawn at the bottom if the figure As it can be seen the instantaneous value of the power frequency voltage was set opposite to the polarity of the lightning surge in the simulation 1 50 MV 1 25 16 kA 1 00 0 75 0 50 0 25 0 00 0 25 0 50 file Exa_9 pl4 x vart v PT1A v TR400A_ c SICA Fig 6 34 ATP simulation results Red incoming surge at the substation entrance Blue voltage stress at the transformer terminal Green arrester discharge current 212 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual 6 8 Simulating transformer inrush current transients The magnetic coupling between the windings and the nonlinear characteristic of the magnetizing reactance are the most important factors in transformer energizing transient studies The BCTRAN supporting routine of ATP can be used to derive the R L or L R matrix representation of a single or 3 phase multi winding transformer ATPDraw now provides a similar interface to the BCTRAN supp
123. ODELS Files sup mod Model successtully identified i G Input 3 Output Data 4 item of the component selection menu When reading the Edit file mod file ATPDraw performs a message box shown in cancel Fig 5 38 Fig 5 38 Interpretation of the model file You are free to modify the default support file or accept the default icon and node positions or Cancel the interpretation procedure If you click on Yes the Edit Object dialog box will appear where you can edit the icon change node positions set new default values and Kind I O Type for current voltage etc input If you select No the default ATPDraw object is drawn in the circuit window immediately Fig 5 39 Input nodes are positioned on the left side of the icon and the outputs on the right In both cases a support file 1s automatically created This file can later be modified under Objects Model Edit sup file Fig 5 39 Default model object FLASH 1 SUP ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 153 SINTEF Advanced Manual 5 5 3 Recording internal MODELS variables ATPDraw supports the RECORD feature of MODELS to record any internal variable of a model object in the p14 output This option is found under the ATP Settings Record menu All MODELS objects in the active circuit window are listed with their USE AS name in the list box under Model as shown in Fig 4 19 When you select a model in this field variables declared under VAR section of the
124. P When the lib file is successfully created the icon of the new LCC component appears in the middle of the circuit window File type Klee Library data successfully written to Number of phases 5 DAATPORAWS Usp ochlibtest LIB Cancel Cancel d File type Jet K Library file DAATPORAWS Uspiunited LIG exists Number of phases B OK to overwrite Cancel No Cancel Fig 4 57 Results of pch file reading are communicated in dialog boxes 4 9 5 Switches Switch time controlled ATPDraw supports most of the switch type elements in ATP such as Switch time 3 ph ordinary time or voltage controlled switches options for modeling EE diodes valves and triacs as well as measuring and statistical switches Diode type 11 Valve type 11 Triac type 12 TACS switch type 13 The Switches sub menu contains the following switch objects Measuring Statistic switch Systematic switch Fig 4 58 Supported switch type ATP components Switch time cwitcHtc ze SWITCH Single phase time controlled switch controlled type 0 Switch time 3 ph SWIT 3XT SWITCH Three phase time controlled switch type 0 Independent operation of phases Switch voltage cwitcHvc gt _ SWITCH Voltage controlled switch contr type 0 Diode type 11 at Diode Switch type 11 Uncontrolled Md 112 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual type 11 TACS MODELS control
125. PARAMETERS How to use MODELS and Include in ATPDraw How to use the integrated LCC object for line cable modeling How to use the integrated BCTRAN object for transformer modeling Referencing four non standard Component dialog boxes Saturable 3 phase transformer Univeral Machines Statistical switches Harmonic source APPLICATION MANUAL Simple line energization studies Pulse width modulated induction machine Creating libraries of circuits and user specified libraries HVDC station rectifier converter modeling Shunt capacitor bank switching Line cable constant application examples Single phase to ground fault and fault tripping transients Electric arc simulation using MODELS controlled switches Lightning studies arrester modeling Transformer energization inrush currents Line energization studies with statistical approach 1 5 Manual conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this manual 16 Italic Menus in ATPDraw E g Select Edit Rotate Select Rotate command m the pop up menu Edit Courier 9 10 Data files E g Listing of ATP input files MODELS code etc Description of menu options in component dialog boxes Courier 11 12 Data code and file names E g Give the file the name HVDC_6 LIB and store it in the USP directory The USP directory is a directory under the main directory of ATPDraw Courier 12 Commands on the DOS prompt E g C TMP gt setup Type the command setup at C
126. PDraw for Windows version 3 5 135 SINTEF Advanced Manual The Number of simulations field is for Simulation Qutput Switch UM Format Record Wariables POCKET CALCULATOR feature of ATP When PARAMETER settings this is higher than unity the variable KNT can WAME VALUE be used in the right column for the current 7 simulation number This allows multiple ATP simulations where specific data variables can be a function of the simulation number The specified variables RES CAP and LOAD are written in the ATP file followed by underscore characters to enable maximum precision The SPARAMETER cards are written at the bottom of the ATP file with Ki after a REQUEST card as shown below Number of simulations i Delete Fig 5 13 Assigning values to the variables REQUEST NAME VALUE RG a ie ELELE x PARAMETER CAP 7 RES 29 RES 33 EE parameters are no longer SE but are still referenced RS eS by circuit objects Please choose the action to be petormed on each a object value that refers undefined parameters LOAD 20 i CAP 1 Parameters Action CAP 1 Set default value sl AM SS pet value to zero Set default value IMPORTANT Always use a period after a number in the value field Number of simulations EE Cancel Fig 5 14 Action to take when a parameter no longer defined 5 3 Using the integrated LCC object for line cable modeling The integrated LCC ob
127. Probe Branch volt 7 y Selecting this field draws the branch voltage probe to specify a branch voltage output requests in the ATP file ATPDraw inserts a 1E 9 ohm resistance Probe Curr D Selecting this field inserts a current probe measuring switch into the circuit to specify current output request in column 80 in the ATP file The number of monitored phases are user selectable Probe Tacs Selecting this field draws the Tacs probe to specify signal output and inserts TACS Type 33 object into the ATP file ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 105 I NT EF Reference Manual Splitter The Splitter object is a transformation between a 3 phase node and three 1 phase nodes The object has 0 data and 4 nodes The object can be moved rotated selected deleted copied and exported as any other standard components ABC ABc When a splitter is rotated the phase sequence of the single phase side A A lt g gt changes as shown left NODE NODEA If a name is given to the 3 phase node the letters A B C are added ge automatically on the single phase side of splitters Note Do not give names to nodes at the single phase side of splitters and do not connect splitters together on the single phase side I e next examples are illegal ABC ABC ABC ABC disconnection 1s illegal this way transposition 1s illegal this way Transp I ABC BCA Transp 4 ABC ACB Transposition objects can be used to change the phase sequence of a 3 pha
128. Py eech Branch Nonlinear Lines Cables Lumpec Distributed Switches Sources Read PCH file Machines Arches Transtormers MODELS TACS User Specified Frequency comp standard Component Fig 5 15 Selecting a line or cable and connecting the LCC object to the rest of the circuit Linef Cable Data C ATPDravw licc 120K _IL Foldvar alc Model Data Standard data Rho ohm E Freq init Hz E Length krm E E View Model _ a ea Edit lew system type Overhead Line Phases 6 M Transposed F Auto bundling M Skin effect Units Ge Mei C English M Segmented ground WM Real transt matrix f Bergeron C PI 1 4 Jhdarti T C Noda 4 E C Gemen _ A 0 00 Sa Cancel Import pave As Run ATP view Verity Help Fig 5 16 Line Cable dialog box Model specification When the required data are specified the user can close the dialog by clicking on OK This will store the specified data to disk in a user selectable alc file atpdraw line cable preferably in the LCC directory The user is also asked 1f ATP should be executed to produce the required punch ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 137 SINTEF Advanced Manual files If the user answers No on the this question ATP is not executed and the user is prompted again later when creating the final ATP file under ATP run ATP or ATP Make File As
129. RAW3 Usp Browse TC Lock I Internal phase seq Tac ST OR Cancel Help Fig 5 51 Component dialog box of the new user specified HVDC_6 object 5 8 2 Creating a user specified nonlinear transformer model Supporting routine BCTRAN can be used to derive a linear representation of a single or 3 phase multi winding transformer using excitation and short circuit test data If the frequency range of interest does not exceed some kHz the inter winding capacitances and earth capacitance of the HV and LV windings can be simulated by adding lumped capacitances connected to the terminals of the transformer Although BCTRAN produces only a linear representation of the transformer connecting nonlinear inductances to the winding closest to the iron core as external elements provides an easy way to take the saturation and or hysteresis into account It is noted that the BCTRAN object is now supported by ATPDraw in a user friendly way see in section 5 6 but the procedure described here gives more flexibility in handling of the iron core nonlinearities and allows incorporation of winding capacitances in the USP object if needed Further advantage of the USP based modeling is that users do not need to run the BCTRAN supporting routine as many times as such kind of transformers present in the circuit before the execution of the time domain simulation Creating such a user specified component however requires some experience in two ATP supporting
130. Replace Searches the text buffer for one or all occurrences of a specified text string and replaces any instance found with a specified replacement string This option displays theWindows standard Replace dialog box Character options Word Wrap Toggles wrapping of text at the right margin so that it fits in the window Font From the Windows standard Font dialog box you can change the font and text attributes of the text buffer 4 2 6 4 Options In the Tools Options menu several user customizable program options for a particular ATPDraw session can be set and save to the ATPDraw ini file read by all succeeding sessions During the program startup each option is given a default value Then the program searches for an ATPDraw ini file in the current directory the directory of the ATPDraw exe program the Windows installation directory and each of the directories specified in the PATH environment variable When an initialization file is found the search process stops and the file 1s loaded Any option values in this file override the default settings The ATPDraw Options dialog enables you to specify the contents of the ATPDraw ini file without having to load and edit the file in a text editor As shown on Fig 4 33 this dialog box has four sub pages General Preferences Directories and View ATP ATPDOraw Options E General Preferences Directories View ATP Circuit tiles IT Autosave every E minutes M Create backup files
131. T 2000 The program is capable of processing PL4 files of C like and formatted types Maximum 6 variables in the same diagram are allowed Zooming redraw features and a readout facility to obtain instantaneous values of plotted curves are provided Screen plots can be copied to clipboard or save as color or monochrome bitmap image file Developer Prof Dr Mustafa Kizilcay m kizilcay fh osnabrueck de Deniz Celikag dcelikag aol com Licensing available only for EEUG members at present Main characteristics of other postprocessors for ATP are summarized in 6 14 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 Ce SINTEF stones 1 3 4 Typical EMTP applications ATP EMTP is used world wide for switching and lightning surge analysis insulation coordination and shaft torsional oscillation studies protective relay modeling harmonic and power quality studies HVDC and FACTS modeling Typical EMTP studies are Lightning overvoltage studies Switching transients and faults Statistical and systematic overvoltage studies Very fast transients in GIS and groundings Machine modeling Transient stability motor startup Shaft torsional oscillations Transformer and shunt reactor capacitor switching Ferroresonance Power electronic applications Circuit breaker duty electric arc current chopping FACTS devices STATCOM SVC UPFC TCSC modeling Harmonic analysis network resonances Protection device testing 1 3 5 Hardware r
132. T trip HISTORY INTEGRAL power DFLT 0 INIT trip 0 tfire 0 BNDINIT EXEC vcap V1 V2 power vcap iczn energy INTEGRAL power IF EES is already firing AND t tiire gt tdur 1 6 3 has exceeded firing duration THEN trip 0 Cancel the firing signal tfire 0 null the firing time ENDIF IF trip 0 168 NOC Signaling to fire AND tfire 0 ces firing condition not yet detected AND power gt Pset 1 e9 power setting exceeded OR energy gt Eset 1 e6 energy setting exceeded THEN tfire t set the firing detection time ENDIF IF trip 0 15 not signaling to fires 204 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual AND tfire gt 0 AND t tfire gt fdel l e 3 THEN firing condition has been detected firing delay exceeded e Beef set the firing signal ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL USE FLASH 1 AS FLASH 1A INPUT V1l IX0001 V2 IxX0002 iczn IxX0003 DATA Pset Eset fdel fdur 2 OUTPUT GAPA trip ENDUSE USE FLASH 1 AS FLASH 1B INPUT V1 IX0004 V2 IX0005 iczn IX0006 DATA Pset Eset fdel fdur 2 OUTPUT GAPB trip ENDUSE USE FLASH 1 AS FLASH 1C INPUT V1 IX0007 V2 IX0008 iczn IX0009 DATA Pset Eset fdel fdur 2 OUTPUT GAPC trip ENDUSE RECORD FLASH_1A vcap AS VCAPA FLASH_1A power AS PZNA FLASH_1A energy AS EZNA FLASH_1A trip AS GAPA ENDMODELS C 1 2 I O aio I O set I ohio 2 7 8 C S456 70902
133. TS TIC SWITCH Switch type Open Close Slave H f Opening f Closing T 0 005 Dev DIR Distributia l Unito le fi 0 Ce Gaussian Group Mo E Label Comment Output 1 Current orol EMATIC SWITCH orol EMATIC SWITCH Switch type Switch type Master Slave e Tbeg 0 02 T delay 0 003333 INCT DER MSTEP 100 Fig 5 46 Dialog box of the statistic switch top and data windows of the systematic switch 164 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the object This text briefly describes the meaning of input data values and node names as shown below SW STAT Statistic switch Distribution Select uniform or gaussian distribution If IDIST 1 under ATP Settings Switch UM only uniform is possible Open Close Select if the switch closes or opens Current margin available for opening switch T Average switch opening or closing time in sec For Slave switches this is the average delay Dev Standard deviation in sec For Slave switches this is the deviation of the delay Ie Switch opens at a time T gt Tmean and the current through the switch is less than Ie Switch type INDEPENDENT Two nodes MASTER Two nodes TARGET punched Only one is allowed SLAVE gt Four nodes Specify node names of MASTER switch The icon and nodes of the objects adapt the switc
134. URCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK 6 7 Lightning overvoltage study in a 400 kV substation Exa_9 adp SS SS La la la Sla O O gt Ors dE Os dE Os LOs This example demonstrates the use of ATPDraw in a lightning protection study The one line diagram of the investigated 400 kV substation is drawn in Fig 6 32 The numbers written on the top of the bus sections specify the length in meters The simulated incident is a single phase back flashover caused by a lightning strike to the tower structure 900 m away from the substation Severe lightning parameters were chosen with 120 kA amplitude and 4 50 us front tail times In the investigated cases only Linel and Line2 are connected with the transformer bus The transformer is protected by conventional SiC arresters LINE LINE LINES 15 15 15 OPT1 OPT2 OPT3 13 13 13 15 22 22 22 15 1 1 1 2 97 97 97 1D 1 1 15 P 15 P 15 P D 1 2 15 15 13 13 PT4 PT5 4 4 LINE4 LINES Fig 6 32 One line diagram of the substation ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 51 17 S A TR Conventional gapped arrester 207 SINTEF Application Manual LINE J uN OH LIFE LIFE LIME Z T et Z T LU i TR 400 K LIME TT dt iy iy Fig 6 33 Example circuit sa 9 adp The ATPDraw circuit of the complete network substation incoming line is shown in Fig 6 33 The Copy amp Paste or Groupi
135. UserNamed Fig 3 28 Click on a node with the right mouse button and check the Ground box indicating that the node is connected with the ground reference plane of the circuit 48 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF euor Meant The ground symbol is drawn at the selected node when you exit the window as Fig 3 29 shows The nodes not given a name by the user will automatically be given a name by ATPDraw starting with XX for single phase and X for 3 phase nodes followed by a four digit number Nodes got the name this way e from the program are distinguished by red color from the user specified node names which are drown black as shown in Fig 3 29 Node data Ei POS oCh T Ground Help l Display W UserNamed Fig 3 29 Click on the voltage source with the right mouse button and specify the node name 3 5 2 Storing the project file on disk You can store the project in a disk file whenever you like during the building process This is done in the main menu with File Save or Ctrl S If the current project is new a Save As dialog box appears where you can specify the project file name and location on the disk Two different styles of the Save As dialog boxes are available depending on the Open Save dialog setting in the Tools Options General menu a Windows 9x standard dialog box and a Windows 3 1 style The default extension is adp in both cases and it is automatically added to the file name you
136. VS1XXC Using ATPDraw s TACS support for modeling the firing control and then compressing the circuit into a single HVDC group as shown in Fig 6 13 seems a better alternative today because the restrictions and possible conflicts concerning the use of USP LIB files do not exist ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 189 SINTEF Application Manual In Fig 6 15 four curves from the simulation is shown which are equal to the results in 2 300 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 ms 35 file Exa_6 pl4 x var t v POS1 c VSA_ VA__v POS2 c POS2 XX0078 Fig 6 15 ATP simulation results 6 5 Switching studies using JMarti LCC objects The LCC modeling features of ATPDraw are described in detail in section 5 3 of the Advanced Manual Line modeling by LCC objects means that user specifies the geometrical arrangement and material constants then ATPDraw executes ATP s Line Cable Constants routine and converts the output punch file to DBM library format The resulting LIB file will then be included in the final ATP file via a Include call The JMarti option is one out of the five alternatives supported by ATPDraw s LCC object Here two switching transient simulation examples are presented 6 5 1 JMarti model of a 500 kV line Exa_7 adp The 3 phase switching example Exa _ 3 adp created in section 6 1 of this manual is repeated here This time the 500 kV overhead line is represented by a frequency dependent 3 phase JMarti model The example circuit is s
137. View ATP page of the Tools Options menu as shown in Fig 7 5 Parameter Type Description DeltaT Real Time step of simulation in seconds Tmax Real End time of simulation in seconds Xopt Real Inductances in mH if zero otherwise inductances in Ohm with Xopt as frequency Copt Real Capacitances in uF if zero otherwise capacitances in uMho with Copt as frequency SysFreq Real System frequency in Hz Out Integer Frequency of LUNIT 6 output within the time step loop For example 3 means that every third time step will be printed IPlot Integer Frequency of saving solution points to the PL4 output file For example a value of 2 means that every second time step will be written to the PL4 file Double Integer If 1 table of connectivity written in the LUNIT 6 output file If O zero no such table written KssOut Integer Controls steady state printout to the LUNIT 6 output file MaxOut Integer If 1 extrema printed at the end of the LUNIT 6 output file Pun Integer Flag that request additional card for the IOUT frequency MemSave Integer Controls the dumping of EMTP tables to disk at the end of simulation if START AGAIN request is specified ICat Integer Controls saving of raw plot data points that is written to the I O channel LUNIT4 Possible values are Nenerg Integer Number of simulations A value of 0 zero means single deterministic simulation otherwise statistic switch study ISW Integer If 1 printou
138. WS Mod Browse Use As ASH_1A M Fock IT intagqe 1 OK Cancel Help Fig 6 29 Attributes of the MODELS object FLASH 1 If you right click on one of the arresters an input window appears where you can specify the parameters In section 4 5 of the Reference Manual the use of the Attributes and Characteristic page of ZnO arresters are explained in detail The characteristics of ZnO arresters cannot be specified directly by exponential functions in ATPDraw since ATPDraw uses the current voltage characteristic and performs an exponential fitting internally An external nonlinear characteristic can be taken into account using Include however This requires a text file named e g ZNO 1 LIB and stored in the USP directory on the form Lau 40 200 SC KE The name of this LIB file can be specified in nclude field of the Characteristic page and the Include characteristic button should be selected The user must be careful with Prefix and Suffix use when the include files are located in different sub directories E g in this example the nonlinear characteristic of the ZnO blocks are located in the USP folder and the MODELS object description file is in the MOD folder To avoid conflicts users are advised to specify the full path of all include files or copy all include files into the same subdirectory LIB 202 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual The new Grouping feature of ATPDraw see in se
139. Windows version 3 5 109 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 4 2 Distributed parameter line models Selecting Distributed opens a popup menu where two different types of line models can be selected Transposed lines or Untransposed lines Both of that are distributed parameters frequency independent lines Transposed lines Clarke 1 phase Untransp lines Klee phase 3 phase b phase b phase mutual 3 phase Fig 4 55 Distributed transmission line models Transposed lines Clarke These components can be characterized as symmetrical distributed parameter and lumped resistance models called as Clarke type in the ATP Rule Book Six different types are supported Transposed lines yp77 4 BRANCH Single phase distributed parameter I phase 7 type 1 line Clarke model Transposed lines t ye7q 2 BRANCH 2 phase distributed parameter 2 phase 7 type 1 2 transposed line Clarke model Transposed lines 4y 77 3 BRANCH 3 phase distributed parameter 3 phase 7 type 1 3 transposed line Clarke model Transposed lines ye7T6N BRANCH 6 phase distributed parameter 6 phase type 1l 6 transposed line Clarke model Transposed lines 1Ny zT 6 2x3 phase distributed Clarke line 6 phase mutual 7 with mutual coupling between the circuits Transposed lines yt pz 9 BRANCH 9 phase distributed parameter 9 phase type 1 9 transposed line Clarke model Untransposed
140. X0132A SH 6590 2s4E3 Sa dL O O 2LINE2BX0132B 2a 200 2 9E5 oa L U O 3LINEZCX0132C O SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW LCC EXA 9 LIB X0033A X0033B X00330 XX0019 X LGGA X0166B X0166C XX0167 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW LCC EXA 9 LIB X0166A X0166B X0166C XX0167 XO170A ROLTOB XOLTOC XX0171 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW LCC EXA 9 LIB X0170A X0170B X0170C XX0171 TWR4A TWR4BH TWR4C TOP SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW LCC EXA 9 LIB TWR4A TWR4B TWR4C TOP XO178A SS X0178B X0178C XX0179 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW LCC EXA_9 LIB X0178A X0178B X0178C XX0179 X0182A X0182B X0182C XX0183 SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW LCC EXA 9 LIB X0182A X0182B X0182C XX0183 LINEI1A LINE1B LINE1C XX0036 SWITCH CG lt n 1 gt x n 2 gt lt Telose gt lt Top Tde gt x lt Ie gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt LIGHT TOP MEASURING il X0090AX0086A Flg 1 001 0 X0090BX0086B SS L001 0 XO0090CX0086C Se 1 001 0 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 211 SINTEF Application Manual x0110AX0106A l LUL 0 X0110BX0106B l LUUL 0 X0110CX0106C le EE 0 XO120AX0118A l LUUL 0 X0120BX0118B SS Le 0 SOUZA OC ROLLS lis dE O 13XX0016TWR4A XxX0048 0 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase TO gt lt Al gt lt SE gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt LSLIGHT 1 AERA Ts 4 E 6 d lero oe eg 14X0133A 0 oe 355 SE SC Ji 14X01 B 0 3 4 315 50 120 Pils i LAXOLSSC 0 3 4 50 50 120 i INITIAL OUTPUT LINELALINE
141. X0211B SES ELE XOO81A XO081B XOO081C XO083A X0083B X0083C LINE2ZA LINE2B LINE2C XO2Z69A X0269B X0269C X0293A X02 93B X0293C xX0090A X0090B XO090C XO2Z71A X02 71B KOZ TAC XO2Z11A XO211B XOZ11C XO2Z257A X0257B KUZS TC EO Be E3 SR e EA E4 E4 9999 XOLOSA XO1LO5B XOLO5C XO2Z257A X0257B KOUZS7C TR400A TR400B TR400C XO110A XO110B KOLO MRP Owe NE LA det Be E3 SR e EA E4 E4 WNEPEeEURAN TOs 40 10 ils d ZO dE SH 90 10 20 Aa L s LEO 6 585 7 OHS 8 E5 8 34E5 GC Nee Ts 082E6 1 2E6 L s LEO 6 585 7 OHS 8 E5 8 34E5 GC Nee 108256 1 2E6 St 200 005 400 SEI 200 400 260 650 3600 400 260 650 300 400 SI 650 EE 400 2600 400 ZP 650 200s 650 SOU 400 260 400 260 650 200 400 SI Cees lhe Cee ive Ce ihe 249K aes line 2 4E5 249K 2 4E5 Creel 2 4E5 recline 2 4E5 Ceci 2 4E5 Careline 2 4K 2a IES As Nike Careline 2 4K 2a IES 0005 0005 0005 Cece oe ihe 249K 2 4E5 2a IES As ihe recline 2 4E5 Celine oe ihe 249K 2018 1 008 1 008 1 008 1 008 1 AL d vk S 1 SEKR L SE 21 068 1 068 1 024 1 024 1 EZ 2 UZ 2 oO vile L OUR d eS ZL SEL 2 ESCH L WU 1 s022 1 022 d e022 1 s922 1 068 1 008 1 EZ 2 OLA l OL 2 HOLE 2 s023 1 023 1 Application Manual L
142. Y6 A FLU 00 L SPLITTER Top RESID DI WM Nonlinearity Nodes Available Added to group Fosition D sl i 11 1 1 H d 3 3 7 4 5 gt gt To d Fig 5 10 Creating a 3 phase hysteretic inductor Group GRP00008 EI Attributes Characteristic Z Fluxlinked bb D 25 4911765 35 2500239 57 1764706 bb 7050624 743294116 79 0941176 DI 01 4764r 06 File Include Browse T Include characteristic Save Copy Faste Ip El OR Cancel Help Fig 5 11 Nonlinear characteristic of the 3 phase Type 96 group notice that only one characteristic is specified that is used for all phases You can customize the group icon as shown in Fig 5 11 The hysteresis loop originates from the original inductor icon This is done by executing the next sequence of operations select the group object and select Edit Edit Group then open the component dialog of one of the inductors and click on the icon editor speed button in it s lower left corner Select Edit Copy in the icon editor exit the icon editor and the component dialog Go back to the group object by pressing Edit Edit Circuit In the same way open the group objects dialog Fig 5 11 and click again on the lower left Icon editor speed button and select Edit Paste in the editor 134 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF gengen 5 2 Support of new ATP features Parameters and Pocket Calculator Parameters is a new
143. a 4 2 1 9 Import This command inserts a circuit from disk file into the active circuit window contrary to the Open command which loads the circuit into a new circuit window Selecting this menu will result in an Import Project dialog box where the user can select the file to load The imported circuit appears in the circuit window as a group in marked moveable mode Existing node names will be kept or rejected upon the selection of the user 4 2 1 10 Export Save the selected objects of the active circuit to a disk file Same as Save As but only the selected objects marked by a rectangular or polygon area of the circuit is written to the disk file 4 2 1 11 Reload Icons Reads and displays component icons from their respective support files This function is useful when the user has redesigned one or more support file icons and wants the changes to be reflected in the circuit window 60 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 2 1 12 Save Metafile Write the selected objects of the active circuit to a disk file in Windows metafile wmf format If no objects are selected the entire circuit window content is written to disk This way even graphics of large circuits can be exported to other applications without loss of resolution seen on the screen when the Zoom option 1s used to fit the circuit to the screen size Metafiles created by this command can be imported as picture into other applications like MS
144. a files in COMTRADE format Simple mathematical manipulations are also supported as well as FFT analysis and bar chart plots for harmonics Developer Dr W Scott Meyer canam emtp org USA Licensing Distributed at no cost to the licensed ATP users Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG secure Web sites GTPPLOT is a plotting program for processing PL4 output of ATP It 1s compiled with the GNU FORTRAN and makes use of the graphical package DISLIN The program is available for DOS djgpp extender Windows 32 and Linux GIPPLOT can read widenn formatted PL4 files FMTPL4 10Fnn C like binary files unformatted files COMTRADE and ASCII data files GTPPLOT is able to process graphics files with up to 1000000 points and up to 1000 variables The program can plot up to 20 curves end export the graphics in nine different formats HP GL CGM WME PCX PostScript PNG WMF JAVA and GNUPLOT For FS and HFS runs the plot can be bar charts The data can be exported as widenn PL4 COMTRADE Matlab MathCad and Mathematica files Furthermore the program calculates lot of Power Quality Indexes from data can be used for FOURIER analysis turbine shaft loss of life estimation Various simple math operations with variables as integration derivation RMS power energy I2T are also supported ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 13 SINTEF wendeg GTPPLOT can be used to generate KIZILCAY F DEPENDENT elements from FREQUENCY SCAN PL4
145. a_ adp are part of the ATPDraw distribution To load these example circuits into the circuit window of ATPDraw use the File Open command or Ctrl O and select the file name in the Open Project dialog The resulting ATP files will be given at the end of each description Simulation results and or comparison with measurements are also presented in some cases These figures have been obtained by processing the p14 output file or field test records with prost processors PlotX Y or ATP Analyzer 6 1 Switching in 500 kV system Exa_3 adp This example shows how to perform a switching analysis in a simplified network The line model used in this example is a equivalent line calculated for 5000 Hz by LINE CONSTANTS outside of ATPDraw How to create a more accurate JMarti line model and how to use LCC objects the interactive graphical preprocessor of ATPDraw for LINE CABLE CONSTANTS PARAMETERS support are shown in section 5 3 of the Advanced Manual and section 6 5 of this manual The example circuit is shown on Fig 6 1 a the equivalent ATPDraw circuit in Fig 6 1 b I equivalent Fig 6 1 a Switching example circuit Wave imp Fig 6 1 b Example circuit 3 Line switching Exa_ 3 adp Source The source 1s a 500 kV 3 phase AC source The amplitude of the voltage source U I 0 1s di Amp 500 kV The input menu for the source is shown in Fig 6 2 V3 Line switch The I equivalent line is connected to
146. al number of conductors belonging to that circuit Phase angle for the zero sequence tests are zero ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 145 SINTEF Advanced Manual The mutual coupling works only for 6 phase lines For circuit one all phases are supplied with zero phase angle sources while the phase conductors of the other circuit at the sending end are open The View old case button will skip creation of the LMFS data case and trace the program directly to the procedure that reads the xVerify lis file which contains the input impedances of the electrical model compared to the exact PI equivalent as function of frequency under various conditions ATPDraw can read this file and interpretation of the results is displayed in the LMFS results window as shown in Fig 5 30 for the 4 phase JMarti line model specified in Fig 5 29 Line Cable Data D ATPDraw3 lcec LCC A alc Model Data Standard data Phases 4 Pho ohm m 100 I Transposed Freg mist f M Auto bundling SECH fi J Units em ohm km DC lim rn m em de g EE Led fl Ind el leg SE 0 5 1 2 0 1 10 20 15 T 30 3 nos V Real transf matrix ae 0 5 12 0 1 0 20 15 Cp 30 3 3 0 5 1 2 0 1 10 op 15 BO 30 3 aj 0 3 0 5 0 5 0 25 29 0 0 0 Model fiting data Decades Points Dec NAME DEFAULT E 10 Freq matrix Hz Freq 85 Hz EnsTalizc bs Fb ees IT Use default fitting a otal ooo C Bergeron ElI Ge Je No
147. alog box the node attributes of the support file one row for each component node can be specified 80 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual Data Modes Positions Pos 1 12 Phases 1 3 From 1 2 Ph 1 d To 1 a 1 S IC Fig 4 27 Node control page Name The name of the node Used to identify the node in the Open Node and Component dialog boxes Kind 3 phase circuit number of the object The number is used to handle transposition of 3 phase nodes correctly for objects having more than 3 phases Kind l1 for all nodes of single phase objects 3 phase nodes with the same Kind get the same phase sequence 1 lst to 3rd phase 2 4th to 6th phase 3 7th to 9th phase 4 10th to 12th phase The Kind parameter has a different meaning for MODELS or TACS component nodes It is used to specify the type of input output MODELS node values Output node Current input node Voltage input node Switch status input node Machine variable input node TACS variable tacs Imaginary part of steady state node voltage imssv Imaginary part of steady state switch current imssi Output from other model Note that the model which produces this output must be USEd before the current model This can be done by specifying a lower group number for the model and then select the Sorting by group number option under ATP Settings Misc TACS node values O Output node 1 Positive sum i
148. an create his own components user specified or models and include files Project file When the user saves a circuit the work is stored in the project file adp atpdraw project This file contains the circuit with all data and graphical representation and m addition all files describing user specified components support line cable trafo model and library files The project file is compressed by a public domain Pkzip routine and can in fact be opened with any version of WinZip It may occur that a virus checker inaccurately recognizes the project files as virus infected and quarantine them when you send or receive such a file in e mail attachments If it happens the local virus filtering database should be modified to allow the exchange of project files Contact IT staff ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 21 SINTEF installation Manual Support file All components require a support file This file describes the type of component the nodes phases position identity and data default value limits parameter flag number of digits identity the default icon 41x41 pixels and the help file The version 3 x of the support file also contains options for specifications of the data format in ATP but this is not used yet The support files for standard components are zipped together in the file ATPDraw sc1 standard component library and this file is required together with the project file to open and run a project The support files ca
149. ancel Help Fig 5 43 General saturable transformer dialog Four types of winding couplings are supported by this general transformer object Wye Delta lead Delta lag and Y180 Icons to the right of the short circuit impedances visualize the selected coupling The letters A B and C are the phase terminals while the Roman numbers J H and ZH denotes the leg number The table below shows how to represent typical 2 winding transformers Ydl Y primary Dlag secondary Dlead primary Y secondary Yd5 Y180 primary Dlead secondary Dlag primary Y180 secondary Yd7 Y180 primary Dlag secondary Dlead primary Y180 secondary Ydll Y primary Dlead secondary Dlag primary Y secondary Yy0 Y primary Y secondary gt YY primary Y180 secondary Y zig zag D zig zag trafos are out of scope at present 5 The data specified in Fig 5 43 will result in an icon at left with 3 three phase terminals and 2 single phase nodes one for the primary neutral and one for connection of the magnetization circuit with external saturation optional The Saturable 3 phase object is found under Transformers in the component selection menu and it can be edited and connected to the main circuit as any other components ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 159 SINTEF Advanced Manual The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the GENTRAFO ob
150. ans Serif regular 8 pt size 4 2 3 9 Options Selecting this menu item will bring up the View Options dialog box The View Options dialog can be used to control the visibility of the objects in the active circuit window View Options wl WM Components lM Node dots OK IY Tacs M Node names 7 E Help I Models kg Drag icon i Connections M No Data warning __ Apply F Sien E BRSWBIaACSU _AnpWAl M Labels Fig 4 12 View Options dialog box By default all objects except node names are visible The meaning of options assuming the option is selected M are listed below Components All standard and user specified components are displayed Tacs All TACS components are displayed Models All MODELS components are displayed Connections All connections short circuits between nodes are displayed Relations All relations to visualize connections between Fortran statements and other objects are displayed Labels Component labels are displayed on the screen Node dots Node and connection end points are displayed as filled circles Node names Node names are visible on the screen overrides the Display attribute of the Node data window This option is useful after a Make Names selection in the ATP menu Drag icon The complete icon is seen when a selected object or group of object is moved on the circuit window in the unchecked state only an inverted rectangular or polygon outline is drawn No Data warning Components a
151. are required to parallel connecting the source inductance and the damping resistor as shown below The connections are always drawn with node dots if the Node dots check box is selected in the View Options menu Okemo alm wl Click left Click left Click left Click left Release move Release move ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 41 SINTEF Cur The last object we want to introduce in the source part of the circuit is a voltage measuring probe which results in an output request for the node voltage in the ATP input file The voltage sensor can be selected via the Probe amp 3 phase Probe Volt in the component selection menu see Fig 3 9 The probe is drawn in the middle part of the circuit window in marked and moveable mode Use the left mouse button to drag and place the object as shown on the figure to the left When you place an object by clicking on open area of the circuit window you will sometimes receive a warning message as shown in Fig 3 10 This message appears if a center of one of the permanent objects is n inside the enclosing polygon of a marked object or more general a AN Se group of objects This is to prevent unintentional object overlap if the left mouse button were pressed while moving the object Fig 3 10 Prevent object overlap If you click on No the object not placed but continues to be selected and you can move it further Normally it is OK to click on Yes If you change your mind later
152. are stored in a single file called ATPDraw scl The Standard library dialog is the container of supported circuit objects in alphabetical order Any component can be selected from this list then the object s icon appears in the circuit window exactly the same way as after other selections in the component selection sub menus ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 125 SINTEF 126 Standard library wl Fortranl sup Gis Wl eunp Giel nel eup Giel nol eup LGE up e Gen Trafo sup GroupDef sup GT sup Reference Manual Support files of the present and even all retired objects which once were supported in earlier program versions but have been removed from the component selection menu are included in the standard library An old circuit file may of course contain such an older object which are also supported internally in ATPDraw and the program will produce correct output Fig 4 72 Standard component library ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF 5 Advanced Manual ATPDraw E for Windows 127 SINTEF AINIS Manoel This chapter gives an overview of several new features in ATPDraw Grouping and Parameter usage of the integrated LINE CABLE CONSTANTS BCTRAN and the UNIVERSAL MACHINE support and describes how to use MODELS in ATPDraw and how to create new user specified object by means of ATP s Include and DATA BASE MODULARIZATION features You will not be shown how to create the
153. ata Rho ohrm rm E Freg init Hz 0 005 Length km Bt system type Overhead Line Phases 3 M Auto bundling M Skin effect nits Ge Metric C English IT Segmented ground M Real trans matrix C Bergeron D Points Dec rp fio G JManm Freg matrix Hz Freg 85 Hz C Noda og fo C Semlyen M Use default fitting Import Save As Run ATP lew Verity vi WR fem fa 13 1 0 55 1 55 0 0585 7 5 4 H DU 45 d 2 0 55 1 55 0 0585 0 2r 13 DU 45 d J 0 55 1 55 0 0565 17 5 ev 13 zi 45 d kb U 0 3 Dn 0 304 13 2 471 05 26 15 U U U 0 0 3 Dn 0 304 13 2 41 05 26 15 0 0 0 Fig 6 22 LCC Model and Data tab of the 1 section of the 750 kV line BEGIN NEW DATA CASE JMARTI SETUP SERASE BRANCH IN AOUT AIN BOUT BIN COUT C LINE CONSTANTS METRIC det ae OUa 4 oa Al PS s9 e e Los O02 A B 4 203345 Ve Sea 4 SZ OO Alg Los GU A B 4 505345 U20085 4 e Lees cara ince ioe 45 4 005 313 0 304 4 1 6 gels oe 41 05 e Crue O60 O DE 0 304 4 1 6 EE Abets Osda KK E O BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS 20 Leb 84 6 i SH SR 84 6 iL Zs 02008 84 6 PLU L BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT DEFAULT SPUNCH BLANK CARD ENDING JMARTI SETUP BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 197 SINTEF Application Manual 6 5 3 Line to ground fault and fault tripping transients Exa_7a adp Single phase to ground fault transients
154. ata for cables The user can turn on sheath armour by a single button and allowed to copy information between the cables The cable number is selected in the top combo box with a maximum number specified in Number of cables in the Model page For CABLE PARAMETERS Cable Constants unselected the Ground options are inactive and number of grounded conductors is calculated internally in ATPDraw based on the total number of conductors in the system and the number of initially selected phases For CABLE CONSTANTS Cable Constants check box is On the user must specify which conductor is grounded by checking the appropriate Ground buttons A warning will appear if a mismatch between the number of phases and the number of ungrounded conductors is found Grounded conductors are drawn by gray color under View Data Cable number E a Total radius Er m oo Core 0 06 0 07 MR On F Ground E View Model _ fol x sheath i On M Ground Edit View Armor 2 i On Ground Fosition vertical m f Horizontal m v gef 115 0 3 Fig 5 26 Cable Data dialog box for a 3 phase SC type cable system ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 143 SINTEF Advanced Manual For each of the conductors Core Sheath and Armor the user can specify the following data Rin Inner radius of conductor m Rout Outer radius of conductor m Rho Resistivity of the conductor material mu Relative permeability of the conductor material mu in
155. atically adds underscore characters to obtain the maximum resolution A variable R used both for high and low precision resistances will thus be declared twice with 5 and 15 underscore characters added This process is hidden but the result is seen in the final ATP file under the SParameter declaration IMPORTANT Always use a period after a number in the value field ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 75 I NT EF Reference Manual Variables Changing the names in the left side PARAMETER settings column will affect the text strings NAME VALUE variables specified in the component GES 1000 dialog boxes An example is shown in 1 Fig 4 22 If the variable R is changed to 0 001 RES the variable R used in some D component dialog box will no longer be assigned Therefore the user is requested about what action to take a reset the variable R to zero b set default value from the sup file c select a parameter and decide which one of the variables should replace R a Number of simulations 1 Ai Delete Fig 4 21 Setting values to text strings variables Undefined parameters wl The following parameters are no longer defined but are still referenced by circuit objects Please choose the action to be performed on each object value that refers undefined parameters Action Choose an action sl Choose an action cet value to zero Set default value select parameter
156. be and which phases to produce output in the PL4 file There are four different probes exist in ATPDraw Open Probe wl Probe v Node voltages output request Fhases i ES A Probe b Branch voltage output request e VP Probe 1 Branch current output request me Probe t TACS variable output request Type 33 Fig 4 47 Node dialog box for standard components 4 8 Open Group dialog box If you double click in a selected group of objects the Open Group dialog box will appear allowing you to change attributes common to all components in that group such as data values group number and hide and lock state The common data parameters are listed in a dialog as of Fig 4 48 where you can change the data for all the involved components simultaneously The data labels from the support files are used to classify the data EE data parameter for several OK component simultaneously is to use SPARAMETER feature see _ Help Fig 4 20 in section 4 2 4 1 I 23 In Lock Fig 4 48 Open Group dialog M Use defaultvalues now box for simultaneous data setting Every component has a group number By specifying a value in the Group No field all components in the selected group of objects are assigned the same number The group number serves as an optional sorting criterion for the ATP file components with the lowest group number are written to the atp file first The Hide state of multiple components can also be specified Hidden c
157. beginning from the standard data parameter Freq init up to an upper frequency limit specified by the mandatory parameter Decades The number of sample points per decade Points Dec 1s given on the Model page of the Line Cable Data dialog box in Fig 6 18 The model also requires a frequency Freq matrix where the transformation matrix is calculated and a steady state frequency Freq SS The JMarti model needs in some cases modification of the default fitting data under the optional Model fitting data fields which is not seen here because the default fitting option was selected by checking the Use default fitting check box For further details please read in Chapter XVII of the ATP Rule Book 3 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 191 SINTEF Application Manual Line Cable Data D ATPDraw3 lcc Exa_ alc Model Data Standard data Rho ohm m 1 foo Freq init Hz om Length mile Dag system type Phases 3 IT Transposed kW Auto bundling wv kin effect Saint Units M Segmened ground C Metric f English M Real transt matrix Model Type Data C Bergeron Decades Points Dec r Pl fe E G Ma Freg matrix Hz o 5o Hz W Use default fiting Comment OK Cancel Import Save As Run ATP View Verity Help Data Fab ber Home over ina Borer phe NO Noda C Sembyen SL ka E E C e ka ka kat Ch 0 2175 0 601 0 05215 2 0 2 e 0 2175 0 8
158. can be undone or redone Changes made to the circuit data in the component dialog ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 61 I NT EF Reference Manual box are also supported by the Undo redo functions These functions also update the circuit s Modified state in the status bar to indicate that the circuit has been modified During an undo operation the modified state is reset its previous value 4 2 2 2 Cut Copies the selected objects to the Windows clipboard and deletes them from the circuit window The objects can later be pasted into the same or other circuit windows or even other instances of ATPDraw Short key Cir x 4 2 2 3 Copy The selected objects are copied to the clipboard Short key Ctr C A single marked object or a group of objects can be copied to the clipboard This command unselects the selected objects 4 2 2 4 Paste The contents of the clipboard are pasted into the current circuit when this menu item is selected Short key Ctrl V The pasted object or objects appear in the current window in marked moveable mode 4 2 2 5 Duplicate Copies the selected object or a group of objects to the clipboard and then duplicates them in the current circuit window Duplicated objects appear in the current window in marked moveable mode Short key Ctrl D 4 2 2 6 Clear Selected objects are removed the from the circuit window Short key Del 4 2 2 7 Copy Graphics The selected objects are copied to the clipboard in Wi
159. chJobx filename Text BatchJobx parameter Integer Default settings for the Pocket Calculator features of ATP are also specified in the ATP settings section Parameter Type Description Var Simulations Number of Pocket Calculator simulations Var Count Number of Parameter variables 7 1 6 1024x768 This controls the default window position on the screen Left Top Width Height 7 1 7 Reload Contains the 5 last loaded project files These files appear under the File Reload menu 7 1 8 Objects This controls the visibility status of the Toolbar and the Status bar Default setting makes them visible at program startup which can be modified in the View menu ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 235 SINTEF a 7 2 PFC simulations in ATPDraw The Verify feature of ATPDraw enables the user to compare the line cable model with an exact PI equivalent as a function of frequency or verify the power frequency benchmark data for zero positive short circuit impedances reactive open circuit line charging and mutual zero sequence coupling The Verify module supports the POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION PFC of zero and positive short circuit impedances and open circuit reactive line charging along with mutual zero sequence impedance for multi circuit lines The supporting programs LINE CONSTANTS and CABLE CONSTANTS calculate the series impedance and the shunt admittance from geometrical data and material properties These electr
160. ct can be deleted 22 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ee 2 5 2 Configuring ATPDraw The ATPDraw ini file contains customizable program options Generally default settings meet most of the user s requirements When required the ini file can either be modified via Tools Options menu of the program or by using a text editor Default values and supported options are described in the Appendix part of this Manual 2 6 Interfacing ATPDraw with other programs of the ATP EMTP package The ATP EMTP simulation package consists of various separate programs which are communicating with each other via disk files 1 e the output of pre processors are used as input for the main program TPBIG EXE while the product of the simulation can be used as input for plotting programs The main program itself is often used as pre processor e g for LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS BCTRAN or DATA BASE MODULE runs and the punch file products in that cases can be re used as input in a subsequent run via Include Taking that the structure of the program components is rather difficult a user shell to supervise the execution of separate programs and input output flows has a great advantage The new Edit Commands feature of ATPDraw supports to extend the command set under the ATP menu by integrating optional user commands such as Run ATP file Run PlotXY Run TPPlot Run PCPlot Run ATP Analyzer Run ACC Run PL42mat etc This option makes
161. cted objects by rotating 180 degrees LD ARP To the right of the speed buttons the nine most recently used component icons are displayed Selecting one of these shortcut icons inserts a new component into the active circuit window The leftmost icon represents always the last inserted component 4 2 3 2 Status Bar Status bar on off at the bottom of the main window The status bar displays status information about the active circuit window The mode field on the left hand side shows which mode of operation is active at present Possible modes are EDIT Normal mode Indicates no special type of operation CONN END Indicates the end of a connection The program is waiting for a left mouse button click to set the end point of a new connection To cancel drawing a connection click the right mouse button or press the Esc key MOVE LABEL Indicates a text label move Clicking the left mouse button on a text label then holding down and dragging enables you to move the label to a position of your choice To cancel moving a label click the right mouse button or press the Esc key GROUP Indicates region selection Double clicking the left mouse button in an empty space of the active circuit window enables you to draw a polygon shaped region To finish the selection click the right mouse button Any object within the selected region is then marked for selection To cancel region selection press the Esc key INFO START Indicates the start of relat
162. ction 5 1 of this manual provides an alternative way for the TACS switch and MODELS object representation This circuit is shown in Fig 6 30 and the name of the project file is Exa_ 8g adbp HOM CRAZ CRZ SS JCR30 td Curr CRH20 CRO Fig 6 30 TACS switch and MODELS object compressed into a group The ATP file of the example circuit is shown on the next 3 pages The Record requests which result in MODELS variable output in the PL4 file are marked bold in the data file These requests can be specified under ATP Settings Record as shown in Fig 6 31 PRINTER PLOT requests cards which are also part of the original DC68 DAT are not much used today so were omitted Similarly the original data case includes a clock wise rotating 3 phase voltage source negative sequence which is not reproduced here It could be reproduced easily by replacing the 3 phase sources with three single phase sources of independent delay angle or make these changes manually by means of the ATP Edit ATP file feature and run the data case by the Run ATP file command ATP Settings wl Simulation Output Switch UM Format Record Variables Model arable FLASH_1B PI AH IC d Add in Remove Alias trip Record FLASH_ Avcap AS VOAPA FLASH_14 po0wer AS PAMA FLASH I energy AS EZMA FLASH _1A trip AS GAPA OK Help Fig 6 31 Selecting MODELS variables for output ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 203
163. d CABLE PARAMETERS Generation of frequency dependent line model input data Semlyen J Marti Noda line models Calculation of model data for transformers XFORMER BCTRAN Saturation and hysteresis curve conversion Data Base Modularization for INCLUDE usage Simulation part Supporting programs l l i r UNECONSTANTS I CABLE CONSTANTS SEMLYEN SETUP JMARTI SETUP heal time domain and frequency domain solutions representation of the l 7 NODASETUP Le i electrical network Transient General purpose Analysis of simulation Control Systems language l TACS MODELS Source www emtp org Fig 1 1 Supporting routines in ATP 1 3 2 Program capabilities ATP EMTP tables are dimensioned dynamically at the start of execution to satisfy the needs of users and their hardware e g RAM No absolute limits have ever been observed and the standard version has limits that average more than 20 times default table sizes Today the largest simulations are being performed using Intel based PC s The following table shows maximum limits for standard program distribution Busses 6000 Sources 200 10000 2250 1200 Synchronous machines 90 12 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 Ce SINTEF Medai 1 3 3 Main characteristics of plotting programs for ATP These post processors are interfaced with ATP via disk files and their main
164. d instead of repeating the process four times you can use the copy facility First you have to select a group of components This can be done by selecting Edit Select group field in the main menu or with a double click with the left mouse button on an empty space of the Circuit window Then cursor style changes to a pointing hand and the action mode is ED JT GROUP The process is then to click with the left mouse button to create a corner in a fence and to click the right button to enclose the fence polygon All components having their center inside the fence are included in the group Alternative way of group selection is to draw a rectangle around the objects by a left mouse click and hold at the upper left corner of the desired rectangle and moving thereafter to the lower right corner Objects inside the rectangle become a group when the mouse button is released You can follow the procedure shown in Fig 3 15 Fig 3 15 Drawing a polygon First double click on white space click the left mouse button at each corner of the polygon then click the right button to enclose the polygon The group created in Fig 3 15 can be copied rotated etc like a single object Now we want to duplicate this group Click on the main menu Edit field and choose Duplicate or press the Ctrl D shortcut key The selected group is copied to the clipboard and pasted in the same operation The old group is redrawn in normal mode and the copy is drawn in the to
165. da Semlyen Comment OK Cancel Import Save As Run ATP WIE Verity Help Fig 5 29 Specification of a 4 phase JMarti line model Line Model Frequency Scan results x Legend chee Line model Exact Pl Mode C Zero seq CG Positive seq C Mutual seq logireg Copy wmf Fig 5 30 Verifying a JMarti line model 1 Hz to IMHz Model is OK for f gt 25 Hz 146 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel In Fig 5 30 the user can select the Mode and the Phase number of which the absolute value of the input impedance is displayed to the left in a log log plot It is also possible to copy the curves to the windows clipboard in metafile format Copy wmf The absolute value of the input impedance of the model and the exact pi equivalent can be compared for the following cases Zero sequence AC currents of 1 A with zero phase angle is applied to all phases simultaneously while the other end of the line cable is grounded The zero sequence impedance is thus equal to the voltage on the sending end of each phase Positive sequence AC currents of 1 A with a phase angle of 360 i 1 n is applied to all phases where 7 is the current phase number in the specific circuit and n is the total number of phases in the circuit A 6 phase line circuit will result in phase angles 0 120 240 0 120 240 while a 4 phase circuit will result in 0 90 180 270 The user specifies a circui
166. describes the meaning of input data values 1 Excitation test data Specified under Factory test Open circuit The data required by BCTRAN are FREQ Test frequency under Structure IEXPOS Curr for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Positive sequence Loss for the 100 voltage value divided by 10 SPOS when External Lm requested SPOS Power under Ratings for winding specified under Performed at LEXPOS Loss for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Positive sequence IEXZERO Curr for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Zero sequence SZERO Power under Ratings for winding specified under Performed at LEXZERO Loss for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Zero sequence The above input values can be derived from the factory test data as shown next IEXPOS Iex V 100 SPOS for single phase IEXPOS Iex V3 V 100 SPOS for 3 phase where Iex kA excitation current V kV excitation voltage SPOS MVA power base IEXZERO 0 for single phase IEXZERO 1 3 Iexh V3 V 100 SZERO for 3 phase where Iexh kA zero sequence excitation current SPOS MVA power base normally equal to SPOS Y connected windings typical values 3 leg core type IEXZERO IEXPOS S leg core type IEXZERO 4 IEXPOS 2 Winding cards Specified under Ratings The data required by BCTRAN are VRAT L L voltage kV for D connection or single phase transformers L L voltage kV divided by dE for A Auto and Y connections 3 p
167. dialog dee 65 comment line oo eee ccc eeecceeeeceeeeesseeeee 68 Component selection menu 33 34 37 96 EIERE 64 96 129 174 SSIRN LEE KEE 13 CONNECTIONS 0 0 cece eeecccceeeccceececeescceeeecseeeens 38 CODY ter 62 EE 62 creating A RU 49 customizing objects eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 166 DEE 62 D Dahl Data IG E 9 DATA BASE EEN 23 DBM file os sossccnpseostccsannccteseosegascarseenmneiccss 167 DC machit isdn esetesseddencelavecnawentvarneroeeisced 160 default table EE 12 Default View option 9 Ge al E 50 Directories Ee 9 distributed ne 110 download EEN 20 SINTEF draw relation cccceeeccceeeecee eee 35 38 123 duplheate cc ssescceesesseeeeeeeees 44 62 E edit ATP file oo eee cee 51 77 224 Edit circuit ccc cee e ee 65 96 132 134 Edit commands ccccseeesseeesseeeseeeeees 78 edit component cc eeseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Edit PI OWD sessrssssoessisesorsrsres 64 96 132 134 Ean LIA E ENN 77 Bodit MEDU E 37 edit operatons 36 EE 9 SEENEN 9 Electromagnetic Transients Program 9 FET GE 10 SEENEN 15 FUG TS OOK eet 241 TPB E E 23 USET E 19 EE Eege 138 environmental variables ATPDIR WATDIR GNUDIR 25 EXport Circuit oe eeeeeseseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 external eier E 24 2 4 0 amp 2 EE 64 96 131 F RES 220 Format Page cceecccccccccecceesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeaas 50 erer eee ere ne ne een ree ener 122 frequency components
168. ding The final step of building this circuit is to give data to nodes node names and grounding All nodes will automatically receive names from ATPDraw so the user should normally give names to nodes of special interest only It is advised in general to perform the node naming as the last step in building up a circuit This is to avoid undesirable multiple node names which is corrected by ATPDraw automatically but results in irritating warning messages To give data to a node you simply have to click on this node once with the right mouse button Fig 3 26 Fig 3 29 shows how to give data to four different nodes PS Pos T Ground Help M Display J UserNamed Fig 3 26 Click on a node with the right mouse button and specify a name in the dialog box When you exit the window in Fig 3 26 by clicking OK the circuit is updated as shown in Fig 3 27 All node names are forced left adjusted and as a general rule in the ATP simulation capital letters should be used ATPDraw does accept lower case characters in the node data window however this feature should be avoided in particular if the node is connected with electrical sources Node data wl From NEG POS T Ground Help M Display J UserNamed Fig 3 27 Click on a node with the right mouse button and specify a name in the node data window The name NEG will be assigned to all nodes visually connected ca M Ground Help T Display E
169. disk Default location of Model support files is the MOD folder The sup file does not need to have the same name as the model file but it is recommended The new model object has now been created is ready for use You can reload and modify the support file of the model objects whenever you like Selecting the Edit sup file item of the Objects Model menu pops up the well known Edit Object dialog box with the model object controls and the user is allowed to customize data and node values icon and help text of the object Selecting MODELS Files sup mod in the component selection menu performs an Open Model dialog box where you can choose a model support file If you select the file FLASH 1 SUP the icon of the new model appears immediately in the circuit window and it can be connected with other object in normal way The MODEL FLASH 1 dialog box of the new model object has an additional input section Models besides the standard DATA and NODES attributes as shown in Fig 5 37 This new section has two input fields Model file for locating the model description file and a Use As field for specification of the model_name inthe USE model AS model name statement of MODELS The input and output interface for MODELS objects the use of the model and interfacing it with the rest of the circuit are handled automatically by ATPDraw The model description is written directly in the ATP input file Blank lines are removed when inserting the mod file T
170. dit Tools Done 4 2 5 2 New User Specified sup file Reference Manual Each standard component has a pre defined help file which can be edited by a built in Help Editor accessible via the speed button on the right hand side of the Edit Object dialog Using the help editor users can write optional help file for the objects or add their notes to the existing help text Available functions and menu field items of the Help Editor are described in the 4 2 6 2 section of this manual When the user completed all modifications on the component data and on the icon and help files the new support file can be saved to disk using Save existing support file will be overwritten or Save As new file will be created in the USP folder buttons Fig 4 28 Icon Editor User specified objects are either customized standard objects or objects created for the use of INCLUDE and Data Base Modularization feature of ATP EMTP The Objects User Specified New sup file menu enables the user to create a new support file for a user specified object or customize data and node values the icon and the help text of an existing one Support files of USP objects are normally located in the USP folder The Edit Object dialog box opens with empty Data and Nodes tabs in this menu Number of nodes and data must be in line with the ARG and NUM declarations in the header section of the Data Base Module DBM file The number of data can be in the range of 0 to 36
171. dler type 15 TACS TACS source User Specified t ALS ph type 14 A PCH AC Ungrounded SEa DC Ungrounded Frequency comp Fig 3 4 Selecting an AC source standard Component After you have clicked in the AC type 14 field the selected source appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position l Then click with the left mouse button on open space to place it The AC object is G redrawn in red color as an indication that no data have been given to the object Next select the source inductance as shown in Fig 3 5 Frobes amp 3 phase Branch Linear Resistor Branch Nonlinear Capacitor Line Lumped Inductor Line Distributed BEL Fig 3 5 Selecting an inductor After you have clicked in the nductor field the selected inductor appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle from version 3 2 an optional parallel damping resistance is included specify data Kp 0 to remove it Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 3 6 Click on the white space with the left mouse button to place the inductor the enclosing rectangle disappears A grid snap facility helps you to place the inductor in the correct position The component position is rounded to the Fig 3 6 nearest 10 pixel The included parallel resistor 1s shown in a dotted style The inductor in F
172. e ATP D ATPDraw3 runATP_g bat Browse Armafit CAEEUGGNUATP0 YArmafitarmafit exe Browse Save Load Apply Help Fig 7 2 Specification of commands to execute external programs ATPDOraw Options Ei General Preferences Directories view ATP Project folder D ATPDraw3 Project S ATP folder D ATPDrewa Atp D Model folder D ATPDRAWS3 Mocy 000 7 Group folder DAATPDRAWA G 000 g User spec folder D ATPDRAW3 Usp 000 Line Cablefolder D ATPDRAWS LCCL 00000 S Betran folder D ATpOpawO c 0000 S OK Ep Load Apply Help 232 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ee Fig 7 3 Default location of program folders 7 1 4 View Options These options control the default appearance of the circuit The individual settings for the current circuit can be specified under the View Options menu It 1s possible to select what to draw on the screen by changing the check box status The default view options for new projects can be specified under the Tools Options View ATP dialog as shown in Fig 7 4 Parameter Range Description NodeNames On Off Enables disables the visibility of node names Labels On Off Enables disables the visibility of component labels Components On Off Enables disables the visibility of components Models On Off Enables disables the visibility of MODELS components Tacs On Off Enables disables the visibility of TACS components Connections On Off
173. e and admittance matrix data R mol and oC Snaking If checked the cables are assumed to be transposed Add G Check this button to allow conductance between conductors Not supported for Cable Constants Add C Check this button to allow additional capacitance between conductors Not supported for Cable Constants 5 3 2 1 Model Type settings for SC cables Bergeron JMarti Noda and Semlyen The Model Type and Data settings for these SC cable models are identical with that of the overhead transmission lines as described in section 5 3 1 1 Users are warned however that the frequency dependent models may produce unrealistic results due to neglecting the frequency dependency of the transformation matrix which 1s acceptable in overhead line modeling but not for cables 142 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel Cascade PI model Model Jf the Cable Constants option is selected under the Bes eae System type field the PI model supports additional SE M Homogenous input parameters to produce cascade PI equivalents KE K Cross bonded The cascade PI model is described in the ATP Rule San short circuit sheath armour Book 3 The Homogenous type can be used with all r DEZ EE grounding schemes C Semlyen 100 RSG ohm Fig 5 25 SC cable data for cascade PI output 5 3 2 2 Cable Data page settings for SC cables The data page contains input fields where the user can specify the geometrical or material d
174. e component and press the Crt F1 key combination the component specific help is displayed When double clicking on a selected group of objects the Open Group dialog box will appear allowing the user to change attributes common to all components in that group such as group number hide and lock state Default component attributes are stored in support files Access to create and customize support files is provided by the Objects menu Components are connected if their nodes overlap or if a connection is drawn between the nodes To draw a connection between nodes click on a node with the left mouse button A line is drawn between that node and the mouse cursor Click the left mouse button again to place the connection clicking the right button cancels the operation The gridsnap facility helps overlapping the nodes Connected nodes are given the same name by the Make Names and Make File options in the ATP menu Nodes can be attached along a connection as well as at connection end points A connection should not unintentionally cross other nodes what you see is what you get A warning for node naming appears during the ATP file creation if a connection exists between nodes of different names or if the same name has been given to unconnected nodes Connections can be selected as any other objects To resize a connection click on its end point with the left mouse button hold down and drag If several connections share the same node the desired connec
175. e n 2 a phase User Specified inion Frequency comp TREE standard Component 4 ee MODE EDIT Modified P Current NS Status bar with Component action mode menu option hints selection menu Fig 4 1 Components of ATPDraw s main window If you are unfamiliar with the use of ATPDraw read the Introductory Manual to learn how to create a circuit or the Advanced Manual to learn how to create a new object in ATPDraw The Introductory Manual starts with the explanation of operating windows and the mouse in ATPDraw and shows how to build up a circuit and how to create an ATP file to be used as input for a subsequent transient simulation ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 57 SINTEF 4 2 Main menu 4 2 1 File Reference Manual Eile This field contains actions for input output of ATPDraw projects Mew Selecting the File item in the main menu will result in a popup menu Open Lis shown in Fig 4 2 Reload Dee Ctrl S SEVE AS Sawe All Close Close All Import Expor Reload Icons cave Metafile Exit Fig 4 2 File menu 4 2 1 1 New Selecting this menu item will open a new empty Circuit window ATPDraw supports to work on several circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits The number of simultaneous open windows is limited only by the available MS Windows resources The circuit window is much larger than the actual screen as it is indicated by the scroll bars of each ci
176. e of 33 and a capacitance of 1 uF The smoothing capacitor is 1000 uF and the load resistor is 20 Q The example has been taken from 2 exercise 1 The units given in Fig 3 2 are based on settings of Xopt and Copt equal to zero as will be explained later The circuit in Fig 3 3 has been chosen since its construction involves the most commonly used edit operations 3 5 1 Building the circuit Most parts of the building process will be demonstrated in this chapter along with the explanation of correcting possible drawing errors The normal mode of operation is MODE EDIT You must always be in this mode to be able to select and specify data to objects To return to EDIT from other modes press Esc 3 5 1 1 Starting to create a new circuit Selecting the New command in the File menu or pressing the new empty page symbol in the Component Toolbar a new circuit window will be created 3 5 1 2 Source First an AC source 1s selected from the floating Component selection menu which appears with a right mouse click on open area of the circuit window Fig 3 4 shows how to select a 1 phase sinusoidal voltage source Sources AC type 14 using the mouse ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 39 SINTEF er Probes amp 3 phase j Branch Linear Branch Nonlinear w wwo w of Line Lumped Line Distributed Switches DC type 11 Machines Ramp type 12 slope Ramp type 13 Transformers MODELS Surge type 15 Type 94 V Hei
177. e of MODELS The user writes a model file and ATPDraw takes care of the INPUT OUTPUT section of MODELS along with the USE of each model The following restriction applies gt Only INPUT OUTPUT and DATA supported in the USE statement gt Not possible to call other models under USE gt Exchanging data between models is restricted see remarks in 4 2 5 4 gt Not possible to specify HISTORY of DELAY CELLS under USE Using this feature requires knowledge about the syntax and general structure of MODELS language There are two options for creating a model object in ATPDraw e to create a support file manually under Object Model New sup file e to selecta mod file directly under MODELS in the selection menu The Advanced part of this Manual gives detailed information about both procedures and a general overview about the use of MODELS in ATPDraw In this chapter only the automatic support file generation is introduced The process normally consists of two steps 1 To create a model file mod containing the actual model description 2 To load this file via the Files sup mod or Type 94 sub menus under MODELS Files sup mod Type 94 1 phase 2 phase BEE Fig 4 62 Options under the MODELS sub menu Files sup mod Selecting MODELS Files sup mod in the component selection menu performs an Open Model dialog box where the user can choose a model file name or a support file name These files are normally
178. e phase nodes and an 4BC reference object Names 8 have been given to nodes in the circuit By selecting Make Names under ATP in the main menu ATPDraw examines the circuit and creates unique node names If you click with the right mouse button on nodes after selecting ATP Make Names you are able to see the phase sequence in the bottom of the node input window as shown in Fig 3 33 a and Fig 3 34 b The single phase nodes do not have a phase sequence but the single phase side of a splitter object has one as shown in Fig 3 34 b 52 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF P onl Int fi i T Ground Help v Display M Useriamed Fhase sequence ABC Int 4 T Ground Help WM Display 4 Useriamed Phase sequence BLA Fig 3 33 a Click right button on node Fig 3 33 b Click right button on node 4 The node names in Fig 3 33 a are 74 1B and 1C all left adjusted The node names in Fig 3 33 b are 1B IC and JA all left adjusted ATPDraw gives the phase sequence ABC to the sub network left of the first transposition object that can be overridden by connecting an ABC reference object to any 3 phase nodes of the circuit From fe R l Ground Help T Display F UserNamed Phase sequence B IN2 T Ground Help v Display M Useriamed Fhase sequence CAB Fig 3 34 a Click right button on node 7 Fig 3 34 b Click right on single phase node AS To x002 7 T Ground Hel
179. e shunt capacitance series impedance admittance matrix of the unreduced system and or of the equivalent phase conductor system after elimination of ground wires and the bundling of conductors and or of the symmetrical components will be calculated C print out Selection between the capacitance matrix and the susceptance matrix oC JMarti The JMarti line model is fitted in a frequency range beginning from the standard data parameter Freq init up to an upper frequency limit specified by the mandatory parameters number of Decades and the number of sample points per decade Points Dec The model also requires a frequency Freq matrix where the transformation matrix is calculated and a steady state frequency Freq SS for calculation of the steady state condition Freq matrix parameter should be selected according to the dominant frequency component of the transient study The JMarti model needs in some cases modification of the default fitting data under the optional Model fitting data field that can be made visible by unselecting the Use default fitting check box For further details please read in the ATP Rule Book 3 Data Model fiting data C Bergeron Decades Points Dec fe 10 Freg matrix Hz Freg 55 Hz E Ge JMartt kon IT Use default fitting C Noda C Semlyen Fig 5 20 Parameter settings for the JMarti line model Noda The Noda line model is fitted in a frequency range beginning from t
180. e three MODELS object and the nodes in the electrical network This connection is made by the ATP logic by specifying identical name for the MODELS output node and for the control node of the TACS switch This will result in a warning such as shown in Fig 6 28 when creating the ATP file which can be ignored in this case by clicking on OK If you chose the next button Abort then re draw the circuit the nodes with identical name will be printed in cyan color c same name on different nodes GAPA Accept Fig 6 28 Warning message that can be ignored here If you wish you can use the Draw relation feature TACS Draw relation of the component selection menu to visualize the connection between the MODELS objects and the electrical network ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 201 SINTEF Application Manual If you click the right mouse button on the object controlling GAPA an input dialog box appears where you can specify the attributes The Model file field is the name and path of the file in which depicts the operation of the object according to the syntax of the MODELS simulation language 4 The Use As field may contain any name but the name must be different for the three MODELS object in Fig 6 27 Attributes DATA VALUE MODE PHASE MAME Pset 1 vi jo CRIDA n Eset 9 We 0 CR20A idel d iczn P CRZ2A fdur Fall trip 0 GAFA Group Mo fo Label Comment Models Hide Model file DAATPDRA
181. e unloaded It is worth to mention that some care is needed when constructing the EMTP model for such a statistical simulations because the unnecessary over complication of the model may increase the overall simulation time of that many statistical runs significantly 6 9 1 Setting program options for the statistical simulation The simulated switching incidence is a 3 phase reclosing in this study Statistical switches of Gaussian type represent the reclosing breaker The master slave dependency is now supported by ATPDraw thus phase A is specified as master and the remaining two as slave ATP requires the master switch be specified earlier in the ATP file then a slave To ensure this ordering the Group No of a master switch must be set lower than that of a slave as shown in Fig 6 47 Additionally the Sorting by group number option must also be activated on the ATP Settings Format page The above selections will result in data cards sorted in the ATP file by class then sorted by group numbers in each classes ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 223 SINTEF Application Manual Attributes Attributes STATISTIC SWITCH STATISTIC SWITCH Switch type Switch type Open Close Open Close Master C Opening Slave P GG Cl Ge Closin rm JE D NG oneee EE en Distribution Pick om Distribution C Uniform C Uniform Ge Gaussian Ge Gaussian Group No fo Group No f Fig 6 47 Input parameters of master and slave statistical s
182. e user can select a data parameter here and click on the gt gt arrow symbol The selected data parameter will appear in the field to the right Added to group The name of the selected data parameter is editable by double clicking on it The default data values of the new group object will be equal to the original components data values Under Nodes the available nodes for the selected component are similarly listed The user can select the desired nodes and specify the position of the group object node on the icon border 1 12 as shown in Fig 5 3 All data and nodes listed m the Added to group will be an external attribute of the new group object Selected data and nodes can also be removed from the Added to group by clicking on the lt lt 130 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel arrow button As all other components the group object is limited to 36 data and 12 nodes It is not possible to edit the node and data attributes after the group has been created If you need to change the group attributes the only way is to extract the group in the main menu Edit Extract or Shift right click to call the shortcut menu and select Extract and reselect a new group BUS v After selecting all the required data and nodes click on OK i Ji then a new support file will automatically be created as a temporary file in the GRP folder The old components disappear and the new group object is drawn in the circuit window as shown in
183. ed by Bonneville Power Administration USA For SINTEF Energy Research Trondheim Norway 7 August 2002 Hans Kr H idalen project manager SUMMARY ATPDraw is a graphical mouse driven preprocessor to the ATP version of the Electromagnetic Transients Program EMTP on the MS Windows platform The program is written in Borland Delphi 2 0 and runs under Windows 9x NT 2000 XP In ATPDraw the user can construct an electrical circuit using the mouse and selecting components from menus then ATPDraw generates the ATP input file in the appropriate format based on what you see is what you get The simulation program ATP and plotting programs can be integrated with ATPDraw ATPDraw supports multiple circuit modeling that makes possible to work on more circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits All kinds of standard circuit editing facilities copy paste grouping rotate export import undo redo are available In addition ATPDraw supports the Windows clipboard and metafile export The circuit is stored on disk in a single project file which includes all the simulation objects and options needed to run the case The project file is in zip compressed format that makes the file sharing with others very simple Most of the standard components of ATP both single and 3 phase as well as TACS are supported and in addition the user can create new objects based on MODELS or Include Data Base Module Line Cable modeling KCLee
184. ed in the Save As dialog which is similar to the Open Project dialog in Fig 4 3 or in Fig 4 4 This command allows the user to save the project under a name other than that 1s already used ATPDraw can read circuit files cir created by earlier program versions but the Save As command supports only the new file format The default extension of the project files on disk is ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 59 I NT EF Reference Manual adp The project file contains the circuit description along with all user specified support sup model mod line cable a c or transformer bct data and library ib files in Zip compressed format 4 2 1 6 Save All Saves all modified projects to disk under their own project file names If one or more open projects still have not got a name Noname adp it will be requested in a Save As dialog boxes successively 4 2 1 7 Close Close the active circuit window If any changes to the circuit have not been saved yet the user will be warned as shown in Fig 4 5 to confirm before the circuit is closed If the project has been modified the user is given a chance to save it first 4 2 1 8 Close All Close all circuit windows If a project has been modified since the last save operation a confirmation dialog will be prompted giving a chance for the user to save it first K Save changes to D VWTPraw roiech Exa_1 adp Fig 4 5 Confirmation prevents the loss of unsaved project dat
185. ed separately For short circuit calculation the other circuit s is are is also grounded at one end while for open circuit calculations all terminals are open The mutual coupling between the circuits 1s calculated as well and called zero sequence transfer impedance This is done by connecting all phases of each individual circuit to a common node A current 3 7 is then applied to one of these common nodes circuit and the voltage on the other node is measured All terminals at the other end of the component is grounded The procedure is repeated for all circuits except the last one Below is listed the xVerifyF dat file for a 6 phase line BEGIN NEW DATA CASE 1 667E 9 1 0 1 1 1 SPREFIX D ATPDraw3 lcc SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INZO1_ INZOl_ INZO1_ INZO1D INZO1E INZO1F OUTOLA OUTOIB OUTOIC OCUTOID CUTO1E OUTOLF SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INZO2A INZO2B INZO2C INZO2_ INZO2_ INZO2_ OUTOZR OUTO2ZB OUTO2C OCUTO2D CUTO2ZE OCUTOZE SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INZS1_ INZS1_ INZS1_ INZS1D INZS1E INZSI1F EHEHEHEH FETE HEFER tr Zitt FEEEEF SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INZS2A INZS2B INZS2C INZS2_ INZS2_ INZS2_ Tir FETE FETE tr FREE FEEEEF SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INPO1A INPO1B INPO1C INPO1D INPO1E INPOIF OUPO1A OUPO1B OUPO1C OUPO1D OUPO1E OUPOLF SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INPO2A INPO2B INPO2C INPO2D INPO2E INPO2F OUPO2ZA OUPO2B OUPO2C OUPO2D OUPO2E OUPO2F SINCLUDE LCC 6 lib INPS1A INPS1B INPS1
186. ees 63 POSPTOCOS SOT cerier e 13 POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION 145 236 Power Quality Indexes 13 PRETCECI CES AG uen oae aer T 90 PODE E cea a A 41 EE 102 Proba My Ol oncresdenecadcusunctonetenennceonunadeacninesd 42 probes EE 105 EES 49 59 public COMAIN cc ceeeeesseeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeees 10 R EE ee 74 EE 44 61 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 Appendix reference obiect 52 106 124 184 Te Fe E 68 ES 0 EE 38 EE 60 EU a E E E 74 PUD DSL Dand iscicccsresesdsnncenscinceotsnwosevencenss 63 64 a ENN LE 49 76 Run ATP button 138 running SIMULATION eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 51 A saturable transformer ccccceeeeeees 159 BEE 49 SAVE PrOJEC EE 59 SELES OL eege Ee 37 E 6 0 0 EE 44 S15 101 12 6 0 5 E E EEE ES 62 Semlyen line E 140 EE 96 simulation settings eececeeceeeeeeeeeees 50 70 Simulation sub menu 49 SE EE 138 ANITE A E 9 BEE 50 73 BER 104 BEE 106 spitter OD EC ennen 53 standard Components 28 79 standard dE eege 125 Statistical switch oo eee eeeee ee ee 164 223 Status EE 35 67 RIESEN 79 supporting TOUTIne 11 154 E e E 103 synchronous machine cece cece ccc cceeeeeee 160 SYSTRAN Engineering cc ceeeeeeeeees 9 T E eee 10 11 104 coupling tO circuit 120 SVC SS EE E 121 transfer functions ccccceceeeeceeeeees 121 TACO aE E ty ereen trey ee 120 ORGS GOT E 71 87 three phase circuits cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 32 TOME s
187. eft button to place the connection If you made a mistake in the connection drawing process you can correct the error easily because connections are editable copy move rotate as any other objects If you would like to correct modify a misplaced connection click on it with the left mouse button After this selection ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 45 SINTEF ee the connection is enclosed by a rectangle and two squares replace node dots at the end of the line To move the connection click on an internal point of it using the left mouse button then hold down and move and release the mouse at the correct position To reposition a connection click on the node squares with the left button and stretch the connection as illustrated in Fig 3 20 Fig 3 20 Edit connection Click any point of the line then click node squares and stretch 3 5 1 4 Load The last part of this example circuit is the load consisting of a smoothing capacitor with initial condition and a load resistor First you can select the capacitor as shown in Fig 3 21 Branch Linear Resistor Branch Nonlinear Capacitor Line Lumped Inductor Line Distributed BELE Switches RLC 3 ph z 3 CG 3 ph ead RLC D 3 ph Machines E Se Transformers CHO or Weg L L IO Fig 3 21 Select capacitor with initial condition De After this selection the capacitor appears in the middle of the circuit window in moveable mode enclosed by a rectangle Click on the
188. el with an exact PI equivalent as a function of frequency or verify the power frequency benchmark data for zero positive short circuit impedances reactive open circuit line charging and mutual zero sequence coupling The Verify module supports two types of frequency tests 1 LINE MODEL FREQUENCY SCAN LMFS as documented in the ATP benchmark files DC51 52 dat The LMFS feature of ATP compares the punched electrical model with the exact frequency dependent PI equivalent as a function of a specified frequency range 2 POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION PFC of zero and positive short circuit impedances and open circuit reactive line charging and mutual zero sequence impedance for multi circuit lines In the Verify dialog box as shown in Fig 5 28 the user can choose between a LINE MODEL FREQUENCY SCAN LMES or a POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION PFC case Under Circuit specification each phase conductor is listed for which the user should assign a circuit number The phase order for overhead lines is from the lowest phase number and up to the one assigned under Data in the Line Cable dialog box For cables the cable with the highest number of conductors and the lowest cable number comes first rule of sequence ATP Rule Book Chapter XXIII A circuit number zero means that the conductor is grounded during the frequency test For the LMFS test the user must specify the frequency range Min freq and Max Freq along with the number of points per decade for
189. elation when TACS Draw relation is activated in the selection menu Clicking the left mouse button on a component node or on the end point of another relation will initiate the drawing of a new relation Relations are used to visualize information flow into FORTRAN statements and are drawn as blue connections but do not influence the connections of components INFO END Indicates the end of a relation The program is waiting for a left mouse button click to set the end point of the new relation To cancel drawing relation click the right mouse button or press the Esc key Status bar Modified and Hints field The middle field of the status bar is used to display the Modified state of the active circuit As soon as you alter the circuit moving a label deleting a connection inserting a new component etc the text Modified appears indicating that the circuit should be saved before exit The field will be empty when you save the circuit or undo all modifications The rightmost field of the status bar displays the menu option hints ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 35 SINTEF oe 3 2 Operating the mouse This chapter contains a summary of the various actions taken dependent on mouse operations The left mouse button is generally used for selecting objects or connecting nodes the right mouse button is used for specification of object or node properties Left simple click On object Selects object or connection If the Shift key is
190. ension is ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 73 I NT EF Reference Manual not LIB an error dialog appears during the ATP file generation process The user has 3 options a correct the erroneous specification by stripping off path and extension b continue the operation using an unresolvable ATP SInclude reference c cancel the entire input file generating process Tf you prefer storing library files outside of the USP folder or file extensions other than lib are often used it is wise not to select this Option and specify a complete path in the Sinclude field Insert PL4 Comments If checked ATPDraw writes the circuit comments in a SBEGIN PL4 COMMENTS SEND PL4 COMMENTS block This may result in an error for some older ATP versions Insert Exact Phasor Equivalent card If checked ATPDraw writes an EXACT PHASOR EQUIVALENT request in the ATP file This is recommended for Frequency Scan simulations including constant and distributed parameter overhead lines Insert TACS HYBRID card Checking this button forces TACS HYBRID BLANK TACS to be written to the ATP file Useful when TACS objects are only present inside a User Specified Object Printed Number width Enables the PRINTED NUMBER WIDTH request card which controls the printout of the LUNIT6 device output LIS file Width is the total column width of printed output including blanks separating the columns Space is the number of blanks between columns of printed o
191. enter When the circuit once was saved the name of the disk file appears in the header field of the circuit window Then if you hit Ctr S or press the Save circuit icon in the Toolbar the circuit file is updated immediately on the disk and the Modified flag in the status bar disappears The File Save As option or the Save As Toolbar icon allows you to save the circuit currently in use under a name other than that already allocated to this project 3 5 3 Creating the ATP input file The ATP file describes the circuit according to the ATP input file syntax You can create this file by selecting Make File As command in the ATP main menu The ATP file is regenerated whenever you just execute the run ATP command or press F2 In the latter case the process is hidden for the user However before you create the ATP input file or run the simulation you must not forget to specify the miscellaneous parameters i e parameters that are printed to the Misc Data card s of the ATP input file The default values of these parameters are given in the ATPDraw ini file Changing these default values can either be done in the ATP Settings Simulation sub menu for the current project or under the Tools Options View ATP Edit settings Simulation for all new ATPDraw projects created henceforth Fig 3 30 shows an example of the 1 miscellaneous data card settings of an ATP simulation specifying time step time scale of the simulation etc Th
192. equirements for ATP ATP is available for most Intel based PC platforms under DOS Windows 3 1 9x NT OS 2 Linux and for other computers too e g Digital Unix and VMS Apple Mac s etc Most users including program developers use Intel Penttum based PCs with MS Windows 9x NT A standard Pentium PC configuration with min 128 MB RAM hard disk 20 MB free space and VGA graphics is sufficient to execute ATP under MS Windows Most popular program versions are at present MS Windows 9x NT 2000 XP 32 bit GNU Mingw32 and Watcom ATP MS DOS MS Windows 3 x 95 98 32 bit Salford ATP requires DBOS 486 Linux GNU version of ATP 1 4 Contents of this manual This User s Manual of ATPDraw for Windows 3 5 contains five parts INSTALLATION MANUAL How to obtain the ATP license How to download ATPDraw How to install ATPDraw Hardware requirements How to configure your system How to use ATPDraw as operating shell for other ATP simulations How to communicate with other users and program developers ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 15 SINTEF on INTRODUCTORY MANUAL How to create a circuit in ATPDraw Operating windows Your first circuit Three phase circuits REFERENCE MANUAL Reference of main menu items and program options Reference of the Component Node and Group dialog boxes Reference of ATPDraw circuit objects ADVANCED MANUAL How to create new circuit objects in ATPDraw How to use new features Grouping and
193. er b for the Fortran TACS components ATPDraw provides an extra OUT field here to specify the Fortran expression c for user specified components you specify the name of the library file in the nclude field If Send parameters option is selected the Internal phase seq controls how the node names are passed Le unselect this option if your library file expects 5 character 3 phase node names If the library file name does not include a path the file 1s expected to exist in the USP folder 4 6 Node dialog box In the Node data dialog box you specify data for a single component node Input text in this dialog boxes should contain only ASCII characters but characters like etc should not be used Avoid using space in the node name and lower case letters as well The user does not need to give names to all nodes in general The name of the nodes without special interest are recommended to be left unspecified and allow ATPDraw to give a unique name to these nodes The node dots given a name by the program are drawn in red while those whose names were specified by the user are drawn with black color There are four different kinds of nodes each treated slightly different in this dialog box Node data EI OUTI SUPL T Ground Help Display 4 Usertiamed Phase sequence ABC 1 Standard and user specified nodes 2 MODELS object nodes 3 TACS object nodes 4 TACS controlled machine nodes Fig 4 46 Node dialog
194. er DFLT 0 INIT trips 0 tfire 0 ENDINIT EXEC vcap V1 V2 power vcap iczn energy INTEGRAL power IF trip gt 0 AND t tiire gt rdur e 3 is already firing has exceeded firing duration THEN trip 0 cancel the firing signal tfire 0 null the firing time ENDIF IF trip 0 18 not Signaling to Z re AND tfire 0 firing condition not yet detected AND power gt Pset 1 e9 power setting exceeded OR energy gt Eset 1 e6 energy setting exceeded THEN tfire t set the firing detection time ENDIF IF trip 0 1S NOt Signaling to fire 149 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Advanced Manual AND tfire gt 0 firing condition has been detected AND tT tiire gt rdel 1 e 3 firing delay exceeded THEN Eresch set the firing signal ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL The model file must be given a name with extension mod and be stored in the MOD folder In this example the name FLASH 1 MOD has been chosen The name of the disk file must be equal to the name of the model given in the first line of the model description 5 5 2 Creating anew MODELS object An ATPDraw object consists of a file on disk which is called support file with extension sup Each model must have a support file in order to be used in ATPDraw A support file is standard for all components in ATPDraw and contains the icon information on node types and position and on data parameters There are two options for crea
195. er specified base voltage multiplied with 2 n All phase conductors of other phases are open Mutual zero sequence impedance real and imaginary part Zoo Roo J Xoo Each phase of the i circuit is connected to a 1 A amplitude current source with zero phase angle The receiving end of the circuits i and j is grounded The j circuit is short circuited and open in the sending end Zoo is calculated as the voltage at the sending end of the j circuit The process is repeated for all circuits All phase conductors of phases not belonging to the i and j circuit are open ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 239 SINTEF ee 7 3 References 1 ATPDRAW version 3 User Manual TR A4389 EFI Norway 1996 2 Ned Mohan Computer Exercises for Power Electronic Education 1990 Department of Electrical Engineering University of Minnesota 3 ATP EMTP Rule Book Canadian American EMTP Users Group 1997 4 Lauren Dube MODELS in ATP Language manual February 1996 5 H W Dommel Electromagnetic Transients Program Reference Manual EMTP Theory Book Bonneville Power Administration Portland 1986 6 L Prikler Main Characteristics of Plotting Programs for ATP EEUG News Vol 6 No 3 4 August November 2000 pp 28 33 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 241 SINTEF 7 4 Index EE 99 SPARAMETER ccc eeeeccccceessseeeees 75 135 EE 98 A EEN 44 ADF TANS seer ctesteud E 14 Alternative Transients Program 10
196. ere it Select can be edited with some limitation Unselect Edit Circuit Displays the circuit to which the current group belongs Compress Actually the grouping structure can be taken as a multi layer Extract circuit where the Edit Group brings the user one step down in Edit Group details while Edit Circuit brings one step back Edit Circuit Fig 4 41 Available options in the Shortcut menu 4 4 Component selection menu The Component selection menu provides options for inserting new components into the circuit window This menu is normally hidden To open it you must click on the right mouse button in an empty area of the circuit window The component selection menu collects all the available circuit objects of ATPDraw in a structured way as shown in Fig 4 42 After selecting a component in one of the floating menus the selected object is drawn in the circuit window Frobes amp 3 phase The upper section of the menu provide access to the probe splitter and transposition and reference objects Branch Linear Resistor Branch Nonlinear gt Capacitor the next four to many standard ATP components linear Lines Cables Inductor and nonlinear elements lines and cables switches TER R sources electrical machines and transformers The next RLC 3 ph section is dedicated for MODELS and TACS GE GU 3 ph components User specified objects and Frequency a RLC D spn dependent components for Harmonic Frequency Scan Transform
197. ers C Um HFS studies are accessible in the next group The MODELS L IO lowermost section lists all the supported components in a TACS scrollable menu where any object can be selected upon User Specified P its support file name Frequency comp standard Component Fig 4 42 Component selection menu 96 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 5 Component dialog box After selecting a component in the Component selection menu the new circuit object appears in the middle of the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button to move or the right button to rotate finally click in the open space to unselect and place the object The Component dialog box appears when you click the right mouse button on a circuit object or double click with the left mouse Assuming you have clicked on the icon of an RLC element a dialog box shown in Fig 4 43 appears These dialog boxes have the same layout for all circuit objects except probes which can be edited from the Probe dialog box Component RLC SUP x Node nanes Attributes Data values 1 SE Label on screen Group a Comment in the ATP file Group Mo Label ALC i Not written to Ee Comment Single phase RLC branch ee a outpu d en Output Hide A High low 1 Current P Lock precision ATP Local icon of CG gvi input data the object vintage editable Displays the help text of the RLC OK Cancel Help
198. esentation of the pre simulation value of its inputs and variables as functions of time Dynamically controlled modification of the values of the inputs and variables of a model during the course of a simulation Dynamically controlled modification of the structure of a model both topological composition and algorithmic flow during the course of a simulation The new MODELS object created in this chapter is part of the ATPDraw s example file Exa 8 adp This example is taken from ATP s benchmark file DC68 DAT subcase 7 The data case 1S a series compensated 500 kV interconnection ZnO arresters protect the series capacitors and the energy dissipation of arresters 1s continuously monitored by a MODELS object If certain power or energy limits are exceeded the series capacitor is bypassed through TACS MODELS controlled switches to avoid arrester overheating The complete model is described in the Application part of this Manual 148 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ATPDraw supports only a simplified usage of MODELS In general ATPDraw takes care of the interface between MODELS and the electrical circuit INPUT and OUTPUT of the MODELS section and the execution of each model USE Creating a new Model in ATPDraw normally consists of two steps Advanced Manual 3 To create a model file mod containing the actual model description 4 To load this file into the circuit via the MODELS Files sup mod sub menu of the
199. etafile formats The Verify button of the LCC dialog box helps the user to get an overview of the performance of the model in the frequency domain This feature is described separately in sub section 5 4 When creating a Noda line cable model the Armafit program is executed automatically to create the required lib file The Armafit command is specified under Tools Options Preferences The batch file runAF bat 1s distributed with ATPDraw The Noda line cable data format does not allow the full path of the lib file to be written in the ATP file As a result the alc file should be stored in the same directory as the atp file or the 1ib file should be moved to this directory manually For all other line cable models the Prefix Suffix option must be turned off or the lib files moved to the USP folder ATPDraw supports all the various electrical models Bergeron KCLee and Clarke PI equivalents JMarti Noda and Semlyen It is straightforward to switch between different models Under System type the user can select between Overhead Line and Single Core Cable or Enclosing Pipe In the Line Cable dialog the user can select between System type Model Type Overhead Line LINE CONSTANTS Bergeron Constant parameter KCLee or Clark Single Core Cables PI Nominal PI equivalent short lines CABLE PARAMETERS or JMarti Frequency dependent model with constant CABLE CONSTANTS transformation matrix Enclosing Pipe Noda Frequency dependent m
200. ey do not affect the ATP file however The example is taken from exercise 46 in 2 The ATPDraw constructed circuit is shown in Fig 6 4 b TACS Ny Modulation il TACS controlled pulse width modulated sources Type 60 f91 2 V peak to peak Moment of inertia J 5kg nt Viscous damping D 0 075 Nmrad s Moment T 374 03889 Nm Fig 6 4 a Induction machine TACS 180 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual PULS rs He SQPUL WDELTA Be 3 ae Ed e ACC AMPL SS Orr BUSMG BUSMS TE IS Torque Fig 6 4 b ATPDraw scheme of the induction machine example Exa_ 4 adp The TACS part of the circuit controls three sources producing a pulse width modulated armature voltage The TACS objects FORTRAN is referenced in the Reference part of this Manual The input window of the TACS object at the end of the TACS chain 1s shown in Fig 6 5 This TACS object creates the armature voltage in phase 4 of the 3 phase node H TACS FORTRANI EI Attributes NODE PHASE MAME Group No o Label Comment FORTRAN l Hide OUT 2 0 SIGA 1 OfvD 2 0 Of baal dn OK Cancel Help Fig 6 5 TACS Fortran input window In the TACS statement the user must type in the expression s Only single phase TACS Fortran objects are supported The two blue info arrows into this TACS object serve as visualization of the SIGA from node SIGA and VD signals ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 18
201. f 182 841 Amp Cancel D DI d L RESISTOR ACIPH zl Nonlinearity Modes Available Added to group MHEG Position Di i 1i d 1 E d 3 3 7 4 5 Fig 5 6 Selection of data values and external nodes for the mechanical load group Attributes DATA VALUE MODE PHASE MAME RES 13 33 Pees ic 374 03864 5000000 182 040692 Group Mo fo Label Comment l Hide Ep Lock Ok Cancel Help Fig 5 7 Component dialog box of the mechanical load group object To view edit a group the user must first select it and then click Edit Edit Group in the main menu or Cirl G The group is then extracted on the current circuit window Actually the grouping structure can be taken as a multi layer circuit where the Edit Group brings the user one step down in details while the Edit Circuit brings him one step back The group is editable in normal way but the user can t delete components with reference nodes or data in the mother group Le components having been referenced in one of the Added to group lists cannot be deleted If the user attempts to do so a Marked objects are referenced by compressed group warning message reminds him that the operation is not allowed Selecting the main menu Edit Edit Circuit or short key Ctri H will close the group edit window It is possible with several levels of groups in the circuit The maximum number of group le
202. f ATP and contains a header describing the positions of the parameters further the ATP cards and finally a trailer containing the specification of the parameters The library file is included in the ATP input file with Include The line cable components also have a library file created by ATPDraw Some nonlinear components or saturable transformers might also have an include file for the nonlinear characteristic 2 5 1 Organizing the files When ATPDraw opens a project the included files are stored on disk preferable where they were located when the project was stored or if this directory does not exists in the default directories specified under Tools Options Directories In both cases existing files are not overwritten without noticing the user The time stamp of the disk file and the file in the project 1s compared and a warning like File on disk is older newer than the stored project file will appear It is important that the user replies to these messages carefully To avoid conflicts the user is advised not to use the same name for several different user created models When the project is stored the disk files are not deleted except for group support files Thus as times goes by the number of files on disk grows It is the user s responsibility to tidy up the directories Remember All required files are stored in the project and only the files you modify yourself outside a project need to be kept All other files sup lib mod alc b
203. feature in ATP that allows the user to assign text variables to data and declare these variables for the whole data case later This feature is particularly useful when a data value is used several times in the circuit Earlier the user had to open all dialog boxes of the involved components in such cases This was time consuming and might lead to errors if the user forgets to change values of some components Since version 3 1 of ATPDraw the user is also free to assign a 6 or less characters text string or variable to most data for standard components instead of a data value in the component dialog box This is permitted as long as the parameter option is set in the support file When specifying the data variable the user does not have to think about the number of allowed characters in the ATP file ATPDraw will add underscore characters to fill the maximum number of characters Values can later be assigned to these variables and this is written to the ATP input file within a SPARAME TER BLANK block A typical example is shown in Fig 5 12 This is a single phase rectifying bridge distributed with ATPDraw as Exa_1 adp It consists of 4 diodes with snubber circuits The RC values of these snubbers are identical for all diodes in the practice and can be specified with text variables RES and CAP respectively When the user specifies a variable name for the first time a message box appears and the user is requested to confirm the operation before the new e
204. ft mouse button on the object while you move the mouse Release the button and click in an empty space to unselect and confirm its new position The object is then moved to the nearest grid point known as gridsnapping If two or more components overlap as a consequence of a move operation you are given a warning and can choose to cancel the un selection If you select a single component and press the Crtl F1 key combination component specific help is displayed Selecting a group of objects for moving can be done in three ways If you hold down the Shift key while you left click an object you add it to the selected objects group Pressing and holding down the left mouse button in an empty space enables you to drag a rectangular outline around the objects you want selected And finally if you double click the left mouse button in an empty space you can define a polygon shaped region by repeatedly clicking the left mouse button in the circuit window To close the region click the right mouse button on the last polygon point you want to set Objects that are defined to fall within the indicated region or rectangle are added to the selected objects group For components this means that the center point of a component icon must lie within the defined region or rectangle For connections and relations the region or rectangle must surround both end points To move the selected group of objects press and hold down the left mouse button inside the group wh
205. h type setting Node SW P Start node of switch SW T End node of switch REF F Start node of the MASTER switch REF T End node of the MASTER switch SW SYST Systematic switch Tbeg When ITEST 1 ATP Settings Switch UM Tmid When ITEST 0 ATP Settings Switch UM Tdelay For SLAVE switches If ITEST 0 T Tmid INCT Size of time increment in sec NSTEP Number of time increments Switch type INDEPENDENT Two nodes MASTER Two nodes TARGET punched SLAVE Four nodes Specify node names of MASTER switch The icon and nodes of the objects adapt the switch type setting Node OW Start node Of switch OW E End node of Switch REF F Start node of the MASTER switch REF T End node of the MASTER Switch 5 7 4 Harmonic source The component dialog box of the Harmonic source that 1s used in HES studies deviates somewhat from the standard source dialog box layout as shown in Fig 4 71 Selecting HFS under ATP Settings Simulation the ATP will run the case so many times as specified in the Harmonic source component dialog box The frequency of the harmonic source will for each ATP run be incremented The user selects the source type by the Voltage or Current radio button In the example shown here the data case will run 5 times because the F n column has 5 harmonics entered z Fig 5 47 Harmonic source dialog box The base frequency here is the Freg value specified under ATP Settings Simulati
206. hase only E Le The present node names of the transformer component in ATPDraw BUS6 taking the connection and Phase shift deg into account Renaming the nodes will require a new BCTRAN execution performed automatically upon ATP Run ATP or Make File 3 Short circuit test data Specified under Factory test Short circuit The data required by BCTRAN are Pig Loss kW under Short circuit Positive sequence ZPOS1J Imp under Short circuit Positive sequence SPOS Pow MVA under Short circuit Positive sequence ZZEROij Imp under Short circuit Zero sequence SZERO Pow MVA under Short circuit Zero sequence ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 157 SINTEF Advanced Manual The short circuit input data can be derived from the factory test reports as shown next ZPOSij Usi Isi SPOS Vri 2 100 for single phase ZPOSijJ Ush V3 Ish SPOS Vri 100 for 3 phase where Usi kV short circuit voltage at winding i Isi kA nominal current at winding i SPOS MVA power base Vri kV rated line voltage at winding 1 ZZEROij 0 for single phase ZZEROIJ Ush Ish SZERO Vri 300 for 3 phase where SZERO MVA power base Zero segquence tests must be performed with open Delta windings The BCTRAN component 1s found under Transformers BCTRAN in the component selection menu and it can be edited and connected to the main circuit as any other component ek The default icon is shown left The nodes appear automatical
207. have a Characteristic page too as shown in Fig 4 44 Component Mov sup Ei Attributes Characteristic Arrester Data File incluce Browse T Include characteristic Daye Copy Paste View OF Cancel Help Fig 4 44 The Characteristic page of non linear components On the Characteristic tab of the dialog box you define the input characteristic for non linear components Data pairs can be specified in a standard string grid To add new points after the cursor position click on Add Delete the marked point by clicking on Delete You can manipulate 98 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual the order of points by the Sort button the characteristic for non linear components is automatically sorted after increasing x values starting with the lowest number or the and db arrows The user can edit the data points directly any time It is possible the export the characteristic to an external file or to the Windows clipboard as text The whole characteristic is copied no marking 1s supported or required You can also paste a characteristic from the clipboard It is thus possible to bring an old atp file up in a text editor mark the characteristic the flag 9999 is optional and copy it to the clipboard then paste it into the characteristic page The number of points will automatically be adjusted the pasted characteristic could be truncated to ensure that the number of da
208. he Compress dialog box the user can specify the data parameters and the nodes for the new group object The selected data and nodes appear as input to the group and their original values are automatically transferred ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 129 SINTEF Advanced Manual Compress Group Data Available Added to group Nonlinearity Nodes Available Added to group SOURCE PULS DI STEEN K wll a Fig 5 2 The new Compress dialog window Compress Group Objects Data Avallable Added to group ff Cancel d TACSSOUR fu TACSSOUR f Ai TACSSOUR 2 FORTRANT 1 FPIJLSE_03 FORTRAN 7 2 FORTRAN 3 FORTRAN 4 DEVICERS AC Oe fl AC Oe f 2 AC Oe fa FORTRAN 5 FORTRAN 6 FORTRAN 7 FORTRAN 5 FORTRAN 4 FORTRAN a FORTRANT a Nonlinearity Nodes Available Added to group OTA 7 OUTE Fosition OUT GL 1 3 d Ce 3 H a la Fig 5 3 Name and position of the external nodes of the group To the left under Objects all components in the group are listed with their name support file followed by and the label specified by the user in the component dialog box or by an alpha numeric identifier if the label was not specified by the user When the user clicks on one of the component s name under Objects its data and nodes appears under Available starting with data node name and followed by their names and values Th
209. he Label input text field is written on the screen and into the project file too The visibility of the component label is controlled by the Labels option in the View Options dialog box The label is movable on the screen The component dialog box has a Comment input text field If you specify a text in this field it will be written to the ATP file as a comment e as a comment line before the data of the object Many standard component such as branches non linear switches and transformers contains an Output section for setting the branch output request in a combo box Possible values are Current Voltage Current amp Voltage Power amp Energy or none Like the Group No Label and Comment fields the Hide and Lock buttons are common to all components Hidden components are not included in the ATP file and are displayed as light gray icons in the circuit window The Lock option is not implemented in this version Locked components are meant to have fixed positions and not subject for customization All components where the high precision format is available has a Vintage 1 check button in the component dialog box It is thus possible to control the precision format for each individual component Selecting Force high resolution under the ATP Settings Format page will overrule the individual setting and force Vintage 1 for all components if possible The non linear components non linear branches saturable transformers and TACS Device 56
210. he general structure of the MODELS section in an atp input file is shown below MODELS MODELS INPUT TXO001 v CR30A IX0002 v CR2Z0A TX0003 1 CRZ2A OUTPUT GAPA MODEL FLASH 1 Description of the model Complete copy of the FLASH A ME 1S pasted here ENDMODEL USE FLASH 1 AS FLASH 1 INPUT Vl IxX0001 V2 IxX0002 Z Se IX0003 DATA EE Res fdel Laur OUTPUT GAPA trip ENDUSE ENDMODELS O A OF 152 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Advanced Manual Attributes DATA VALUE MODE PHASE MAME Pset 1 vi jo CRIDA a Eset 9 We CR20A idel d ICZM o CRZ2A fdur Fall trip GAFA Group Mo fo Label Comment Models l Hide Model file D ATPDRAW3 MOD Browse Use As FLASH 1 F Lock intage 1 OF Cancel Help Fig 5 37 Component dialog box of the FLASH 1 model object 5 5 2 2 Automatic operation Version 3 of ATPDraw for Windows is capable of reading the mod file directly examine its INPUT OUTPUT and DATA variables and suggest a support file on the correct format Either a comma or CR LF is accepted as separator characters between variables by ATPDraw Comment flags C in column 1 and are also handled Maximum 12 input output variables are allowed along with 36 data variables Only single variables are allowed not indexed Information x The automatic sup file creation procedure can be vee activated by selecting the M
211. he help topic related to the options on the current page Note that if no initialization file exists ATPDraw will create a new file in its installation directory when the user selects the Save button or the Save Options in the Tools menu ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 89 I NT EF Reference Manual Preferences On the Preferences page the user can set the size of undo redo buffers specify the default text editor and command files to execute ATP EMTP TPBIG EXE and Armafit programs Preferences Undo reda Buffers 10 Colors Background window sl Custom Frograms Text editor Jnotepad exe Browse ATF D ATPDraw3 runATP_G bat Browse Armafit JD ATPDraw3 runAF bat Browse Fig 4 34 Customizable program options on the Preferences page Option Undo redo buffers Background co Lor Text editor program ATP 90 Description Specifies the number of undo and redo buffers to allocate for each circuit window Changing this option does not affect the currently open circuit windows only new windows will make use the specified value Almost all object manipulation functions object create delete move rotate etc can be undone or redone These functions also update the circuit s modified state to indicate that the circuit needs saving During an undo operation the modified state is reset its previous value so if you undo the very first edit ope
212. he model A mod file e g D ATPDraw3 Mod Flash 1 mod is pasted here ENDMODEL USE FLASH 1 AS FLASH 1 INPUT Vl IX0001 V2 IX0002 iczn IX0003 DATA Pset la Eset ERR fdel 5a fdur Sekt OUTPUT TRIP At Cr1p ENDUSE ENDMODELS MODEL FLASH_1 wl Attributes MODE PHASE NAME vi i KUT ZNO Ve 1 We NO Cp NO trip 1 TRIP_A Group No fo Label Comment Models l Hide Model file D ATPDraw3 Mod F I Browse Use As IFLASH1 F Lock OK Cancel Help Fig 4 64 The component dialog box of model object FLASH 1 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 117 I NT EF Reference Manual Type 94 I phase 3 phase Selecting MODELS Type 941 1 3 phase in the component selection menu performs an Open Model dialog box where the user can choose a Type 94 compatible mod file These files are normally stored under the MOD folder Depending on the selected phase ATPDraw associates the corresponding Type 94 sup file with the model then interprets the number of input data as shown in Fig 4 65 Information Ei Model successtully identified Number of data 1 Cancel The Component dialog box of Type 94 model objects has a new input section Type 94 besides the DATA and NODES attributes see on Fig 4 66 This new section has three input fields THEY ITER and NORT to specify the solution method for ATP when interfacing the Type 94 object with the rest of the e
213. he name of data need not be equal to the names used in the DBM punch file but the sequence of data must be the same as on the ARG and NUM card s After specifying data properties click on the Node tab and set the node control parameters as shown in Fig 5 48 The Name of nodes the number of Phases 1 3 and the node position on the icon border 1 12 are to be given here Codes for the available node positions are shown in the icon at right Kind 1s not used here It must be left unity default for all nodes The name of the nodes need not be identical with the names used in the DBM file but the node sequence must be the same as on the ARG card Edit D varroe wl Standard data IT High precision M Output enable M Nonlinear Type UserSpe sl Mum Data E Mum Node 5 Angle 10 2 2500 0 01 i 11 1 HUDE P Dee Save AS Exit Help Fig 5 48 Properties of the new HVDC 6 object ATPDraw writes all three names of a 3 phase node in the STINCLUDE statement In this example only the core name of the 3 phase node is expected on the argument list because the phase identifiers A B C are added internally in the DBM file This option requires the nternal phase seq checked box be selected in the component dialog box of the HVDC_6 object as shown in Fig 5 51 If it 1s selected ATPDraw writes only the 5 character long core names in the SINCLUDE statement and let the extensions A B and C be added inside the D
214. he standard data parameter Freq init up to an upper frequency limit specified by the number of Decades with the resolution of Points Dec The model needs a frequency Freq veloc where the wave velocities of the natural modes of propagation are calculated A value higher than the highest frequency of the frequency scan is usually appropriate The Noda model needs in some cases modification of the default fitting data under the optional Model fitting data field that can be made visible by unselecting the Use default fitting check box For further details please read in the ATP Rule Book 3 e Model fiting data Decades Points Dec i Pl C JMam Freq veloc Hz ong M Use default fiting Ge Noda C Semlyen Fig 5 21 Parameter settings for the Noda line model Semlyen The Semlyen line model is frequency dependent simple fitted model Fitting range begins at the standard data parameter Freq init and runs up to an upper frequency limit specified by the parameter number of Decades The model also requires a frequency Freq matrix where the transformation matrix is calculated and a steady state frequency Freq SS for calculation of 140 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel the steady state condition Freq matrix parameter should be selected according to the dominant frequency component of the transient study The Semlyen model needs in some cases modification of the default fitting data under the op
215. his editor In that case the text buffer will initially be empty 4 2 4 4 Edit LIS file This selection calls the built in text editor which enables the user to contemplate the LUNIT6 output of ATP often called as LIS file This file has extension lis and can be found in the ATP system folder following a successful simulation In certain cases when the simulation is halted by an operating system interrupt or a fatal error in the ATP input file e g division by zero or I O xx bad character in input field the LIS file does not exist and can not be displayed either ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 Uf I NT EF Reference Manual 4 2 4 5 Make File As Generates an ATP input file for the active circuit window User will be asked to confirm the name of the file Default filename is the same as that of the circuit file but with extension atp ATPDraw first calls the Make Names procedure then generates an ATP input file on the form specified in the Settings menu 4 2 4 6 Make Names When this field is selected ATPDraw examines the current circuit and gives unique names to all nodes left blank in the active circuit window Connected or overlapped nodes are given the same name Whenever a same name on different nodes or duplicate names for nodes connected by short circuit were to be found ATPDraw produces a warning and the user is asked to confirm this operation While ATPDraw establishes the node names a Generating node names message
216. hown in Fig 6 16 Wave imp Fig 6 16 JMarti line in switching study Exa_7 adp The overhead in this example is a 138 miles long single circuit 500 kV line from John Day to Lower Monumental in Oregon USA with two sky wires taken from ATP benchmark DCN3 DAT The line configuration is given in Fig 6 17 190 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual The line parameters are given in English units the phase wires are represented by a tubular conductor with parameters DC resistance 0 05215 Q mile Outside diameter of the conductor 1 602 inch Inner radius of the tube 0 2178 inch ATPDraw calculates the thickness diameter value internally T D 0 364 The sky wires are solid so inner radius 1s zero and T D 0 5 Other parameters are DC resistance 2 61 Q mile Outside diameter of the conductor 0 386 inch The resistivity of the soil equals to 100 Qm The conductor separation in the bundle is 18 inch 12 9 feet 20 feet 98 5 feet 77 5 feet wem 7 18 inch lt _ 50 feet ee Ge Fig 6 17 Line configuration The geometrical and material data of the system can be specified in a notebook style Line Cable Data window This window appears when you click on the LCC object with the right mouse button The case Exa_7 adp requires a 3 phase un transposed frequency dependent line model with segmented sky wires The JMarti line model is fitted in a frequency domain
217. ht mouse in the open area of the Circuit window Fig 3 1 shows the main window of ATPDraw containing two open circuit windows ATPDraw supports multiple documents and offers the user to work on several circuits simultaneously along with the facility to copy information between the circuits The size of the circuit window is much larger than the actual screen as is indicated by the scroll bars of each circuit window The Main window consists of the following parts ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 33 SINTEF ae Header Frame As a standard Windows element it contains the system menu on the left side a header text and minimize maximize exit buttons on the right side The main window 1s resizable System menu Contains possible window actions Close Resize Restore Move Minimize Maximize or Resize and Next The last one exists only if multiple circuit windows are open Header text The header text is the program name in case of the main window and the current circuit file name in case of the circuit window s To move a window click in the header text field hold down and drag Minimize button A click on this button will iconize the main window Maximize button A click on this button will maximize the window The maximize button will then be replaced with a resize button One more click on this button will bring the window back to its previous size Corners Click on the corner hold down and drag to resize the window Main
218. ical parameters are part of the printout file 1is The power frequency calculations give in principle the short circuit impedances and the open circuit reactive power The line cable may be a single circuit component with an arbitrary number of phases or a multi circuit component where all circuits normally are three phase The following parameters are calculated for a single circuit in a line cable with n conductors a Short circuit impedances All terminals at one end of the line cable are connected to ground A positive sequence symmetrical voltage is applied to the terminals at the other end and the positive sequence impedance 1s calculated E ES d The voltage applied to the terminal us E E exp j 2n i 1 n where n is the number of phases in the circuit The positive sequence current is obtained from the terminal currents by the formula I bh I exp j2n n J7 exp j2n i 1 n 1 exp j2n n The zero sequence impedance is calculated in a similar way Zo Eo Io The voltage Eo here is applied to all terminals and Jp is the average current supplied by the source b Open circuit reactive power All terminals at one end of the component are open except the conductors which are specified to be grounded A positive sequence symmetrical voltage is applied to the terminals at the other end and the positive sequence current component is calculated by the same formula as for the positive sequence impedance The posi
219. ich GE a short description of parameters and a reference to the corresponding ATP Rule H Book chapter is given As an example Fig 4 52 shows the help information SE associated with the ordinary RLC branch RLC 3 ph RLC Y 3 ph RLC D 3 ph CU KO Fig 4 51 Supported linear branch elements Resistor RESISTOR BRANCH Pure resistance in Q type 0 Capacitor BRANCH Capacitor with damping resistor type 0 C in uF if Copt 0 EE BRANCH Inductor with damping resistor type 0 Inductance in mH if Xopt 0 BRANCH R L and C in series type 0 RLC 3 ph RLC3 BRANCH 3 phase R L and C in series type 0 Independent values in phases RLC Y 3 ph RLCY3 BRANCH 3 phase R L and C Y coupling type 0 Independent values in phases RLC D 3 ph RLCD3 BRANCH 3 phase R L and C D coupling type 0 Independent values in phases In BRANCH Capacitor with initial condition C UM CAP UO cm a E iit oandtion condition L 10 IND I0 70 BRANCH i Inductor with initial condition initial condition Help viewer File Edit Character Help RLC BRANCH Resistance in branch in ohm L Inductance in mH if Xopt 0 Inductance in Ohm 1f Aopt power frequency C Capacitance in uF 1f Copt 0 Capacitance in uMho if Copt power frequency Sopt and Copt is set in menu ATP settings Simulation Node From start node of RLC branch To End node of RLC branch RuleBook IV A Fig 4 52 Help information associated with the series RLC objec
220. ig 3 6 should be placed so that the node of the inductor touches the source Objects having overlapping node dots will automatically be connected The next figure shows a situation where the inductor has been misplaced In this situation the objects are disconnected To correct this a connection could be drawn between the objects as will be explained later In this example you are supposed to place the inductor so that its left node 40 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF gegen overlaps the AC source node To move the inductor follow the instructions given in Fig 3 7 Click on the object with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to HAH the proper position then click on white space Fig 3 7 Error When you have placed the inductor you can add the damping resistance really directly included from version 3 2 After you have clicked in the Resistor field of the component selection menu a resistor 1con appears enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 3 8 Click in open space to place unselect it This resistor 1s supposed to be parallel with the inductor and connections which ensure this will be drawn later The resistor in Fig 3 8 would also be recognized as in parallel with the inductor if it had been placed in a position l completely overlapping the inductor This tricky way is not recommended however since the readability of the drawing
221. ig 6 1 b the object dialog box shown in Fig 6 3 appears where you can enter the above R L C matrix data The imaginary part of the line impedance may be specified in Q as well In that case the Kont parameter under ATP Settings Simulation must be set equal to the frequency at which the impedances were calculated e g Xopt should be set 5 kHz in this example 178 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF PEETER Component Linepi_3 sup Attributes Group Mo fo Label og Dy Comment T Hide M Lock IT intage 1 Fig 6 3 Three phase pi equivalent input window The ATP input file created by ATPDraw and the simulated voltages at the 500 kV bus at the sending and at the receiving end of the line are shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW June Sunday 30 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 C See EE EE a Et EE Se EE eg EE SE Ee C dT gt x Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copr gt 1 E 5 3 500 5 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH Cx n Lee n 2o lt rerl gt lt rer2 gt lt R XK L e E gt Cxi 1l gt lt n lt ref larei R o lt A w B Sxheng gt lt gt lt gt 0 1 BEGA ENDA 474 76 288 82 3224 2 BEGB ENDB S52 el 71350 G43 Ee GGs loaa 3 BEGC ENDC AAD 02 134455002 13353261 F1135 0s3644744 76 286 602 3224 51X0003ABUSA WE 8 98
222. ile you move the mouse You unselect and confirm the new position by clicking in an empty space Any overlapping components will produce a warning 94 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual To move objects outside the visible part of the circuit use the window scrollbars or the view rectangle in the map window Any selected object or group will follow the window to its new position You rotate objects by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected object or group Other object manipulation functions such as undo redo and clipboard options are found in the edit menu However the most frequently used object manipulation functions can be accessed by holding down the Shift key while clicking with the right mouse button on an object or a selected group of objects This will display and activate the circuit window shortcut menu Components and component nodes can be opened for editing If you right click or double click an unselected component or node either the Component Open Probe or Open Node dialog box will show allowing you to change component or node attributes and characteristics If you double click in a selected group of objects the Open Group dialog box will show allowing you to change attributes common to all components in that group such as group number and hide and lock state Default component attributes are stored in support files Access to create and customize support files is provided by the ob
223. in harmonic analysis using harmonic current injection method HARMONIC FREQUENCY SCAN Source WWW EMTP ORG 10 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 Ce SINTEF stones and calculation of the frequency response of phasor networks using FREQUENCY SCAN feature is also supported The model library of ATP at present consists of the following components Uncoupled and coupled linear lumped R L C elements Transmission lines and cables with distributed and frequency dependent parameters Nonlinear resistances and inductances hysteretic inductor time varying resistance TACS MODELS controlled resistance Components with nonlinearities transformers including saturation and hysteresis surge arresters gapless and with gap arcs Ordinary switches time dependent and voltage dependent switches statistical switching Monte Carlo studies Valves diodes thyristors triacs TACS MODELS controlled switches Analytical sources step ramp sinusoidal exponential surge functions TACS MODELS defined sources Rotating machines 3 phase synchronous machine universal machine model User defined electrical components that include MODELS interaction 1 3 1 Integrated simulation modules in ATP MODELS in ATP is a general purpose description language supported by an extensive set of simulation tools for the representation and study of time variant systems The description of each model is enabled using free format keyword dr
224. ion drawing when the TACS Draw relation was selected in the component selection menu Clicking the left mouse button on a component node or on the end point of another relation will initiate the drawing of a new relation Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements and are drawn as blue connections but do not influence the connectivity of components INFO END Indicates the end of a relation The program is waiting for a left mouse click to set the end point of a new relation To cancel drawing a relation click the right mouse button or press the Esc key ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 67 I NT EF Reference Manual The field to the right of the mode field displays the modified status of the active circuit As soon as you alter the circuit moving a label deleting a connection inserting a new component etc the text Modified will show up to indicate that the circuit needs saving The field will be empty when you save the circuit or undo all modifications Note that the number of available undo buffers is limited default value is 10 but can be increased on the Preferences tab of the Tools Options menu In the default case if more than 10 modifications are done the field will indicate a modified status until you save the circuit The rightmost field of the status bar displays the menu option hints 4 2 3 3 Comment Line Shows or hides the comment line at the bottom of the active circuit window
225. is displayed in the middle of the current circuit window Following Make Names the node name and phase sequence attributes in the Component dialog box and in the Node data window will be updated IMPORTANT All nodes will automatically receive names from ATPDraw so the user should normally only give names to nodes of special interest e g a node which appears on the OUTPUT list is preferred to have a user specified name 4 2 4 7 Edit Commands This feature enables to specify executable files exe or bat to run from the ATP menu New commands will appear as menu items below the Edit Commands After clicking on the New button of the dialog box as shown in Fig 4 24 the user is requested to specify e the Name of the command displayed under the ATP menu Run Plats a ae D New e name and path of the executable file exe or bat Gah e it Delete e Parameter is the file to send as parameter when Ga SC calling the executable file a Bee None No file sent as parameter GE Ess File A file open dialog box is displayed where the user can select a file Current ATP send the current ATP file Current PL4 send the current PL4 file Name l l Pun my program Parameter options can be selected by radio buttons If 3 the File is selected ATPDraw performs an open dialog UTTUTTIOTIO box where the user can select a file name to be sent as c program mybat bat parameter when executing the batch file f Browse Upda
226. is strongly reduced Fig 3 8 We want to measure the source current flowing into the diode bridge To be able to do so you can add a measuring switch A special multi phase current probe is available for such measurements in ATPDraw When using this object you are requested to specify the number of phases and in which phases the current should be measured Select the probe as shown in Fig 3 9 Probes amp 3 phase Probe Wolt l Probe Branch volt Branch Linear ee eee Branch Nonlinear Unie Sih one S Probe Tacs Line Lumped Line Distributed splitter Fig 3 9 Selecting a current measuring probe After you have clicked in the Probe Curr field the selected probe A appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in the figure then place it At this stage of the building process it is time to draw some connections in the circuit diagram To draw a connection you just click the left mouse button on a node release the button and move the mouse The cursor style now changes to a pointing hand and a line 1s drawn between the starting position and the current mouse position the action mode now is MODE CONN END indicating that the program is waiting for the end point of the connection Click with the left mouse button again to place the connection or click with the right button to cancel the starting point Two connection drawings
227. is window appears if you select the Simulation tab of the ATP Settings menu ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 49 SINTEF ATP Settings Ei simulation Output Switch UM Format Record Variables simulation type delta T 5E 5 Tmax or opt fo Copt fo Ge Time domain C Frequency scan C Harmonic HFS Power Frequency Introductory Manual Select e Time step delta T in sec e End time of simulation Tmax in Sec e Xopt 0 Inductance in mH e Copt 0 Capacitance in uF mikro F The mam characteristic of the simulation time domain or frequency scan can also be set on this page Press Help to get more information or OK to close the dialog box The simulation settings are stored in the project file so you should save the file after changing these settings Fig 3 30 Simulation settings Values on the first integer miscellaneous data card of ATP can be changed under the ATP Settings Output page The next ATP Settings Switch UM tab is the home of control flags required by statistical switching or universal machine simulations ATP Settings Ei Simulation Output Switch Uh Format Record Variables sorting T Sorting by group number M Sorting by cards F Sorting by tpos Force high resolution Miscellaneous reques IT Insert Exact Phasor Equivalent card IT Insert TACS HYBRID card ke Printed Humber vvicth TT Insert Pretix and S
228. ith the right mouse button on the capacitor and specify the parameters shown in Fig 3 25 Component Cap_ul sup x Attributes MEG 1 Group Mo fo Label Comment Output Bice f Current Voltage e M Lock IT vinage Uto H OF Cancel Help Fig 3 25 Capacitor data with initial condition The capacitance is 1000 uF Gf Copt 0 in ATP Setting Simulation The positive node has an initial voltage of 75 V and the negative 75 V Both branch current and voltage will be calculated so the Current amp Voltage is selected in the Output combo box Following the branch output request the appearance of the object s icon will change if the Show branch output is checked under View Option If this option is enabled a small eg symbol appears on the top left side of the capacitor indicating the branch voltage and the current output requests see Fig 3 29 Next click with the right mouse button on the load resistor to get the input window and specify the load resistance of 20 Q Branch current and voltages will be calculated so the small symbol appears again on the top left side of the resistor after leaving the dialog box Once all the entries in ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 47 SINTEF pienso ines the component dialog box are completed select the OK button to close the window and update the object values or click Help to obtain an on line help 3 5 1 5 Node names and groun
229. iven syntax of local context and that is largely self documenting MODELS in ATP allows the description of arbitrary user defined control and circuit components providing a simple interface for connecting other programs models to ATP Asa general purpose programmable tool MODELS can be used for processing simulation results either in the frequency domain or in the time domain TACS is a simulation module for time domain analysis of control systems It was originally developed for the simulation of HVDC converter controls For TACS a block diagram representation of control systems is used TACS can be used for the simulation of HVDC converter controls Excitation systems of synchronous machines power electronics and drives electric arcs circuit breaker and fault arcs Interface between electrical network and TACS is established by exchange of signals such as node voltage switch current switch status time varying resistance voltage and current sources Supporting routines are integrated utilities inside the program that support the users in conversion between manufacturers data format and the one required by the program or to calculate electrical parameters of lines and cables from geometrical and material data Supporting modules in ATP are ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 11 SINTEF a Calculation of electrical parameters of overhead lines and cables using program modules LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS an
230. ject This help text briefly describes the meaning of input data values Data To Current A through magnetizing branch MB at steady state Fo Flux Wb turn in MB at steady state The pair Io Fo defines the inductance in MB at steady state Rm Resistance in magnetizing branch in ohm 5 leg core or 3 leg shell RO Reluctance of zero sequence air return path for flux 3 leg COLre Lyve Rp Resistance in primary winding in ohm Lp Inductance in primary winding in mH if Xopt 0 Inductance in primary winding in ohm if Xopt power freq Vrp Rated voltage in kV primary winding Rs Resistance in secondary winding in ohm Ls Inductance in secondary winding in mH if Xopt 0 Inductance in secondary winding in ohm if Xopt power freq Vrs Rated voltage in kV secodary winding Rt Resistance in tertiary winding in ohm Lt Inductance in tertiary winding in mH if Xopt 0 Inductance in tertiary winding in ohm if Xopt power freq Vrt Rated voltage in kV tertiary winding RMS unchecked Current Flux characteristic must be entered checked Irms Urms characteristic must be entered ATPDRAW performs a SATURATION calculation 3 leg core checked 3 leg core type transformer assumed TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE unchecked 5 leg or 3 leg shell type assumed TRANSFORMER 3 wind turn on tertiary winding Points It s possible to enter 9 points on the current flux characteristic The required menu is performed immedeate
231. ject simply press and hold down the left mouse button on the object while moving the mouse Release the button and click in an empty area to unselect and confirm its new position The object is then moved to the nearest grid point known as gridsnapping If two or more components overlap as a consequence of a move operation you are given a warning message and can choose to proceed or cancel the operation Selecting a group of objects for moving can be done in three ways Holding down the Shift key while left clicking on an object Pressing and holding down the left mouse button in an empty area enables the user to drag a rectangular outline around the objects he wants to select And finally double clicking the left mouse button in an empty area enables the definition of a polygon shaped region by repeatedly clicking the left mouse button in the circuit window To close the region click the right mouse button Objects that are defined to fall within the indicated region or rectangle are added to the selected objects group For components this means that the centre point of a component icon must lie within the defined region or rectangle For connections and relations the region or rectangle must surround both end points To move the selected group of objects press and hold down the left mouse button inside the group while moving the mouse Unselect and confirm the new position by clicking in an empty area Any overlapping components will produce a warni
232. jects in ATPDraw are based on the LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETERS supporting routines of ATP EMTP The user must first describe the geometry of the system and the material constants ATPDraw then performs an ATP run to process this data case and converts the output punch file containing the electrical model of the line or cable into standard lib file format This lib file will then be included in the final ATP file via a SInclude call The idea in ATPDraw is to hide as much as possible of the intermediate ATP execution and files and let the user work directly with geometrical and material data in the circuit Only cases producing an electrical model of the line or cable are supported in ATPDraw To use the built in line cable module of ATPDraw the user must first select a line cable component with the desired number of phases 1 9 under Lines Cables LCC item in the selection menu as shown in Fig 5 15 This will display a component in the circuit window that is 136 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ANISS Manoel connected to the circuit as any other component Clicking on the LCC component with the right mouse button will bring up a special input dialog box called the Line cable dialog This window contains two sheets one for the various model specifications and one for the data geometry and materials as shown in Fig 5 16 ae Ole TRI Probes amp 3 phase or ve Branch Linear EC al ke Gesell Ki
233. jects menu Components are connected if their nodes overlap or if a connection is drawn between the nodes To draw a connection between nodes click on a node with the left mouse button A line is drawn between that node and the mouse cursor Click the left mouse button again to place the connection clicking the right button cancels the operation The gridsnap facility helps overlapping the nodes Nodes connected together are given the same name by the Make Names and Make File options in the ATP menu Nodes can be attached along a connection as well as at connection end points A connection should not unintentionally cross other nodes what you see is what you get A node naming warning appears during the ATP file creation if a connection exists between nodes of different names or if the same name has been given to unconnected nodes Connections are selectable as any other object To resize a connection click on its end point with the left mouse button hold down and drag If several connections share the same node the desired connection to resize must be selected Selected connection nodes appear as squares at both ends of the selection rectangle 4 2 8 2 On Main Window The menu item On Main Window displays help about the ATPDraw main window 4 2 8 3 About ATPDraw Selecting this menu item shows the ATPDraw copyright information and the program version actually used About ATPDraw Ei va NI Fllrow le Windows version 3 596 ERE Cop
234. l 1 D1 R2 1 D2 L1 1 K1 I T ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 163 SINTEF Advanced Manual 5 7 3 Statistic systematic switch Handling of statistic systematic switches in version 3 of ATPDraw has been made more general by introducing the independent master slave concept The component dialog boxes of the statistical switches slightly differs however from the standard switch dialog box layout as shown in Fig 5 46 The user can select the Switch type in a combo box out of the supported options Independent Master or Slave This will also enable the possible input fields and change the number of nodes note that slave switch has 4 nodes The Distribution for the statistical switch takes into account the specification of the IDIST parameter on the miscellaneous switch card ATP Settings Switch UM Selecting IDIST 1 will disable the Distribution group and force Uniform distribution The Open Close radio buttons select if the switch closes or opens with Je as current margin for opening switches The number of ATP simulations is set by the miscellaneous switch parameter Num on the ATP Settings Switch UM page This value influences the 1 misc data parameter NENERG of ATP ATPDraw sets the correct sign of NENERG Le gt 0 for statistic or lt 0 for systematic switch studies The function of the Group No Label Comment and Output fields are the same as for any other standard components Component Sw_stat sup Attributes STA
235. l nodes of the object should be drawn from the symbol in the middle and out to the node positions specified in Fig 5 48 The completed icon of the 6 pulse rectifier bridge is shown in Fig 5 50 amp Icon Editor ojx File Edt Tools Done E e Labe Fig 5 50 The icon associated with the new HVDC 6 object Finally the just created support file must be saved to disk using the Save or Save As buttons User specified sup files are normally located in the USP folder and their default extension is sup You can reload the support file of any user specified objects whenever you like using the User Specified Edit sup file option of the Objects menu The User Specified Files in the component selection menu provides access to the user specified objects The component dialog box of the HVDC 6 object is very similar to that of the standard objects as shown in Fig 5 51 The name of the DBM file which is referenced in the final ATP input file must be specified in the nclude field under User specified The Send parameters check box is normally selected if the USP object has at least one input node or data 170 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF User specified H DC_6 Attributes Advanced Manual DATA VALUE NODE PHASE NAME Angle 18 2 ap VED Rs 2500 E 1 POS Cs 0 01 NEG 0080 Ua A volas Uc C WOT Group No 0 Label Comment User specified e M Send parameters g lnclude D ATPO
236. l will result in a linear core representation based on the 100 voltage values b Specifying External Lm Rm the magnetizing branch will be omitted in the BCTRAN calculation and the program assumes that the user will add these components as external objects to the model ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 155 SINTEF Advanced Manual c Specifying External Lm will result in calculation of a nonlinear magnetizing inductance first as an l ms Urms characteristic then automatically transformed to a current fluxlinked characteristic by means of an internal SATURA like routine The current in the magnetizing inductance is calculated as I A 4 10 Curr SPOS MVA 3 Loss kW 3 IV op KV rms where V efis actual rated voltage specified under Ratings divided by J3 for Y and Auto connected transformers The user can choose to Auto add nonlinearities under Structure and in this case the magnetizing inductance is automatically added to the final ATP file as a Type 98 inductance ATPDraw connects the inductances in Y or D dependent on the selected connection for actual winding for a 3 phase transformer In this case the user has no control on the initial state of the inductor s If more control is needed for instance to calculate the fluxlinked or set initial conditions Auto add nonlinearities should not be checked The user is free to create separate nonlinear inductances however The Copy button at the bottom of the dial
237. lectrical network and a Use As field for specification of the name of the model referenced in the Type 94 declaration of the ATP input file MODEL INDIN x Attributes Fig 4 65 Interpretation of the Type 94 model file L1 0 1 soy A 1 EIS TOP soy P 1 EIS DOT Scl 1 ER Group Mo fo Label pO Comment Time varying inductor Type Hd Branch output fi Current sl IT Hide Use Ag NDIN DR OK Cancel Help ae Fig 4 66 Component dialog box of Type 94 model objects Signal input and data values for a Type 94 object are loaded by ATP and the output of the object are also used automatically by ATP Interfacing it with other components of the circuit is handled by ATPDraw A Type 94 compatible mod files must have a fixed structure and the use of such an object also requires special declarations in the ATP input file as shown next Structure of a Type 94 compatible mod file 118 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual MODEL indin COME SsSSSSsSSSSSSSSSSeSSSSSee SSeS SSeS SeSSSSS SSS SSeS SSS SSS SS SSS Internal Crrcuit l ground Ll ground Built for use as a l phase non transmission type 94 Norton component EE endcommen d Comment EE SS First declarations required for any type 94 iterated model the values of these data and input are loaded automatically by ATP the values of these outputs are
238. led type 12 switch TACS switch TACSSWIT SWITCH Simple TACS MODELS controlled type 13 type 13 switch Measuring SWMEAS SWITCH Measuring switch type 0 Current measurements Statistic SW STAT __ SWITCH Statistic switch See ATP Settings Switch UM Systematic switch SW_SYST sl SWITCH Systematic switch See ATP Settings Switch UM 4 9 6 Sources DC type 11 Ramp type 12 slope Ramp type 13 AL type 14 surge type 15 Heidler type 15 TACS source The popup menu under Sources contains the following items AL sph type 14 AL Ungrounded l l DC Ungrounded Fig 4 59 Electrical sources in ATPDraw DC type 11 aan DC step source Current or voltage y Ramp type 12 SOURCE Ramp source Current or voltage Slope Ramp SLOPE RA VE SOURCE Two slope ramp source type 13 type 13 Current or voltage AC type 14 ma SOURCE AC source Current or AC source Current or voltage Surge type 15 SOURCE SC eene source Type Heidler type 15 SOURCE a type source Current or Volt TACS source TACSSOUR H SOURCE TACS MODELS controlled source type 60 Current or voltage AC 3 ph type 14 AC3PH K SOURCE AC source type 14 Current or voltage 3 phase node AC Ungrounded ACLPHUG je SOURCE Ungrounded AC source type 14 18 Voltage only DC Ungrounded DC1PHUG ele SOURCE Ungrounded DC source type 11 18 Voltage only ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 113 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 7 Machines
239. lthy phases during the dead time of reclosing but CVTs or CCVT has no such effect two different cases have been considered al the trapped charge 1s equal to the phase to ground voltage peak a2 the trapped charge 1s 30 of the phase to ground voltage peak The reclosing operations are synchronized to the bus voltage in this simulation It means that the master switch is closed when the instantaneous value of the phase to ground bus voltage is equal to zero The average delay for the slave switches in phase B and C is set 120 and 60 electrical 224 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF degrees respectively The standard deviation of the operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker has been considered as an additional parameter in the study Application Manual b1 accumulated deviation of the breaker and the controller operating time is 1 ms b2 accumulated deviation of the breaker and the controller operating time is 2 ms The ATPDraw generated input file for the case al b1 is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Thursday 25 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 SDUMMY XYZ000 C df gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt 1 E 5 06 500 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 100 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n
240. ly after the input menu The points should be entered as increasingly larger values The point 0 0 is not permitted added internally in ATP 5 7 2 Universal machines Handling of electrical machines in version 3 of ATPDraw has been updated substantially to provide a user friendly interface for most of the electrical machine modeling options in ATP Supported Universal Machine UM types are Synchronous machine UM type 1 Induction machines UM type 3 amp 4 DC machine UM type 8 Single phase machine UM type 6 The component dialog box of the Universal Machine object is substantially differs to the standard dialog box layout as shown in Fig 5 44 In the UM component dialog box the user enters the machine data in five pages General Magnet Stator Rotor Init Several UM models are allowed with global specification of initialization method and interface These Global options can be specified under ATP Setting Switch UM On the General page data like stator coupling and the number of d and q axis coils are specified On the Magnet page the flux inductance data with saturation are specified while on the Stator and Rotor pages the coil data are given Init page is for the initial condition settings 160 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Advanced Manual Component UM_3 sup x Attributes General Magnet stator Rotor alel stator coupling Pole pairs EE Rotor coils ab st Frequency fen
241. ly dependent on the selected connection and number of windings Ad DE ZZ The data specified in Fig 5 41 will result in an icon at left with 3 three phase terminals and one single phase neutral point common to the primary and secondary autotransformer windings The label shows the transformer connection 5 7 Non standard component dialog boxes The component dialog box in which the user is allowed to change the object s attributes shows a considerable similarity nearly for all components on the Attributes page the components data can be specified on the optional Characteristic page you specify the input characteristic of non linear components while the node names in the top right table is just for your information The following components deviate somewhat from the above description General 3 phase transformer GENTRAFO Universal machine UM_1 UM 3 UM A UM o UM 8 Statistical Systematic switch SW STAT SW SYST Harmonic source HFS SOUR 5 7 1 Saturable 3 phase transformer The component dialog box of this transformer model is shown in Fig 5 43 This dialog box also has an Attributes and a Characteristic page but the former is largely differs from the standard layout The function of the Group No Label Comment and Output fields are the same as on any other component dialog boxes the meaning of the other fields are given next The pair Zo Fo defines the magnetizing branch inductance at steady state R 1s the
242. m the Internet or to receive ATP related materials from others 1 2 What is ATP The Alternative Transients Program ATP is considered to be one of the most widely used universal program system for digital simulation of transient phenomena of electromagnetic as well as electromechanical nature in electric power systems With this digital program complex networks and control systems of arbitrary structure can be simulated ATP has extensive modeling capabilities and additional important features besides the computation of transients The Electromagnetic Transients Program EMTP was developed in the public domain at the Bonneville Power Administration BPA of Portland Oregon prior to the commercial initiative in 1984 by the EMTP Development Coordination Group and the Electric Power Research Institute EPRI of Palo Alto California The birth of ATP dates to early in 1984 when Drs Meyer and Liu did not approve of proposed commercialization of BPA s EMTP and Dr Meyer using his own personal time started a new program from a copy of BPA s public domain EMTP Since then the ATP program has been continuously developed through international contributions by Drs W Scott Meyer and Tsu huei Liu the co Chairmen of the Canadian American EMTP User Group Several experts around the world have been contributing to EMTP starting in 1975 and later to ATP in close cooperation with program developers in Portland USA Whereas BPA work on EMTP remains in the
243. menu The main menu provides access to all the functions offered by ATPDraw The menu items are explained in detail in the Reference part of this Manual File Load and save circuit files start a new one import export circuit files create postscript and metafile bitmap files print the current circuit and exit Edit Circuit editing copy paste delete duplicate flip rotate select move label copy graphics to clipboard and undo redo etc View Tool bar status bar and comment line on off zoom refresh and view options ATP Run ATP make and edit ATP file view the LIS file make node names ATP file settings miscellaneous file format file sorting etc assign data to variables for PARAMETER usage and specify RECORD for MODELS output requests Objects Edit support files default values min max limits icon and help file create new files for MODELS and User Specified Objects Tools Icon editor help file editor text editor setting of various program options Window Arrange the circuit windows and show hide the Map window Help About box and Windows help file system Circuit window The circuit is built up in this window The circuit window is the container of circuit objects From the File menu you can load circuit objects from disk or simply create an empty window to start building a new circuit Circuit objects include standard ATP components user specified elements MODELS and TACS components connections and relations
244. mod file are listed under Variable Each variable has a default alias name that appears in the Alias field but it can be modified according to the user need Record To record a variable click on the Add button Model Variable The alias name can be changed later by selecting an item in the Record list box and type in a new FLASH_1B tri FLASH IC a name The record request can be removed by tire selecting the item and click on Remove This record list 1s stored in the circuit file but it does not follow the circuit when the circuit is l powera dad 4 Bemave KEN copied to the clipboard or the export group option is used Record FLASH TA power AS power FLASH_1B power AS powerB FLASH 1C power AS powerl Fig 5 40 Record of model variables 5 6 BCTRAN support in ATPDraw ATPDraw provides a user friendly interface for the BCTRAN transformer matr x modeling to represent single and three phase two and three winding transformers After the user has entered the open circuit and short circuit factory test data the ATPDraw calls ATP and executes a BCTRAN supporting routine run Finally ATPDraw includes the punch file into the ATP file The windings can be Y D or Auto coupled with support of all possible phase shifts The nonlinear magnetization branch can optionally be added externally Fig 5 41 shows the BCTRAN dialog box which appears when the user selects BCTRAN under Transformers of the component selection men
245. mple this section shows how to create a 3 phase Type 96 hysteretic inductor You can draw a circuit as shown to the left of Fig 5 10 To create a group mark the 3 single phase inductor and the splitter then select Edit Compress The data CURR FLUX and RESID are set as external parameters for all the three inductors The non linearity button under Added to group is checked and the Add nonlinear button is checked too for all three inductors When you press OK the group object is created The group dialog box shown in Fig 5 11 contains only one entry for CURR FLUX and RESID which are used for all phases although 3 copies of them are present in the data structure This results in 13 free data cells available for the nonlinear characteristic 36 3 3 2 13 5 Only one characteristic is entered in the group s dialog box and it is later copied back to all the three inductors If that 13 data points were insufficient to describe the characteristic as you wish select the Include characteristic option and specify the characteristic in a disk file The name of that file must be entered in the nclude field The new 3 phase Type 96 group object can be stored as a project file in a special library location and later copied into any circuit using the File Import command ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 133 SINTEF Advanced Manual Compress Group x Objects Data m NLINDSG 8 SE SG Added to group MLIMDG6 2 CURR Dn ae MLIND
246. mtu edu atp atpdraw A TPDraw html 2 7 2 Help via electronic mail Electronic mail is the most known feature of the Internet By this way anyone who has an account on a computer connected to the Internet can send messages to others For ATP users this service provides an easy efficient and very fast way of communication with other users all over the world including program developers regional user group representatives or the author of ATPDraw 2 7 3 Help via the ATP EMTP L mailing list The listserver is an E mail remailer program which rebroadcasts incoming messages to all subscribers to the list The European EMTP ATP Users Group Association in cooperation with the German Research Network DFN and the University of Applied Sciences of Osnabr ck Germany operates a free electronic mailing list using address atp emtp l listserv dfn de This LISTSERV mailing list is for ATP related announcements questions answers etc The ATP EMTP L list 1s moderated and only licensed ATP users are entitled to subscribe by means of the authorized persons of the regional ATP EMTP user groups who checks first the license status of the applicant then send a subscription request to the list operator To learn more about the subscription procedure and the operation rules of this very active mailing list please visit the www emtp org web site ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 27 SINTEF installation Manual After your name has been added to the list
247. mulation Output Switch UM Format Variables Simulation Output Switch UM Format Variables Simulation Output Switch UM delta T fi E 5 Simulation type Output control Printou Switch stud Ba RE Time domain Print freq og I Network connectivity Statistic study Mk AE xopt fo eech Plot freq 3 I Steady state phasors Systematic study I Io Harmonic HFS Copt Num feo EE M Plotted output Vv Extremal values Se Freg fb0 m Power Frequency IT MemSave I Extra printout control Switch controls ach iV Auto detect simulati uto detect simulation errors TEST IR EE nist 0 E ERROR kr E KILL CODE IMAX GG och M 4 i KSTOUT F1 ao NsEED 0 Fig 7 5 Setting ATP specific variables This section also includes a section for Commands max 10 found under the ATP Edit Commands Each command takes three lines The first one specifies the command name that appears in the menu the second is the program file to launch and the third is a code for what kind of file to send as parameter Parameter Type Description BatchJobx name Text Name of the user specified commands Number x specifies the location of the commands in the ATP menu Name of the batch or EXE file executed by ATPDraw when the command is selected in the ATP menu Specifies which file is sent as parameter before executing the batch job 0 No file name is sent 1 File dialog opens 2 ATP file name is sent 3 PL4 file name is sent Bat
248. n e g individual models can have different simulation time step Description of each model uses a free format keyword driven syntax of local context and does not require fixed formatting in its representation The main description features of the MODELS language are the following The syntax of MODELS allows the representation of a system according to the system s functional structure supporting the explicit description of composition sequence concurrence selection repetition and replication The description of a model can also be used as the model s documentation The interface of a model with the outside world is clearly specified The components of a model can be given meaningful names representative of their function A system can be partitioned into individual sub models each with a local name space The models and functions used for describing the operation of a system can be constructed in programming languages other than the MODELS language The main simulation features supported by the MODELS language are the following Distinction between the description of a model and its use allowing multiple independent replications of a model with individual simulation management time step dimensions initial conditions etc Hierarchical combination of three initialization methods default use dependent and built in each contributing to the description of the pre simulation history of a model by a direct repr
249. n 5 8 1 of the Advanced Manual it is shown how to create a 6 pulse controlled thyristor rectifier bridge and make it available in ATPDraw as a user specified single object In this part of the manual a practical example with the use of this user specified library object to build up a 12 pulse HVDC station will be shown The example is based on exercise 54 in 2 Two different project file format exists in the ATPDraw distribution a Exa 6 adp The thyristor bridge and its control is specified as user specified object by means of the DATA BASE MODULARIZATION feature of ATP and interfaced with the rest of the circuit via a STInclude call b Exa 6g adp The thyristor firing is simulated directly in ATPDraw by means of the TACS support and connected with the thyristors via coupling to TACS objects Finally it is shown how to compress the control circuit and valves into a single icon to get a similar circuit layout than in case a The first alternative ca 6 adp is shown in Fig 6 11 the second one Exa_6g adp in Fig 6 13 The HVDC station in both circuits is supplied by a 3 phase AC source in front of two transformers Fig 6 12 shows the data input dialog box of the new object As it can be seen the source frequency is not one of the input parameters of the USP object The frequency is hard wired in the DATA BASE MODULE code which means that this circuit works only for 60 Hz systems For systems of 50 Hz the library file HVDC 65 LIB should
250. n ATPDraw Support files of standard components are zipped together in a single file called ATPDraw scl of the main ATPDraw directory Support files of MODELS GROUP and USP objects have extension sup and are stored in system folders MOD GRP and USP respectively Support files of the BCTRAN and LCC objects are stored in the Standard Component s Library ATPDraw scl while other files created by ATPDraw or ATP when using these objects are stored in the BCT and LCC folders The full path of the support files are included in the data structure of the project files so the sup files can be stored anywhere but the usage of the directory structure given below is recommended to ensure compatibility with other users SE EE EE Standard components ATPDraw scl SS Line Cable components ATPDraw scl LCC ACC BCTRAN trafo objects ATPDraw scl BCT MODELS components MOD MOD GROUP objects GRP User specified components USP USP The objects support files can be edited in the Objects menu The user can create new MODELS and User Specified components as described in the Advanced Manual 4 2 5 1 Edit Standard The standard component support files stored in the ATPDraw scl file can be customized here Selecting the Edit Standard field will first perform a select file dialog box of Fig 4 25 where the support file to be edited can be selected then a dialog box shown in Fig 4 26 appears ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 79 Da l NT
251. n be edited inside ATPDraw in the Objects menu The default icon can also be modified by using the built in icon editor New objects can be created by specifying new support files ATP file This file is produced by ATPDraw and used as input to ATP simulation The atp files are located in the ATP sub directory and can be edited with any text processors including ATPDraw s own Text Editor It is advised however only for experts to modify this file manually Line cable file A line or cable is described by an alc file atpdraw line cable This binary file contains the line cable constants or cable parameter data The alc data are used by ATPDraw to run ATP and create an electrical model of a line or cable BCTRAN file A BCTRAN Transformer component is described in a ber file This binary file contains the input data required for the supporting routine BCTRAN of ATP EMTP The bct data are used by ATPDraw to run ATP and create an electrical transformer model Model file A model is described in a model file mod This text file starts with MODEL lt name gt and ends with ENDMODEL The lt name gt must be equal to the model file name The model file is included directly in the final ATP input data file It is recommended to store the models file in the MOD sub directory Include files User Specified Components are described in a library file 1ib This text file has a pre defined format as specified in by the Data Base Module o
252. n searching Selecting the Contents tab you get a lists of available help functions as shown on Fig 4 39 Help Topics ATPDraw Help aa Contents index Find Click a topic and then click Display Or click another tab such as Index Getting Started UN User Interface Objects Map Window Nar Main Window Edit menu lew menu ATP menu Objects menu Tools menu Window menu Help menu Toolbar status bar File NotFound dialog Circuit Window Customizing Components ATP Settings Dialo ooo zl Display Print Cancel Fig 4 39 On line help of ATPDraw ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 93 I NT EF Reference Manual This page allows you to move through the list and select an entry on which you need help To display an entry select one from the list by a simple mouse click and press Display or double click on the entry with the mouse Index and Find tabs can be used to get help by the name of a topic E g if you ask for help on topics Circuit Window type this phrase into the input field of the Index page and press the Display button Then a description of the Circuit Window topics will be displayed as shown below including several links marked as green underlined text File Edt Bookmark Options Help Circuit Window The circuit window is the container of circuit objects From the file menu you can load circuit objects from disk or simply create an empty window to start building a new circuit Circuit object
253. nd an acknowledgement letter to the developer Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG and MTU secure FTP sites PCPLOT was steadily developed and improved until 1997 using Borland Turbo Pascal under MS DOS platforms The program can read PL4 file types of unformatted C like binary and formatted files PCPLOT can display maximum 4 curves with 16000 plot points per curve The maximum number of plot variables stored in the plot file is limited up to 100 The program supports three different plot types time function results of the simulations X Y plot one variable against another frequency response results of FREQUENCY SCAN cases The values of the plotted variables can be displayed by means of a vertical marker line Different type of curves e g currents and voltages can be mixed in the same plot by defining scaling factors and offset The curves are drawn using solid lines with different colors and user can mark each curve with different characters at the desired positions Visually redundant data points on plots are eliminated to accelerate the drawing speed Screen plots can be sent to disk file in HP GL format Developer Prof Dr Mustafa Kizilcay m kizilcay fh osnabrueck de Germany Licensing freely available without separate licensing to all ATP users Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG secure FTP Web sites WPCPlot is a graphical output program for ATP EMTP running under Microsoft Windows 95 98 N
254. nd node dots are drawn with a red color until the component or node is opened and given meaningful data No such checking is done when this option is unselected Show branch output Small U I symbols indicate the selected branch output requests Branch output requests can be specified in most of the component dialog boxes To accept the current view options and return from the dialog select the OK button To set and view new options without returning select the Apply button If you want the current settings be applied to all current and future circuit windows select the Apply All button before you exit the dialog box ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 69 SINTEF Reference Manual 4 2 4 ATP The ATP menu provides options to create display and modify the ATP input files and to set circuit specific ATP options e g AT Tmax before running the case by the Run ATP command or the F2 function key Other components of the ATP EMTP package ATF 4 2 4 1 Settings settings run ATP Edit ATF file Edit LIS file Make File As Make Hames Edit Commands Run Plots Run Analyzer Run PCP lot Run TPR lot Run GTFPilat Run TOP 3 2 Run Excel stat Edit Text F3 Fe F4 RS Ctrl Alt 0 Ctrl Alt 1 Ctrl Alt z Ctrl Alt 3 Ctrl Alt 4 Ctrl Alt 5 Ctrl Alt 6 Ctrl Alt e g pre and post processors supporting programs and utilities can also be launched from this menu Besides the default commands the user
255. nd provide these external bat files in correct format 2 6 1 Calling Watcom ATP and GNU MingW32 ATP from ATPDraw Proper execution of the Watcom and GNU version of ATP requires that environmental variables WATDIR or GNUDIR be set correctly i e SET WATDIR Drive Path WatcomATPdir in the AUTOEXEC BAT if you use Win9x or set these parameters under My Computer Properties dialog if Windows NT 2000 or XP is used The RunATP_W BAT and RunATP_G BAT commands are created by the install program of ATPDraw These batch files has a single line Swatdir Stpbig exe both 1 r ggnudir tpbig exe both 1 s r If an additional W or G is seen at the end of the ATP executable TPBIG EXE in your installation you have to modify the RunATP BAT accordingly You may find inserting some additional commands into these batch files as well E g echo off sgnudirstpbigg exe both 1 s r pause waits for user interaction before the DOS box of ATP closed optional del dum bin delete temporary files created by ATP optional del tmp del s s tmp 2 6 2 Running Salford ATP from inside ATPDraw Note that Salford ATP can be used under Win9x only To ensure smooth interaction between ATPDraw DBOS and Salford ATP it is recommended to add the DBOS directory to the search PATH and specify an ATPDIR environmental variable in the AUTOEXEC BAT file 1 e SET ATPDIR Drive Path SalfordATPdir The RunATP_S BAT is created by the install p
256. ndows Metafile format This way graphics of selected objects can be exported to other Windows applications Short key Ctrl W 4 2 2 8 Select This menu has four sub menus All Select all objects in the current circuit window Short key Ctrl A None To cancels the object selection Short key Ctrl N Polygon Enables object selection by a polygon shaped region Short key Ctrl P or double click with the left button in an empty region of the circuit window Type Group Enables selection by objects support file name or group number see below Short key Ctrl T A selected object or group of objects can be subject of the most editing operations Move click left button hold down and drag Rotate Copy Duplicate Erase or Export in the File menu To 62 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual unselect a group select None or just click with the left mouse button in an empty space of the circuit window In Polygon mode the mouse cursor icon changes its style to a pointing hand and moves to the middle of the circuit window The current action mode also changes to MODE GROUP in the status bar To draw a polygon around a group of objects move the cursor to the starting location and click the left mouse button Then release the button and a rubber band line will be drawn between the starting point and the current mouse cursor location And so forth left click to create corners right to complete the polygon All
257. ne e g for relay setting purposes Any user specified objects might be used as a simple Include library Send parameters button off but a predefined object is available under the User Specified field in the selection menu Two other special objects are also available the Ref 1 ph and Ref 3 ph These objects are not written in the ATP file at all and their purpose is only to visualize a connectivity in the Include file An example where these objects Library LIB1 A B and 3 phase reference LIBREF 3 have been used 1s shown in Fig 6 8 UE AP Fig 6 8 Usage of a library reference objects sa D ad If you click with the right mouse button on the Library object identified by the LIB1 A B label you get the input window to set the element attributes as shown in Fig 6 9 Group No fo Label Un Ap Comment study of ground fault in line A B User specified Bice M Send parameters Include D ATPDRAW3 Usp Browse TC Lock M intemal phase seq Fig 6 9 Library input window The most important menu field in this window is the nclude which gives the name and path of the file to be included The Browse button allows you to select a file in the Select Libray dialog box The Send parameters check box must be off Label and Comment are optional fields If you click with the right mouse button on one of the 3 phase reference objects a similar dialog appears with the difference that it has node name fields too
258. ne currents obtained by a high speed transient recorder at a staged fault tests of the same 750 kV line 700 KV 350 350 700 2000 A 1000 1000 2000 3000 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 s 0 5 Fig 6 25 SLG fault and fault clearing transients simulation upper curve phase to ground voltage lower curve line current Fig 6 26 SLG fault and fault clearing transients Phase currents and voltages recorded at a staged fault test by a variable sampling frequency disturbance recorder 200 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual 6 6 Using MODELS controlled switches DC68 DAT Exa_S adp This example is taken from the sub case 9 of ATP benchmark file DC 68 DAT in which a series compensated 500 kV interconnection is outlined As a rule metal oxide arresters protect the series capacitors against overheating in such circuits In practice the arresters energy dissipation is continuously monitored and if certain power or energy limits are exceeded the series capacitor is bypassed by a switch In the simulation the monitoring function is provided by a MODELS object and the bypass function is by a TACS MODELS controlled switch Chapter 5 5 2 of the Advanced Manual introduce you how to create the MODELS object applied in this example The actual circuit is shown in Fig 6 27 i i i Fig 6 27 Usage of MODELS objects in ATPDraw sa 8 adi As Fig 6 27 shows no connections are drawn between th
259. ng Compress feature of ATPDraw could be used effectively when creating such a model because the circuit has many identical blocks I e the user needs to define the object parameters only once and copy them as many times as needed Close to the lightning strike the line spans are represented by 4 phase JMarti LCC objects phase conductors sky wire The surge propagation along the tower structure has been taken into account in this model by representing the vertical pylon sections as single phase constant parameter transmission lines The R L branches below the tower model simulate the tower grounding impedance The front of wave flashover characteristic of the line insulators plays a significant role in such a back flashover study It can be simulated quite easily using a MODELS object like the Flash of this example which controls a TACS MODELS controlled switch The influence of the power frequency voltage on the back flashover probability can t be neglected either at this voltage level In this study case it was considered by a Thevenin equivalent 3 phase source connected to the remote end of Line2 The ATP file created by ATPDraw is shown below Note This case exceeds the storage cell limit of ATP if the program runs with DEFAULT 3 0 table size default LISTSIZE DAT setting To run the simulation successfully the user must increase this limit from 3 0 to 6 0 BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Thursday 4 2002 C A Bonne
260. ng To move objects outside of the visible part of the circuit use the window scrollbars or the view rectangle in the map window Any selected objects or group will follow the window to its new position Objects or a group can be rotated by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected object or group Other object manipulation functions such as undo redo and clipboard options can be found in the Edit menu Additionally the most frequently used object manipulation functions can be accessed by holding down the Shift key while clicking with the right mouse button on an object or on a selected group of objects This will display and activate the circuit window shortcut menu ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 37 SINTEF ae Components and component nodes can be opened for editing by a right click or left double click on an unselected component or node Either the Node data Component or Open Probe dialog box will appear allowing the user to change component or node attributes and characteristics The Component dialog box has the same layout for most circuit objects In this window the user must specify the required component data The number of DATA and NODES menu fields are the only difference between input windows for standard objects The nonlinear branch components have a Characteristic page too in addition to the normal Attributes page where the nonlinear characteristics and some include file options can be specified Selecting a singl
261. ng a splitter object is also required and the coupling to circuit object must be connected at the single phase side of the splitter as shown in Fig 4 68 Coupling EMTP OUT p TACS Value from the electrical circuit into TACS to Circuit 7 type 90 93 90 Node voltage 91 Switch current 92 internal variable special EMTP comp 93 Switch status T A d Hrn Yuce ga COUPLING G af TO lee SU BD RMS OUT TACS T y CEU A T a DE CO dh el Z T ae BUS l Fig 4 68 Coupling a 3 phase electrical node to TACS 120 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 10 2 TACS sources The Sources of TACS menu contains the following items TACS step signal source TACS AC cosine signal source Pulse 23 PULSE 03 TACS pulse train signal RAMP 04 TACS saw tooth train signal 4 9 10 3 TACS transfer functions All the older TACS transfer functions of previous ATPDraw versions are supported in version 3 but some of them has been removed from the component selection menu and replaced by a more general component the General transfer function This object defines a transfer function in the s domain and it can be specified with or without limits Four more simple transfer functions are also supported ntegral Derivative first order High and Low pass filters General TRANSF ii TACS General transfer function in s domain Order 0 7 Named dynamic limits TACS Integral of the input multi
262. nput node 2 Negative sum input node 3 Disconnected input node Pos Specifies the node position on the icon border The icon template on the right hand side of Fig 4 27 shows the possible border positions The position should correspond with icon drawing positions indicated with dark red colored lines in the Icon Fditor Phases Number of phases 1 or 3 for the component node If Phase is set to 3 the length of the node name is limited to 5 The last character of nodes in the proper phase sequence according to Kind will be appended by ATPDraw OO E OT g s Go RN k The Position page of the Edit object dialog box is not yet used in ATPDraw This option is reserved for future use to specify the card format of the object in the atp file Each circuit object has an icon which represents the object on the screen A speed button on the right hand side of the Edit Object dialog box invokes the built in pixel editor where icons can be edited Each icon has equal width and height of 41x41 pixels on the screen Clicking with the left mouse button will draw the current color selected from a 16 colors palette at the bottom Clicking the right button will draw with the background color Dark red colored lines indicate the possible node positions on the icon border Menu field items of the con Editor are described in the section 4 2 6 1 of this manual ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 81 SINTEF E Icon Editor _ jo x File E
263. ntry were added to the global list of variables If you try to enter special characters in this field an error message prevents this Component Ric sup Attributes Contirm Ei Undeclared variable RES Do you want io add itto your list of ATP variables Cancel Al Fig 5 12 Specifying text variables RES and CAP in the component dialog box for an RLC object Numerical values can be assigned to variables on the Variables page under main menu ATP Setting as shown in Fig 5 13 Variable names are declared in the left column and you can specify data values or a text string in free format in the right column on this page Sorting the declarations is possible with the arrow buttons Deleting declarations is also supported If variables RES and CAP are declared twice with different precision settings Le Vintage is checked in a component dialog box and unchecked in another it will be declared twice with 3 and 13 underscore characters added in the Parameter declaration This process is hidden however but the result is seen in the final ATP file If you change the names in the left side column this will affect the text strings variables specified in the components and you will be requested about what action to take see Fig 5 14 Available actions are reset the variable to zero or the default value from the support file or select parameter and then decide which variables should replace the no longer defined one AT
264. o command Cut Copies a bitmap version of the icon to the Clipboard and clears the icon buffer This bitmap can be pasted into other applications e g pbrush exe Copy Places a bitmap version of the icon in the Clipboard Paste Inserts the bitmap in the Clipboard into the icon buffer If colors are different from those used in the original bitmap it is because the icon editor calculates which color in its own color palette provides the nearest match to any bitmap COLOL Delete Clears the icon buffer TOOLS options Pen Selects the pen drawing tool enabling you to draw single icon pixels or lines or shapes by pressing and holding down the left or right mouse button while you move the mouse Fill Selects the flood fill tool Fills any shape with the currence color Line Selects the line drawing tool enabling you to draw a rubber band line by pressing and holding down the left or the right mouse button while you move the mouse Circle Selects the circle drawing tool enabling you to draw a dynamically sized circle by pressing and holding down the left or the right mouse button while you move the mouse Rectangle Selects the box drawing tool enabling you to draw a rubber band box by pressing and holding down the left or the right mouse button while you move the mouse 4 2 6 2 Help Editor Viewer Displays the Help Editor where the current help text assigned to components can be modified The Help Editor and the Viewer has actually
265. o erase any mistakes made during the drawing It is therefore convenient to assign the transparent color indicated by T to the right mouse button and desired drawing color to the left button Mistakes can then easily be corrected by alternating left right mouse button clicks ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 85 I NT EF Reference Manual The vertical and horizontal lines of dark red color indicate the icon node positions These are in the same position as indicated on the Nodes pages of the Edit Component dialog boxes The icon editor has a File menu an Edit menu and a Tools menu In addition a Done option appears to the right of the Tools menu if the editor has been called from the Edit Component dialog box Selecting Done changes made to the icon will be accepted Available menu options are described below File options Open Loads the icon of a support file into the icon buffer Save Stores the contents of the icon buffer to disk Import Reads the icon of a support file and inserts it into the icon buffer Exit Cancel Closes the icon editor window If the option Exit is selected and the icon buffer have been modified you are given a chance to save the icon before closing If the Done option is visible in the main menu the name of this menu item is Cancel and the icon editor window is closed without any warning with respect to loss of modified data Edit options Undo Cancels the last edit operation Redo Cancels the und
266. o fohm m Mu mp 5 Men output Fipe data C Surface i Snaking G S m fo e be f Eps in f Ground M Add G Sim C Em fo Un M Add C E m Infinite thickness Fig 5 27 System type and Pipe data settings for an Enclosing Pipe cable Depth Positive distance in meter between pipe center and ground surface Rin Inner radius of the pipe in meter Rout Outer radius of the pipe in meter Rins Outer radius of outer insulation total radius in meter Rho Resistivity of the pipe conductor Mu Relative permeability of the pipe conductor Eps in Rel permittivity of the inner insulation between cables and pipe Eps out Rel permittivity of the outer insulation around pipe G and C Additional shunt conductance and shunt capacitance between the pipe and the cables Infinite thickness Infinit thick pipe ISYST 0 and uniform grounding The cable Data page input fields for Enclosing Pipe type cable systems are identical with that of the SC cables see sub section 5 3 2 2 The only difference is the meaning of Position Position Relative position to pipe center in polar coordinates distance and angle 144 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel 5 4 Verification of the Line Cable model performance The Verify button of the LCC dialog box helps the user to get an overview of the performance of the model in the frequency domain This feature of ATPDraw enables the user to compare the line cable mod
267. o the AC source and closed the window note how the object layout changes when you exit the window proceed to the other objects Repeat the procedure explained above to give data to the resistor and to the inductor by calling the Component dialog box of the objects To do so click with the right mouse button on the resistor and inductor icon respectively The probe objects have different input window than other objects To open the voltage or current probe input window click on its icon with the right mouse button In this window you can select the number of phases of the probe and which phases to monitor In this single phase example default values no of phases 1 monitored phase A of both voltage and current probes should be selected as shown in Fig 3 12 UK Help Fig 3 12 Open probe dialog box 3 5 1 3 Diode bridge In this process you will learn how to use some editing options like rotate group duplicate and paste Since the diode bridge consists of four equal branches you do not need to build all of them from scratch First you select a diode from the selection menu as shown in Fig 3 13 After you have clicked on Diode type 11 the diode appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle The diode has to be rotated so click the right Switch time contr SCH F mouse button or select Edit in the main menu and switch time 3 ph Sources click on Rotate The diode is now rotated 90 deg Machines
268. objects o Splitter coupling between 3 phase and single phase circuits o ABC DEF Reference objects for specifying the master node for phase sequence Branches o Branch linear 1 phase and 3 phase non coupled components o Branch nonlinear 1 phase nonlinear R and L components Single and 3 phase MOV Type 93 96 and 98 nonlinear inductors including initial conditions for the fluxlinked reactors o TACS controlled and time dependent resistor Lines Cables o Lumped PI equivalents type 1 2 and RL coupled components type 51 52 o Distributed lines of constant frequency independent parameters Transposed Clarke up to 9 phases untransposed 2 or 3 phase KCLee line models o LCC the user can select 1 9 phase models of lines cables In the input menu of these components the user can specify a LINE CONSTANT or CABLE PARAMETER data case The resulting include file contains the electrical model and the LIB file is generated automatically if the ATP setup is correct Bergeron KCLee Clarke nominal PI JMarti Semlyen and Noda models are supported o Read PCH file This is a module in ATPDraw to read the punch files from Line Constants Cable Constants or Cable Parameters and to create an ATPDraw object automatically sup file and lib file ATPDraw recognizes PI equivalents KCLee Clarke Semlyen and JMarti line formats Switches o Time and voltage controlled 3 phase time controlled switch o Diode thyristor triac o Sim
269. odel not supported CABLE PARAMETERS or in CABLE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS Semlyen Frequency dependent simple fitted model not supported in CABLE PARAMETERS 138 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel The Line Cable Data dialog of Fig 5 16 really consists of three pages Model page Line Data page or Cable Data page although only two of them are visible at a time The parameter names used in the LCC dialog boxes are identical with that of in Chapter XXI LINE CONSTANTS and Chapter XXIII CABLE CONSTANTS parts of the ATP Rule Book 3 The Standard data of the Model page is common for all line and cable types and has the following parameters Standard data Rho ohm 1 fo Freq init Hz fen foo Fig 5 17 Standard data for all line cable models Rho The ground resistivity in ohmm of the homogeneous earth Carson s theory Freq init Frequency at which the line parameters will be calculated Bergeron and PI or the lower frequency point JMarti Noda and Semlyen of parameter fitting Length km Length Length of overhead line in m km or miles 5 3 1 Model and Data page settings for Overhead Lines For overhead transmission lines the System type settings are as follows High accuracy FCAR b1lank is used in all cases Transposed The overhead line is assumed to be transposed if the button is checked Disabled for PI model type Auto bundling When checked this enables the
270. of CABLE CONSTANTS and CABLE PARAMETERS has been added to the LCC module of ATPDraw recently and the user can select between the two supporting programs by a single button switch This enables a more flexible grounding scheme support of Semlyen cable model instead of Noda and the cascade PI section On the other hand in CABLE CONSTANTS enabled state ATPDraw does not support additional shunt capacitance and conductance input and Noda model selection The CABLE CONSTANTS and CABLE PARAMETERS support in ATPDraw does not extend to the special overhead line part and the multi layer ground model For Class A type cable systems which consists of single core SC coaxial cables without enclosing conducting pipe the System type settings are as follows Cables in Select if the cables are in the air on the earth surface or in ground Number of cables Specify the number of cables in the system Cable constants Selects between Cable Constants and Cable Parameters option If checked the additional conductance and capacitance option oystem type single Core Cable Phases 3 Mumber of cables 3 4 Cables in M Cable Constants C Air Matrix output will be switched off and the Ground options on C Surface Snaking the Cable Data page will be activated The gt ENE etA La GC Add C Enn y with Cable Parameters Fig 5 24 System type options for SC cables Matrix output Check this button to enable printout of impedanc
271. og box allows the user to copy the calculated nonlinear characteristic to an external nonlinearity What to copy is selected under View Copy To copy the fluxlinked current characteristic used in Type 93 and Type 98 inductances Lm flux should be selected Short circuit The Short circuit data can be specified as shown in Fig 5 42 With reference to the ATP Rule Book Imp is equal to ZPOS Pow MVA is equal to SPOS and Loss kW is equal to P These three values are specified for all the windings If zero sequence short circuit factory test data are also available the user can similarly specify them to the right of the positive sequence values after SH 188 selecting the Zero sequence data available check box 250 159 positive sequence Ga 710 Fig 5 42 Short circuit factory test data If Auto transformer is selected for the primary and secondary winding HV LV the impedances must be re calculated according to Eq 6 45 6 46 6 50 of the EMTP Theory Book 5 This task is performed by ATPDraw and the values Z Z r and Z _ are written to the BCTRAN file automatically 2 V V V Vy V ly oy gt 29 T Z T gt ZH r 2a e OZH o Zra e ziz V V ie i e where Zu Z r and Zur are the short circuit impedances Imp referenced to a common Pow MVA base When the user clicks on OK the data structure is stored in a binary disk file with extension bct and stored in the BCT folder This BCT file is stored in
272. olyBug options cannot be set from the Tools Options dialog box If you experience problems during polygon drawing operations try to set one or both parameters to On using a text editor 230 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Pee General Preferences Directories View ATP Circuit tiles IT Autosave every E minutes Create backup files Delete ternp files on exit View menu M Save toolbar state Window options M Save window size and position T Save window s current state M Save status bar state Save comment state Openfsave dialog Frogram Windows 3 1 style M Save options on exit Save Load Apply Help Fig 7 1 General program options 7 1 2 Preferences The Preferences section contains information on undo background color and the standard ATP and ARMAFIT commands The default settings can be modified on the Jools Options Preferences page Fig 7 2 Parameter Range Description UndoBuffers 1 100 The number of undo redo buffers to allocate for each circuit 10 window BackgroundColor Circuit windows background color You can specify one of the system color identifiers or a numeric value to set the red green and blue color intensity TextEditor Full path of text editor program to use for ATP file editing If this parameter is an empty string default the built in text editor is used ATPCommand The default command which executes the ATP simulation
273. omponents are not included in the ATP file and are displayed as gray icons The Lock option is not yet implemented You can also choose to reload the default values from the support files by clicking on the now button Selecting the Use default values check box will cause default values to be loaded automatically next time the dialog box is opened 102 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 Circuit objects in ATPDraw Probes amp 3 phase The Component selection menu provides options for creating and SE Inserting new components into the circuit window This menu is Branch Nonlinear normally hidden To show and activate the menu click the right mouse Lines Cables t button in an empty circuit window space Following a selection in one SE of the floating sub menus the selected object will be drawn in the center of the active circuit window enclosed by a rectangle You can SOLUCES e EE move left mouse click and drag rotate right mouse button or place 7 the object click on open space Transtormers MODELS The Component selection menu has several sub menus each of them TACS include circuit object of similar characteristics as briefly described User Specified below Frequency comp standard Component Fig 4 49 Component selection menu Probes amp 3 phase o Probes for node voltage branch voltage current and TACS monitoring o Various 3 phase transposition
274. ompressed format that makes the file sharing with others very simple ATPDraw is most valuable to new users of ATP EMTP and is an excellent tool for educational purposes However the possibility of multi layer modeling makes ATPDraw a powerful front end processor for professionals in analysis of electric power system transients as well Version 2 0 and above of ATPDraw for 9x NTx 2000 XP Windows platforms are written in Borland Delphi 2 0 Development of 16 bit versions for Windows 3 1 95 stopped with the launching of ATPDraw 1 0 A version 3 6 compiled with Delphi 6 0 is also available ATPDraw is a trademark and copyrighted by 1998 2001 SINTEF Energy Research Norway Program developer is Dr Hans Kristian H idalen at SINTEF Energy Research in Trondheim Norway with Dahl Data Design in Norway as a programming sub contractor and SYSTRAN Engineering Services in Hungary as a sub contractor for program documentation Program development has been financed by Bonneville Power Administration in Portland Oregon USA with Pacific Engineering Corporation as project coordinator ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 9 SINTEF wendeg The ATPDraw program is royalty free and can be downloaded free of charge from several Internet sites The on line help of ATPDraw and the present program documentation includes third party proprietary information of thus A7P licensing is mandatory prior to get permission to download the program and documentation fro
275. on The amplitude and angle of the Fan th harmonic source is given in columns Ampl and Angl ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 165 SINTEF Advanced Manual 5 8 Creating new circuit objects in ATPDraw The user specified objects USP are either customized standard objects or objects created for the use of INCLUDE and DATA BASE MODULARIZATION feature of ATP EMTP The Objects User Specified New sup file menu enables the user to create a new support file for such a user specified object or customize data node properties and the icon or the help text of an existing one The number of nodes and data specified in the Edit Object dialog box for USP objects must be in line with the ARG and NUM declarations in the header section of the Data Base Module DBM file The number of data must be in the range of 0 to 36 and the number of nodes in the range of 0 to 12 The USP support files are normally located in the USP folder Two new circuit objects will be created in this section a 6 pulse controlled thyristor rectifier bridge that is used as building block for simulating a 12 pulse HVDC station Ga 6 adp in section 6 4 of the Application Manual and a generator step up transformer model with winding capacitances and hysteretic core magnetism included The latter object is used in a transformer inrush current study Exa 11 adp in section 6 8 2 of the Application Manual 5 8 1 Creating a 6 phase rectifier bridge The Data Base Module DBM file
276. or the armature winding The number of coils on the Rotor page and on the Init page for manual initialization adapts the specification of the number of rotor coils First the d axis coils are listed then comes the q axis coils The function of the Group No Label Comment fields are the same as on any other component dialog boxes The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the UM objects ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 161 SINTEF Advanced Manual General stator coupling E a airs A gt e Rotor coils dh och ene Global Automatic i Prediction Tolerance 0 1885 otator rion fren afo d 0 038 0 0005 q 0 095 0 0005 Init Automati SLIP D LMUD I Ge imap 0 Lh bn FLED fo FLXRD 0 wen 2 Fixe 0 po 0 Rotor Fadtasd 8 0 075 0 0004 2 jo 075 00004 Init 154 1034 OMEGM rad s THETAM 162 840 0 78539 Fig 5 45 Data pages of the universal machines dialog box The Help text briefly describes the meaning of input data values and node names as the example shows next for UM type 1 Synchronous machine Data General page Pole pairs Number of pole pairs Tolerance Rotor speed iteration convergence margin Frequency Override steady state frequency Stator coupling Select between Y Dlead AC BA CB and Dlag AB BC CA Selecting Y turns neutral node Neut on
277. ork connectivity If checked connectivity table description of the topology of the circuit is written to the LUNIT6 output rile This option controls ATP s 1 misc data parameter IDOUBLE If unchecked no such table is written Steady state phasors If checked complete steady state solution branch flows Switch flows and source injection is written to the LUNIT6 output file This option sets ATP s L t misc data parameter KSSOUT 1 If unchecked no such output is produced by ATP Extremal values If checked extrema of each output variables will be printed at the end of the LIS file This option controls ATP s 1 misc data parameter MAXOUT If unchecked no such output is produced by ATP Extra printout control Additional control for the frequency of LUNIT6 output within the time step loop If checked the 1 misc data parameter IPUN is set to 1 and a 2 misc data card will appear in the ATP input file Parameters KCHG and MULT control the breakpoints and the new Print freq value If unchecked IPUN is set to U and LUNIT6 printout frequency will be constant throughout the simulation Switch UM settings Switch UM Switch study e Statistic study Study with statistic Universal machines Switches O a a Initialization Systematic study Study with systema Systematic study I Automatic tic switches Num Number of simulations This value Mum 100 C Manual influences ATP s ika misc data parameter NENERG ATPDraw sets
278. ort file or the contents of a text file into the text buffer Save Stores the contents of the text buffer to disk Save As Stores the contents of the text buffer to a specified disk file Built in text editor only Print Sends the contents of the text burrer to the default printer Print Setup Enables you to define default printer characteristics Exit Cancel Closes the editor or viewer window If the option displays Exit and the text buffer has been modified you are given a chance to save the text before closing If a Done option is available from the main menu this option displays Cancel and the window will close without any warning with respect to loss of modified data Edit options Undo Cancels the last edit operation Cut Copies selected text to the Clipboard and deletes the text from the buffer Copy Puts a copy of the selected text in the Clipboard ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 87 I NT EF Reference Manual Paste Inserts the text in the Clipboard into the text buffer at the current caret position Delete Deletes any selected text from the text buffer Select All Selects all the text in the buffer Find Searches the text buffer for the first occurrence of a specified text string and jumps to and selects any matching text found This option displays the Windows standard Find dialog box Find Next Searches for the next occurrence of the text string previously specified in the Find dialog Find amp
279. orting routine like the one provided for the LCC objects The BCTRAN input data are the excitation and short circuit factory test data which can easily be obtained from the transformer manufacturers Additionally the user can select between several options for modeling the nonlinear magnetizing branch The first example circuit of this section demonstrates the use of BCTRAN objects for transformer energization studies In the second example readers are familiarized with the application of user specified objects and the Grouping feature for transformer modeling 6 8 1 Energization of a 400 132 18 kV auto transformer Exa TU odp The study case is the energization of a 3 phase three winding Yyd coupled transformer The wye connected 132 kV windings and the delta coupled 18 kV windings are unloaded in this study The schematic diagram of the simulated case is shown in Fig 6 35 the corresponding ATPDraw circuit is depicted in Fig 6 36 400 132 18 kV S_ 8000 MVA 250 MVA Yyn0d11 63 7 mH Fig 6 36 ATPDraw circuit sa 10 adbp The nameplate data of the transformer are as follows Voltage rating Vpien Viow V tertiary 400 132 18 kV Yyn0d11 Power rating 250 MVA 75 MVA tertiary Positive seq excitation loss current 140 kW 0 2 Positive seq reactance High to Low 15 Sbasec 250MVA 15 Shase 250MVA High to Tertiary 12 5 Spass 75MVA 41 6667 Spase 250M VA Low to Tertiary 7 2 Spass 75MVA 24 Spase 25
280. ownload the latest patch file called patchxv3 zip if exists on the server then unzip it and simply overwrite the existing files in the ATPDraw system folder with the newer ones received in the patch file The program installation will create a directory structure as shown next ATPdraw can be uninstalled in the standard manner using Windows uninstaller Start menu Settings Control Panel Add Remove programs PROJECTI lt DIR gt L0 22 01 954p Project LCC lt DIR gt 10722 01 9754p ice ATP lt DIR gt eet D1200 Atp USP lt DIR gt g4 29 02 o lla Usp GRP lt DIR gt 10722 01 32560 Gip MOD lt DIR gt 10 22 01 9509p Mod BCT lt DIR gt OS 22 02 1242p Ber ATPDRAW CNT 3991 O4 11 02 SrZ23o ATITPDraw CNTI ATPDRAW EXE 1 182 208 04 29 02 10 58a Atpdraw exe ATPDRAW HLP 421 824 04 11 02 3 24p ATPDraw hlp ATPDRAW SCL 2037379 U4 25 02 10702p ATPDraw scl _ISREG32 DLL Zag 91 0 U2Z 07 96 8 074 E EE DeIsLl LSU 278603 UG6G 08 02 10 114 DeisLli sisu RUNAF BAT Yi 10 22 01 1022290 runAr bac RUNATP G BAT 20 Ekel LOSS6p 2UnATY Gaba RUNATP S BAT 108 10 27 01 10759p 2unAl Dat RUNATP W BAT 90 LO 22 01 10254 DunATP W bat The files ISREG32 d11 and DeIsL1 isu are created by the install shield for uninstall purposes 2 5 Files and sub folders in the ATPDraw system folder To use ATPDraw four files are required ATPDraw exe ATPDraw scl standard component library ATPDraw cnt help content and ATPDraw hlp help file Besides the user c
281. p l Display E UserNamed Fig 3 35 Click the right mouse button on single phase right node of the resistor A node name is not assigned to the right node of the resistor Fig 3 35 ATPDraw thus gives the node a name starting with XX followed by a unique number This node is a single phase node with no phase sequence 3 phase nodes with no user specified names are given a name starting with X followed by a four digit number and ending with the phase sequence letters A B and C Some special restrictions apply to the splitter objects found under Probes amp 3 phase in the component selection menu ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 53 SINTEF Introductory Manual Connecting splitter objects together on the 3 phase side or with connections on the 1 phase side is permitted earlier it was illegal but transposition disconnection is not allowed If the name NODEA is given to what you know is phase A on the single phase side ATPDraw does not accept this and adds its own A at the end creating the node name NODEAA The general rule is that ATPDraw takes care of the phase sequence alone Best solution is to specify a node name on the 3 phase side only The ATP data file created by ATPDraw from the circuit in Fig 3 32 b is shown below 54 BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Tuesday 30 C A Bonneville Power Administration program 2 002 C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 199
282. p www eeug org Download from secure password protected web site of the European EMTP ATP Users Group Association http www eeug org files secret Download from secure password protected web sites of the Japanese ATP User Group nttp alpha kisarazu ac jp secure or http pels pwr eng osaka u ac jp atp restricted Download from the password protected FTP file server at Michigan Technological University in Houghton USA http www ee mtu edu atp ftp html Please contact the regional user group to acquire passwords to access these sites Passwords are changed regularly 2 3 Hardware requirements for ATPDraw ATPDraw requires moderate CPU power and memory It runs even on a slow Pentium 100 MHz 32 MB PC with acceptable speed A standard Pentium PC configuration with min 128 MB RAM 256 MB under Windows 2000 and XP 100 MB free hard disk space and XVGA graphics is sufficient to execute ATPDraw and other ATP programs 2 4 Program installation The atpdraw subfolder under the above secure servers contains a zip compressed archive atpdraw3x zip a short installation guide and the latest patch file Gf any Following a successful download of the distribution kit perform the next operations 1 Copy the atpdraw3x zip file into a TEMP directory and unzip it 2 Run the program setup exe The installation process will be assisted by a standard Install Shield Wizard 3 Specify a destination directory for ATPDraw when
283. p of the original The fencing polygon is now a rectangle The pasted group is moveable so you can click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag to a desired position Click the left mouse button on open space to put the group in the position shown in Fig 3 16 I L Only the enclosing polygon is drawn during a move U is operation The objects are drawn when the mouse button is released If you misplaced the group you can mark it again Fig 3 16 Move a group with Edit Select group Undo and Redo facilities are also available on the main menu Edit 44 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Wagon You can now paste a second copy of the diode RLC group into the circuit Since the duplicate facility has already copied the group to the clipboard you can just select the Paste option from the Edit menu by using the mouse or pressing Ctrl V or selecting the Paste icon from the Toolbar The pasted group is drawn on top of the original one enclosed by a rectangle Click on this group with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 3 17 ite Fig 3 17 Fig 3 18 As part of the connection between the rectifier bridge and the load a small resistor is included in Fig 3 2 The resistor is included to demonstrate the option of using a small resistor for current measurement purposes Select a resistor in the component selection menu then click on the resistor with the left mouse button hold
284. pecified disk file Inserts a circuit from file into the active circuit window Saves the selected objects of the active circuit to a disk file Cancels the last edit operation Cancels the last undo command Copies the selected objects to the Clipboard and deletes them from the circuit window The objects can later be pasted into the same or other circuit windows Copies the selected objects to the Clipboard Inserts the objects in the Clipboard into the circuit window Copies the selected objects to the Clipboard and then inserts them into the circuit Enables the user to select and move a component or node text label The mouse cursor type will change to a pointing hand BERRA IF mA SSES 66 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual Redraws all objects in the active circuit window Selects all objects in the active circuit window Enables the user to select a group of objects by specifying a polygon shaped region in the active circuit window The mouse cursor style will turn to a pointing hand to indicate this mode of operation To close the region and unlock the mouse press the right mouse button Enlarges the objects by increasing the current zoom factor by 20 percent Diminishes the objects by reducing the current zoom factor by 20 percent Rotates the selected objects 90 degrees counter clockwise This operation can also be performed by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected region Flips the sele
285. phase voltage V ANGLUM angle of phase A stator voltage deg Manual Specify stator current in the d q and O system Specify rotor current inn all coils OMEGM initial mechanical speed mech rad sec or unit THETAM initial pos of the rotor elec rad QULDUL TQOUT 1 air gap torque 2 1 d axis common flux 3 2 d axis magnetization current OMOUT 1 rotor shaft speed in rad sec 2 1 G axis common flux 3 2 g axis Magnelization current THOUT checked rotor position in mech rad CURR checked all physical coil currents Node Stator 3 phase armature output terminal M NODE arr gap tTourque mode FieldA Pos terminal Of exitation rotor coil the other coils are grounded FieldB Neg terminal of exitation rotor coil BUSM LOrque source node for automatic initialization BUSF field source node for automatic initialization Neut Neutral point of Y coupled stator coils The final section of the Help file describes the equivalent electrical network of the mechanical network for torque representation Shaft mass moment of inertia lt Capacitance lkg m2 lt gt 1 Farad Shaft section spring constant lt gt Inverse inductance 1 Nm rad 1 Henry Shaft friction viscous damping lt Conductance 1 Nm rad s 1 ohm Angular speed lt gt Voltage 1 rad s 1 Volt 1 Nm amp 1 Amp 1 rad 1 Coulomb Torque lt gt Current Angle lt Charge OOOO Cl J1 C2 32 R1
286. ple TACS controlled switch o Measuring switch o Statistic and systematic switches ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 103 I NT EF Reference Manual Sources o AC and DC sources 3 phase AC source Ungrounded AC and DC sources o Ramp sources o Surge sources o TACS controlled sources Machines o Type 59 synchronous machine o Universal machines type 1 3 4 6 and 8 Transformers o Single phase and 3 phase ideal transformer o Single phase saturable transformer o 3 phase two or three winding saturable transformer o 3 phase two winding saturable transformer 3 leg core type of high homopolar reluctance o BCTRAN Automatic generation of pch file 1 3 phases 2 3 windings Auto transformers Y and D connections with all possible phase shifts External nonlinear magnetizing inductance s supported MODELS o Under MODELS the user can select a model component either by specifying a sup file or a mod file If a mod file is selected the corresponding sup file required by ATPDraw is created automatically if the model is recognized successfully A mod file is a text file in the MODELS language The mod file must have a name equal to the name of the model The following restrictions apply when ATPDraw reads a mod file Not allowed with indexed input output or data variables Names of all input output and data variables must be less than 6 characters Only input output data and variables declared in front of TIMEST
287. plied by K TACS Simple derivative transfer function High pass TACS First order high pass filter 4 9 10 4 TACS devices The following TACS Devices are supported in ATPDraw ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 121 I NT EF Reference Manual Freq sensor 50 DEVICESO TACS type Frequency sensor 88 98 or 99 Relay switch 51 DEVICE51 TACS type Relay operated switch 88 98 or 99 Level switch 52 DEVICE52 TACS type Level triggered switch 88 98 or 99 Trans delay 53 DEVICES TACS type Transport delay 88 98 or 99 Pulse delay 54 DEVICES 4 TACS type Pulse delay 88 98 or 99 User def nonlin 56 DEVICE5S6 TACS type Point by point non linearity 88 98 or 99 Multi switch 57 TACS Multiple open close switch Cont integ 58 DEVICESO SE TACS type Controlled integrator 88 98 or 99 Simple deriv 59 DEVICES Sp TACS type Simple derivative 88 98 or 99 Sample_track 62 DEVICE62 a TACS type Sample and track 88 98 or 99 Inst min max 63 DEV LCE GS ra TACS type Instantaneous 88 98 or 99 minimum maximum Min max track 64 DEVICE64 N TACS type Minimum maximum tracking 88 98 or 99 Acc count 65 DEVICEOS st TACS type Accumulator and counter 88 98 or 99 Rms meter 66 DEVICE66 TACS type RMS value of the sum of input 88 98 or 99 signals 4 9 10 5 Initial conditions Dp SS T E E di SS E E Input IF 60 DEVICE60 TACS type Input IF component 88 98 or 99 Signal select
288. pressed the object is added to the current selection group On object node Begins to draw a connection Move the mouse to the end node left click to place right to cancel In open area of the circuit window Unselects object Right simple click In open area of the circuit window Opens the Component selection menu or Cancels the connection made 1f connection draw mode has been activated earlier On object node Pops up the Node data window On unselected object Opens the Component dialog box If Shift key is pressed simultaneously opens the circuit window Shortcut menu On selected object s Rotates object s If Shift key is pressed simultaneously opens the circuit window Shortcut menu Left click and hold On object Moves the object or selected group of objects On node Resizes connection it is often necessary to select connection first In open area of the circuit window Draws a rectangle for group selection Objects inside the rectangle are becoming member of the group when the mouse button is released Left double click On object node Performs the Node data window On selected or unselected single object Performs the Component dialog box On selected group of objects Performs an Open Group dialog box In open area of the circuit window Starts the group selection facility Click left to create an enclosing polygon click right to close Objects inside the polygon become a group 3 3 Edit operations
289. printed to the LIS lw Plotted output M Extremal values files This Option controls ATP S I misc data parameter IOUT MemSave M Extra printout control Plot freq Saving frequency of the simulation data to the pl4 iM Auto detect simulation errors SOD output file A value of 5 means Dee 1000 for example that every fifth time step will be written to the Nich Deeg Thais opti n controls M KILL CODE D ATP s 1 misc data parameter E IPLOT 0 IT o t ii E o Fig 4 15 Output request tab Plotted output If checked ATPDraw sets the 1 misc data parameter ICAT 1 in the ATP input file which results in a pl4 output file MemSave Controls the dumping of EMTP memory to disk at the end of simulation if START AGAIN request is specified If checked indicates memory Saving Auto detect simulation errors If this option is selected ATPDraw will analyze the output LIS file of ATP following the completion of the simulation If the specified trigger string is found the corresponding section of the file is displayed in a Notepad window This feature helps the user to recognize the simulation errors warnings generated by ATP during the time step loop or input data interpretation The string or strings which makes this function work are user selectable and activating at least Error and Kill code are highly recommended ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 71 I NT EF Reference Manual Printout Netw
290. prompted It is wise to avoid using directory name including space E g C Program Files is not recommended Install the program into a root directory e g D ATPDraw3 If you are not allowed to install programs outside Program Files let the Wizzard to install ATPDraw into this folder Note that m such a case special care is needed when setting environmental variables for ATP 4 The installation process will be completed after creating a new shortcut for ATPDraw under Start Programs ATPDraw When you start ATPDraw3 x first time it will create the necessary system sub folders ATP BCT GRP LCC MOD Project under the main program folder If you install ATPDraw first time skip points 5 and 6 20 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ee 5 Copy the existing files in the USP MOD and Project folders of the earlier ATPDraw version into the new folders Even if you do not have your own USP objects it is strongly advised to create an empty USP sub folder Lack of it projects with embedded USP objects received from another user will not run properly Standard objects are stored in a single file called ATPDraw scl thus no separate SUP and TAC folders are needed in version 3 and above 6 Copy ATPDraw ini of the previous version 2 x or 3 x into the system folder of the new ATPDraw installation This way you can preserve the A7P Edit Commands and many other program settings if you modified default values earlier 7 D
291. pty space of the desktop and select New Shortcut then browse and select ATPDraw exe Click right on the just created icon and select Properties Specify the Target properties of the new shortcut as the full path of the program including the project file name e g c atpdraw atpdraw exe 26 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ee mycir adp and the Start in parameter as the project file directory e g c atpdraw project 2 7 How to get help ATPDraw offers a standard Windows help file system This file provides help on all windows and menus in ATPDraw and assists in building up a circuit Several links between help pages and a relatively large index register for searching text or phrases are also available A Help button 1s attached to all circuit objects which shows a brief overview of the meaning of each parameter Modification and extension of these help files with users own remarks are also possible using the built in Help Editor m the Tools menu 2 7 1 Help from the author of ATPDraw The author of the program is also available for questions from ATPDraw users but is only responsible to Bonneville Power Administration and Pacific Engineering Corporation Address Dr Hans Kr H idalen SINTEF Energy Research 7465 Trondheim NORWAY http www energy sintef no E mail Hans Hoidalen elkraft ntnu no Phone 47 73594225 Fax 47 73594279 The ATPDraw Web page is maintained at address http www ee
292. r 3 phase 2 winding saturable transformer 3 leg core type of high homopolar reluctance BCTRAN 1 3 phases 2 3 windings Auto transformers Y and D connections MODELS Input output and Data variables of MODELS code are recognized automatically Corresponding support file for the model is automatically created Type 94 Thevenin Norton Iterative objects are supported TACS Coupling to circuit object helps in hybrid simulations Transfer functions General Laplace transfer function with or without limits Integral Derivative first order Low and High Pass transfer functions Fortran statements General Fortran statement single line expression Simplified Math statements or Logical operators Sources DC AC PULSE RAMP TACS devices All devices except type 55 Initial condition for TACS objects type 77 User specified objects Users can create new objects using Data Base Modularization and Include Frequency components Harmonic sources for Harmonic Frequency Scan studies Single and 3 phase frequency dependent loads in CIGRE format Single phase RLC element with frequency dependent parameters ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 29 SINTEF 3 Introductory Manual ATPDraw for Windows 3 5 N 31 SINTEF reur Beant This part of the user s manual gives the basic information on how to get started with ATPDraw The Introductory Manual starts with the explanation of how to operate windows and mouse in ATPDraw The manual
293. ran folder The default folder for BCTRAN multi phase multi winding linear transformer models This folder will contain bet files ATPDraw Bctran data intermediate atp pch and plas tides View ATP Two groups of options can be specified in the View ATP page These are the Default view options and the Default ATP settings View ATP The Edit options button opens the View Options dialog which enables you to specify view options to apply as default to all new circuit windows Available options are described in section 4 2 3 9 Default view options Note that all circuit windows maintain their own set of view options and only the new circuit windows you open will use the options specified here To change the view options of an existing circuit Edit settings window select the Options item in the View menu section 4 2 3 9 Default ATP settings Fig 4 35 Setting default view and ATP options The Edit settings button calls the ATP settings dialog described in section 4 2 4 1 of this manual ATP settings specified here will be applied as default to all new project files Note that all circuits have their own settings stored together with the objects in the project files The settings specified here will only be used by the new circuits you create To customize ATP settings of an existing project select the Settings item in the ATP menu or press F3 function key ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 91 I NT EF Refe
294. rated ATP file for this 750 kV example circuit is shown next BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW July Monday 1 2002 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 SDUMMY XYZ000 C dT gt lt Tmax gt lt Xopt gt lt Copt gt A ESO E 500 3 O O 1 O O 1 O C d 2 3 4 5 6 E 8 C 34567890123456789012345607890123456789012345607890123456078901234560789012345607890 198 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt x lt L X lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 SLG A 2 0 Xx0008 1 300 0 x0012Cx0014C 5 180 0 XO012AX0014A 5 180 0 X0012BX0014B 5 180 0 x0012CX0014C 150 0 XO012AX0014A 150 0 X0012BX0014B 150 0 X0022CX0021C 5 300 0 X0022AX0021A 5 300 0 X0022BX0021B 5 300 0 X0022CX0021C 150 0 X0022AX0021A 150 0 X0022BX0021B 150 0 RECVC 20 6 53 0 RECVA 20 6 53 0 RECVB 20 6 53 0 x0014Cx0017C Gen 200 0 XOO014AX0017A 22 200 0 X0014BX0017B 2 200 0 SENDC XX0008 10 2 53 0 SENDA XX0008 ds JES 0 SENDB XX0008 Sek Ke O SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC LIN750 2 LIB TRAN1B TRANIC TRAN1A TRAN2B TRAN2C TRAN2A SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC LIN750_1 LIB LN1C LN1A LN1B TRANIC TRANIA TRANIB SINCLUDE D ATPDRAW3 LCC LIN750_ 3 LIB TRAN2A TRAN2B TRAN2C TRAN3A
295. ration the Modified text in the status bar will disappear Any operation undone can be redone Since only a limited number of buffers are allocated you are never guaranteed to undo all modifications For example if the number of undo redo buffers is set to 10 default and eleven successive modifications to the circuit are made the first modification can no longer be undone and the modified state will not change until you save the Circuit Selects the background color of circuit windows The color list provides available system colors but you may customize your own from the Windows standard Color dialog displayed by the Custom button The current color selection is shown in the box to the right of the Custom button Holds the name and path of the text editor program to use for editing ATP files e g notepad exe or wordpad exe If no program is specitied the Ticld is empty the e tee Text editor will be used Note that the program specified here must accept a filename on the command line otherwise the ATP file will not be automatically loaded by the editor Holds the ATP program command which is executed by the run ATP command or F2 key at the top of the ATP menu A batch file is suggested as deiault funATP S 0at FOr tae Salford TUNATE W bet for the Watcom and runATP G bat for the MingW32 GNU versions Watcom GNU versions can also be executed directly as WATDIR TPBIGW EXE DISK r or SGNUDIRSTPBIGG EXE DISK s r where
296. rcuit windows 4 2 1 2 Open This menu performs a Windows standard Open dialog box shown in Fig 4 3 In this window the user can select a project file and load it into the ATPDraw Short key Ctr O Open Project Look in Ss a ol Sale 21x Modified RE el Exa _1 adp AKB ADP File el En 10 odp 11KB ADP File el Exa_2 adp SKB ADP File el Exa_3 adp AKB ADP File el En d odp SKB ADP File el En Ab odp IKE ADP File el Exe Sado SKB ADP File el Exa_6 adp IKB ADP File Stross Teda oro ADD Cil 12 1 01 5 45 PM 12 1 01 5 46 PM 12 1 01 5 45 PM 12 1 01 5 45 PM 12 1 01 5 45 PM 12 1 01 5 45 PM 12 1 01 5 45 PM 12 1 01 5 45 PM 190749 09 CAC Cok Ei File name Exa_1 adp Files of type Project file C odp sl Cancel Fig 4 3 Open file window Win9x style 58 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual ATPDraw can read both circuit cir files created by an earlier version of the program and project files adp When opening a project file ATPDraw first unzips the files e g ib mod alc bct or sup files belong to the project and store them in the specified folders If a folder name specified in the project file 1s unknown the default folder will be used If a file already exists on the target location with a different creation date time ATPDraw lets the user to choose which file to keep This Open Save dialog box is used for several different selections in the main menu An alternati
297. rence Manual 4 2 6 5 Save Options Saves program options into the ATPDraw ini This file is normally located in the program installation directory and can be used to store default options and settings Description of variables in the ATPDraw ini file is given in Appendix 4 2 7 Window The Window menu contains options for activating or rearranging circuit windows and showing or hiding the Map window window aa Tile Cascade Arrange loans Map Window ha 1 Exa_1 cir 2 Eve dr Fig 4 36 Supported options on the Window menu 3 Exa_3 cir Tile The Tile command arranges the circuit windows horizontally in equal size on the screen To activate a circuit click the title bar of the window The active circuit window is marked by a symbol in front of the circuit file name Cascade The Cascade command rearranges the circuit windows so that they overlap such a way that the title bar remains visible To activate a circuit click the title bar of the window Arrange Icons The Arrange Icons command arranges the icons of minimized circuit windows so that they are evenly spaced and don t overlap 4 2 7 1 Map Window The Map Window command Shortcut M displays or hides the map window The map window is a stay on top style window meaning that it will always be displayed on top of all other windows You can show or hide the map by pressing the M character of the keyboard to enable it when you need it or hide it when it conceal
298. right mouse button will bring up a special input dialog box called Line Cable Data dialog box with two sub pages Model and Data where the user selects between the supported System type o Overhead Line LINE CONSTANTS o Single Core Cables CABLE PARAMETERS or CABLE CONSTANTS o Enclosing Pipe CABLE PARAMETERS or CABLE CONSTANTS and Model type of the line cable o Bergeron Constant parameter KCLee or Clark models o PI Nominal PI equivalent short lines o JMarti Frequency dependent model with constant transformation matrix o Noda Frequency dependent model o Semlyen Frequency dependent simple fitted model The Line Cable Data dialog box completely differs from the Component dialog box of other components therefore it is described in chapter 5 3 of the Advanced Manual LCC 6 phase Line Cable LCC 7 phase Line Cable 5 7 phase LCC object LCC amp phase Line Cable i 8 phase LCC object ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 111 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 4 4 Read PCH file ATPDraw is able to read the pch output files obtained by external run of ATP EMTP s LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONTSTANTS supporting routines Selecting the Read PCH file menu item the program performs an Open Punch File dialog in which the available pch files are listed If you select a file and click Open ATPDraw attempts to read the file and if succeed in creates a lib file in the USP folder in the Data Base Module format of AT
299. rmats If the Include characteristic check box is selected on the Attributes page a disk file referenced in the nclude field will be used in the ATP input file If the nonlinear characteristic is given in Irms Urms ATPDraw will calculate the flux current values automatically and use them in the final ATP input file The BCTRAN transformer component provides direct support of BCTRAN transformer matrix modeling The user is requested to specify input data open circuit and short circuit factory test data in BCTRAN supporting routine format then ATPDraw performs an ATP run to generate a punch file that is inserted into the final ATP file describing the circuit The user can specify where the factory test was performed and where to connect the excitation branch The excitation branch can be linear or non linear In the latter case the nonlinear inductors must be connected to the winding closest to the iron core as external elements The BCTRAN dialog and the Component dialog box of the Saturable 3 phase GENTRAFO differ in many ways from the input data window of other objects A more comprehensive description of the input parameters is given in chapters 5 6 and 5 7 1 of the Advanced Manual respectively ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 115 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 9 MODELS Besides the standard components the user can create his her own models using the MODELS simulation language in ATP 4 ATPDraw supports only a simplified usag
300. rogram of ATPDraw and this batch files has a single line run77 exe tatpdir tpbig exe PARAMS both 1 r If an additional S is seen at the end of the ATP executable TPBIG EXE in your installation you have to modify the RunATP S BAT accordingly You may find inserting some optional commands into the batch file as well E g echo off run77 exe Satpdir Stpbigs exe PARAMS both 1 r pause waits for user interaction before the DOS box of ATP closed optional del dum bin delete temporary files created by ATP optional del tmp del tmp 1 The Install Shield wizard of the annual ATP program ditribution for EEUG members makes these settings automatically ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 25 SINTEF installation Manual RunATP_S BAT properties should be set as shown next Program Cmd line Drive Path RunATP_S BAT Batch file DBOS ON BAT Run Normal Window Close on exit M Screen Usage Window Because Salford ATP is running under DBOS a single line batch file DBOS ON DAT must be executed before TPBIG EXE is launched The corresponding single line command of the DBOS ON BAT file referenced in the Properties Batch file should be as follows Drive dbos3 5 dbos page 800000 800000 limits DBOS to use SMB extended memory 2 6 3 Calling PlotXY PCPlot or ATP Analyzer After creating the Run PlotXY and or Run PCPLOT commands using the ATP Edit Commands submenu selet Current PL4 as Parameter
301. routines DATA BASE MODULE and BCTRAN The BCTRAN model requires easily available input data only like the name plate data of a generator step up transformer shown below Voltage rating Nuel Noe 132 15 kV Winding connection Ynd11 Power rating 155 MVA Excitation losses 74 kW Excitation current 0 3 2 67A Short circuit losses 461 kW Short circuit reactance 14 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 171 SINTEF Advanced Manual The zero sequence excitation current and losses are approximately equal to the positive sequence measurements because the presence of delta connected secondary winding Taking that the nonlinear magnetizing inductance is going to be added to the model as an external element only the resistive component of the excitation current 0 05 must entered in the BCTRAN input file shown next BEGIN NEW DATA CASE ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN SERASE 2 50 0 05 155 74 0 05 155 74 022 1 76 21 HVBUSASTRPNTHVBUSBSTRPNTHVBUSCSTRPNT 2 EK 0 LVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSBLVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSB LZ 461 IE ER Lobs 14 0 Loos 4 Ab BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK BLANK Running this file through ATP will produce an output punch file that can be used as input for the Data Base Module DBM run The process of creating a DBM file 1s certainly the most difficult part of adding new circuit objects to ATPDraw The input file to the DBM supporting routine of ATP begins with a header declaration followed by the circuit description The ATP Rule Book
302. rrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrren 158 Sd Sae E E 158 sr Ger Uae e E 160 4 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AE MS LES eR Ce TELCO N ee nee ee ee 164 574 ER EE reet EE 165 5 8 Creating new circuit objects in ATPDraw 0 ieee eeccccesccccesscccesscccesscccesescceesscceesssenees 166 5B1 Creating EE eier 166 5 8 2 Creating a user specified nonlinear transformer model 171 6 EE EE 175 6 1 Switching in 500 kV system Exa E 177 6 2 TACS controlled induction machine x _4 ddp ccccssssssssecscsccccccccccsseecececeessssssseees 180 6 3 Usage of the Library and Reference objects Exa 3 oggdnl 184 6 4 Modeling an HVDC station Exa_6 adp and Exa oeaodnl 186 6 5 Switching studies using JMarti LCC objects Sateen ee 190 03l Dai modelora 500 kV lipe Ea Vad aeniei iii 190 6 5 2 JMarti model OF a 750 KV UNC occicsisicedivssscossddsewosinccesensdiasavanconeseedsaneousudatesssanorseetoaces 196 6 5 3 Line to ground fault and fault tripping transients Exa _7a adp 00000000000000000000 198 6 6 Using MODELS controlled switches DC68 DAT Exa Roadnl 201 6 7 Lightning overvoltage study in a 400 kV substation Exa 9 ddD ccccccccccccccsssessssteeeeees 207 6 8 Simulating transformer inrush current transients cccceseeceecececececeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeees 213 6 8 1 Energization of a 400 132 18 kV auto transformer Exa JOUoagdnl 213 6 8 2 Energization of a 132 15 kV generator step up transformer Exa _11 adp 219
303. s Relative permeability of the insulating material outside the conductor eps ins Relative permittivity of the insulating material outside the conductor Total radius Total radius of the cable outer insulator ml Sheath Armour On Turn on optional Sheath and Armour conductors Position Vertical and horizontal positions relative to ground surface and to a user selectable reference line for single core cables 5 3 3 Model and Data page settings for Enclosing Pipe type cables This selection specifies a cable system consisting of single core SC coaxial cables enclosed by a conducting pipe referred as Class B type in the ATP Rule Book 3 The cable system might be located underground or in the air The System type settings are identical with that of the Class A type cables see in sub section 5 3 2 When the button Cable Constants is checked the shunt conductance and capacitance options are disabled and a new check box Ground controls the grounding condition of the pipe Transposition of the cables within the pipe is available via the Snaking button Cascade PI options can be specified similarly to SC cables see Fig 5 25 For cables with enclosing pipe the following Pipe data are required System type Enclosing Fipe Phases 3 Number of cables D Standard data Rho ohm m 1 fo Freq init Hz Don Length m Dog Fipe data Depth m Rin m i mm Rout m Bins m 2 5 il Rh
304. s 14VCONTA Pe Bs 60 ae 98VB 2 0 STGB 1 0 VD 2 0 SSC 2 0 S1GC 1 0 VD 2 0 98STGC VCONTC GT VTRI 98VA 2 0 SIGA 1 0 VD 2 0 98SIGB VCONTB GT VTRI 98SIGA VCONTA GT VTRI 98VD lig C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 3436789012345678 90123456 690123456 890123456 690123456 890123456 690123456 690 182 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt X lt L X lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 NEUT 1 E6 2 BUSMG 13589 1 BUSMG ba EG 3 BUSMG BUSMS 1 E 6 1 BUSA VA s001 il BUSB VB 001 1 BUSC VC Oe 1 BUSA NEUT 1 E4 0 BUSB NEUT 1 E4 0 BUSC NEUT 1 E4 O SWITCH C lt n 1lo lt n 2 gt x Telose gt lt Top Tde gt x Ie gt lt Vf CLOP gt lt type gt SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt P gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14BUSMS 1 374 03889 lg B 5 60VC 0 60VB 0 60VA 0 C Next comes Universal Machines 19 UM 00 0 BLANK general UM specification 3 1 L331 BUSMG 2 vl ees 60 C Magnetization inductances 182 840692 0160 2 fi G53 98 163 0160 C Stator coils BUSA NEUT 1 73 5587 095 0005BUSB NEUT 1 SE P 095 0005BUSC NEUT 1 154 1034 C Rotor coils OTS 0004 1 169 67239 OTS 0004 1 19 285 BLANK UM INITIAL 2BUSMG 182 840692 3BUSMG 182 840692 OUTPUT VA VB VC BLANK TACS BL
305. s C gt lt VRAT gt lt R gt gt lt PHASE gt lt PHASE2 gt lt PHASES gt 1 154 729872 H BUSAL BUSAH BUSBL BUSBH BUSCL BUSC 2 16471072559 L BUSA L BUSB L BUSC 3 18 T BUSAT BUSCT BUSBT BUSAT BUSCT BUSB C Short circuit test data cards C lt gt lt PIJ gt lt ZPOSIJ gt lt SPOS gt lt ZZEROIJ gt lt SZERO gt lt gt lt gt 1 2 TiO p32 EE 250 33 4150145 SS Er 2 13 Lope G La nolb 2o Us Gle 39a 1637 Zoe 0 A a lego 24 200 24 200 Or ah BLANK card ending short circuit test data SPUNCH BLANK card ending BCTRAN data BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD The nonlinear magnetizing branch of the 400 132 18 kV auto transformer is represented by delta coupled Type 96 hysteretic inductors in this study The flux current characteristic of these inductors can be obtained by means of the HYSDAT supporting routine of ATP Fig 6 38 shows the hysteresis loop of the Itype 1 material of ATP and of the magnetic core of the transformer 1 5 PSI p u Fig 6 38 The shape of the hysteresis loop of the transformer magnetic core compared with the material type 1 of ATP s HYSDAT supporting routine The output file generated by the HYSDAT supporting routine is listed below In this example the file is given a name HYSTR400 L1B and stored in the USP folder C lt t gt Cards punched by Support routine on 21 Jul 02 14 08 23 lt t t gt C HYSTERESIS C SERASE eG
306. s 2002 2598S s007 L 0 O 1XX0014XxX0012 l s 2004 Seck Holz 1 Q O LXAXOOLGTOP 10 2002 ck 008 L 0 O i XX0019 SH 600 2595 so ak O 1XX0020XX0016 lUs 2002 2598S 007 1 Q O XX0014 AQ O XX0014 bos 2005 O 1XX0026XX0171 lOs 200 cb 008 L 0 O XX0 028 XX0020 lOs 2002 2 9B5 Ule 1L 0 O 1X0032AX0033A 20s 690 2s4E5 Said Q O 2X0032BX0033B Ze 00 259ER5 3s LH O 3X0032CX0033C O XX0028 AQ O SSES 208 600 AES co O XX0028 Loe 005 O 1XX0040XX0179 lOs 200 k 008 1 0 O 1XX0042XX0040 lOs 2002 ck 007 L 0 O 1XX0044XX0042 lOs 2004 boer lt U1e 2 Q O XX0044 AQ O XX0044 loa i005 O 1XX0054XX0183 lOs 2002 2909B3 00g 2 0 O 1XX0056XX0026 lOs 2004 2 983 007 1 Q 0 LIGHT 400 O 1XX0000XX00534 lOs 2002 Gerben 007 L 0 O 1XX0002XX0056 lOs 200 2739B5 Ube 1 A O ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 209 SINTEF 1XX0004 1XX0069 1X0073A 2X00 735 EE SC 1XX0075 1X0078A 2X0078B 3xX00 76C 1X0257A 2X0257B 3A0Z5 76 1X0082A 2X0082B 3X0082C 1X0271A JAKOL 715 S302 7 LG 1X0086A 2X008 6B 3X0086C 1X0088A 2X0088B 3X0066C 1X0074A ZX00 745 3X0074C 1X0074A 2X0074B SIKO TAC x0271A X02 71B KOZ TLC 1X0269A ZX0 2698 320269C 1X0211A ZX0 LIB 3X07 LA EE 1X0104A ZX0 LOGE 320 L040 1X0106A Z2X0 LOGE 3X01060C 1X0108A a2 XO LOGE 340 LOCC 1X0105A 2X 0 LODE 3X0 LO SC 99S 1CB 210 XX0060 XX00604 SS HE XX0064 XOO074A X0074B X0074C XX0036 x02114
307. s are needed to protect the line against switching overvoltages especially when the insulation level is rather low like in case of line uprating One or more of the following measures could be applied to reduce these overvoltages mounting surge arresters at the line terminals and along the line application of circuit breaker with closing resistors synchronizing the breaker operations at line energization and reclosing limiting or eliminating the trapped charge at dead time of the 3 phase reclosing The influence of the latter two measures to the switching overvoltage distribution is analyzed in this example The use of the master slave feature of ATP s statistical switches 1s also introduced The EMTP model shown in Fig 6 46 has been elaborated for a line upgrading feasibility study to analyze the switching performance of a 400 kV compact line The clearances the location of the phase and ground wires and the length of the composite insulator strings are assumed known in this example Fig 6 46 ATPDraw circuit for the statistical switching study Exa_12 adp The investigated line has been divided into four sections each of them represented by an LCC JMarti object To set up the initial conditions of the line easily a 3 phase voltage source is connected to the line at right having voltage amplitude equal to the desired trapped charge This source 1s disconnected before the operation of the statistical switches to make the lin
308. s include components standard user specified MODELS and TACS connections and relations The resolution of a circuit is 5000x5000 pixels screen points much higher than your screen normally would support Consequently the circuit window displays only a small portion of the circuit To move around in the circuit you use the window scrollbars or you drag the view rectangle of the map window to another position You may also want to use the zoom options in the view menu in order to zoom in or out on objects From the components menu you select components to insert into the circuit This menu pops up when you click the right mouse button in an empty space of the circuit window To start drawing a new connection click the left mouse button on a component node or the end point of an existing connection An inverted connection line will then follow the mouse cursor until you finish the drawing operation by clicking the left mouse button again or canceling it by clicking the right mouse button Relations are drawn in much the same way except that you have to select the TACS Draw relation option in the components menu to start the relation drawing operation You can then draw multiple relations until you click the right mouse button Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements and are drawn as blue connections but have no influence on component connectivity To select and move an object simply press and hold down the le
309. s one step back The group object single icon replacement of objects acts as the connection between the layers and transfers data between them 4 2 2 16 Comment Opens a comment dialog box see Fig 4 9 where three text lines can be entered These comments serve as a commentary section for the circuit in the header section of the atp file Selecting the Comment Line option checked in the View menu will display these comments at the ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 65 I NT EF Reference Manual bottom of the circuit window as well This menu also enables the user to change the circuit comment if it already exists Circuit Comments Ei Example 1 Your first circuit Rectifier bridge OK Fig 4 9 Circuit comments dialog box 4 2 3 View View This menu provides options for displaying and controlling the visibility of Toolbar user interface and circuit window objects The menu items are shown in Fig vw Status Bar 4 10 vw Comment Line oom In foom Out onm E Retresh R Set Circuit Font Options Fig 4 10 View menu 4 2 3 1 Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar at the top of the main window The toolbar contains speed buttons for the most frequently used menu options Available toolbar icon are as follows Opens an empty circuit window Loads a circuit file into a new window Saves the objects in the active circuit window to disk Saves the objects in the active circuit window to a s
310. s vital circuit window information The map window displays the entire contents of the active circuit The circuit window itself is represented by a map rectangle and the circuit objects are drawn as black dots Fig 4 37 Map window When you press and hold down the left mouse button in the map rectangle you can move it around in the map window When the mouse button is released the circuit window displays the 92 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual part of the circuit defined by the new rectangle size and position and the circuit window scrollbars are repositioned to reflect the updated circuit view If any circuit objects are currently selected when you reposition the map rectangle selected objects will also be moved and their relative position retained in the new window This functionality can be used to quickly move a collection of objects a relatively large distance 4 2 8 Help The Help menu contains options for displaying the on line help of ATPDraw and the copyright and version information Help Help Topics On Main vim n About ATPDraw Fig 4 38 Help menu ATPDraw s on line help is a standard Windows dialog which provides help on all Main menu options and also gives a short introduction how to build up a circuit 4 2 8 1 Help Topics The Help Topics command invokes the MS Windows standard help dialog box Several links and a relatively large index register support the users i
311. s yates E E 45 66 TOONS Mle E 85 TEPLOT e E 13 transformer mm0sbh 213 SINTEF PANS NOTIONS sa eres deceeeteoees dose sceateiaices 104 115 transposition eeesssessssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 106 110 transposition obtect 52 tapezoidal TUNG eiert eege 10 U e re EE 44 61 universal machine 000 000000 114 160 180 ntransposed wcse siedacecovasedsonctsdededeesesanctenet 110 user specified component 29 79 105 y EE 75 135 246 Appendix Veri DUON serein E 138 View options 0 cccecccccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeseseeeeees 69 W WV Sa AE 13 WWW WWW CEUS OTO oo apeeeeereeicuesieraedisuer 20 WWW ETDID Org 19 Z TT 68 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Pees ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 247
312. se node The following transpositions are supported Change the phase sequence from ABC to BCA Change the phase sequence from ABC to CAB Change the phase sequence from ABC to CBA Change the phase sequence from ABC to ACB Handling of transpositions for objects with several 3 phase nodes can be accomplished by specifying a circuit number Kind under Objects Edit Standard Nodes see in 4 2 5 1 3 phase nodes having the same Kind will receive the same phase sequence ABC reference e When attached to a 3 phase node in the circuit this node becomes the master node with phase sequence ABC The other nodes will adapt this setting DEF reference When attached to a 3 phase node in the circuit this node becomes the master node with phase sequence DEF The other nodes will adapt this setting A combination of ABC and DEF references is possible for e g in 6 phase circuits 4 9 2 Branch Linear This sub menu contains linear branch components The name and the icon of linear branch objects as well as a brief description of the components are given next in tabulated form Data parameters and node names to all components can be specified in the Component dialog box see Fig 4 43 which appears if you click on the icon of the component with the right mouse button in the circuit window 106 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual Besse The Help button on the Component dialog boxes calls the Help Viewer in wh
313. so Min Max Data Nodes Fig 5 33 Specify Data parameters Param is set to 0 which means that no variable text string can be assigned to the data value Digit is the maximum number of digits allowed in the ATP input file When high precision is checked Vintage I is enabled and Digits is split in two values for high and low precision 150 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Nanci After you have specified the data values click on the Nodes tab to enter to the node window as shown in Fig 5 34 The Name identifies the node in the Node and Component dialog boxes The name you enter here must be the same as those used in the INPUT and OUTPUT declaration Nodes sections of the mod file The Position field is Pos 1 12 Phases 1 3 the node position on the icon border as shown at yr 2 1 1 y the right The Kind value is the input output type vi 2 3 1 z e of the node Number of Phases 1 3 must be set iczn 1 5 1 DER to 1 for all Models node because only single trip 0 6 l phase nodes are supported Fig 5 34 Specifying Node attributes Supported Kind values for MODELS objects are Os LR 23 6 Ts Gi Output node a Switch status input node Current input node 4 Machine variable input node Voltage input node Da TACS variable tacs Imaginary part of steady state node voltage imssv Imaginary part of steady state switch current imssi Output from other model The Kind parameter of model objec
314. splayed in the status bar at the bottom of the main window when the Status Bar option is activated in the View menu ATPDraw can be in various action modes The normal mode of operation is MODE EDIT in which new objects are selected and data are given to objects Drawing connections brings ATPDraw into CONN END mode and so on ATPDraw s possible action modes are EDIT The normal mode CONN END After a click on a node the action mode turns into CONN END indicating that the program is waiting for a left mouse click to set the end point of a new connection To cancel drawing a connection click the right mouse button or press the ESC key to return to MODE EDIT MOVE LABEL Indicates a text label move Clicking the left mouse button on a text label then holding it down and dragging it enables you to move the label to a new position If the text label is overlapped by a component icon the text label can be moved using Move Label in the Edit menu Then the action mode turns into MOVE LABEL Releasing the mouse at the new text label location the action mode returns to MODE EDIT GROUP Indicates region selection Double clicking the left mouse button in an empty space of the active circuit window enables you to draw a polygon shaped region To end the selection click the right mouse button Any objects within the selected region are marked then for selection To cancel region selection press the Esc key INFO START Indicates the start of a r
315. stallation Manual ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 51 SINTEF PPE 3 6 Three phase circuits Exa_2 adp Both single phase circuits and three phase circuits are available in ATPDraw For 3 phase objects the number of phases is indicated in the selection menu The icon border of the 3 phase objects is generally thick or gray shaded and the icon consists of thick lines from the nodes into the object symbol All three phase nodes have only 5 characters available in the Node data windows ATPDraw adds the extension A B and C at the end of the node name By default the phase sequence is ABC the first data card uses 4 the second B and the last C The only way to change the phase sequence is to use the available transposition objects Transpl Transp4 selectable under Probes amp 3 phase in the component selection menu The current phase sequence is displayed in the bottom of the node input window after an ATP Make Names or Make File As selection has been made The following example illustrates the usage of three phase objects Coupled Fig 3 32 b Equivalent ATPDraw circuit Exa _ 2 adp The circuit shown in Fig 3 32 was built up in the same way as your first circuit You can note that connections between the three phase nodes appear to be thick The circuit contains 3 special objects the already mentioned transposition object in this case from ABC to BCA a splitter object which splits three phase nodes into three singl
316. stored under the MOD folder Ifa mod file was selected ATPDraw interprets the file as shown in Fig 4 63 and creates a support file sup for it If the support file already exists 1 e it has been created manually by the user under the Object Model New sup file or by ATPDraw earlier the new model object appears immediately in the circuit window Le the nformation dialog does not show up Information Ei d Model successtully identified Input 3 Output Data 4 Edit tile No Cancel Fig 4 63 Interpretation of the model The Component dialog box of model objects has a new input section Models below the DATA and NODES attributes as shown in Fig 4 64 This new section has two input fields Model file for locating the model description file and a Use As field for specification of the model name in the USE model AS model name statement of MODELS 116 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual The input output to MODELS the use of the model and interfacing it with the rest of the circuit are handled by ATPDraw automatically Model descriptions are written directly in the ATP file instead of using Include Blank lines are removed when inserting the model file in the ATP file The general structure of the MODELS section in the atp input file is shown below MODELS MODELS INPUT IX0001 v U1_ ZNO IX0002 v U2_ ZNO IX0003 v I_ ZNO OUTPUT TRIP A MODEL FLASH 1 Description of t
317. strictions apply Only INPUT OUTPUT and DATA supported in the USE statement Not possible to call other models under USE Exchanging data between models is rather limited see remarks at Kind 8 Not possible to specify HISTORY of DELAY CELLS under USE 4 2 5 6 Edit Model sup file A model object can be edited like any other circuit object If the user clicks on the Objects Model Edit sup file the well known Edit Object dialog box appears with the model object controls Here the user is allowed to customize data and node values icon and help text of the object 4 2 5 7 Edit Model mod file Selecting the Objects Model Edit mod file menu the well known internal text editor of ATPDraw pops up Each model object has a mod file which contains the description of the model This file can be edited inside ATPDraw using the built in Model Editor 84 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 2 6 Tools Items under the Tools menu enable you to edit component icons or help text EE view or edit text files customize several program options and save them to the e aes ATPDraw ini file Fig 4 31 shows the available commands of the Tools menu Options Save Options Fig 4 31 Tools menu 4 2 6 1 Icon Editor Brings up an icon editor shown in Fig 4 32 where the user can edit the icon of the component It can be invoked either from the Edit Component dialog box or by selecting the con Editor option in
318. supporting routine of ATP EMTP Distributed EL Coupled 5i LEC PL Sam bi gt Read PCH file Fig 4 54 Line models with lumped parameters 4 9 4 1 Lumped parameter line models RLC Pi equiv I These line models are simple lumped non symmetric n equivalents of ATP Type 1 2 3 etc branches of ATP RL Coupled 51 These line models are simple lumped non symmetric mutually RL coupled components of Type 51 52 53 etc branches of ATP RLC Sym 51 These line models are symmetric with sequence value input The line models are special applications of the RL coupled line models in ATP The following selections are available on the three pop up menus RLC Pi equiv 1 7 N pI 1 BRANCH Single phase RLC n equivalent phase 7 type 1 RLC Pi equiv 1 LINEPI 2 BRANCH 2 phase RLC z equivalent 2 phase 7 type 1 2 Non symmetric RLC Pi equiv 1 LINEPI 3 BRANCH 3 phase RLC z equivalent 3 phase type 1 3 Non symmetric 3 phase nodes RL Coupled 51 LINERL 2 RANCH 2 phase RL coupled line model 2 phase type 51 52 Non symmetric RL Coupled 51 LINERL 3 BRANCH 3 phase RL coupled line model 3 phase type 51 53 Non symmetric 3 phase nodes 6 phase 7 type 51 56 model Non symmetric Off diagonal R is set to zero RL Sym 31 LINESY 3 i 3 ph type 51 53 with sequence impedance 0 input Symmetric 6 ph a type 51 56 model with sequence impedance 0 input Symmetric ATPDraw for
319. t ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 107 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 3 Branch Nonlinear This menu contains the supported nonlinear resistors and inductors All the objects except the TACS controlled resistor can also have a nonlinear characteristic These attributes can be specified by selecting the Characteristic tab of the Component dialog boxes as shown in Fig 4 44 The nonlinear characteristic of objects can be entered as piecewise linear interpolation The number of data points allowed to enter on the current voltage current flux or time resistance characteristics are specified in the Help file of objects DI Type 99 U I characteristics of nonlinear resistances are assumed symmetrical thus Lm Type 98 0 0 point should not be entered If the saturation curve of a nonlinear Lti Type 93 inductor is symmetrical start with point 0 0 and skip the negative points Ll Type 46 The hysteresis loop of Type 96 reactors is assumed symmetrical so only the GE lower loop of the hysteresis must be entered The last point should be where MON Type 92 the upper and lower curves meet in the first quadrant If you specify a metal MOV Type sph oxide arrester with MOV Type 92 component ATPDraw accepts the R TACS Type 91 current voltage characteristic and performs an exponential fitting in the log log domain to produce the required ATP data format Lit Type 96 init gi Do e Fig 4 53 Nonlinear branch elements RG Type 99 NLINRES Ah BRANCH
320. t gt lt Coot gt 5 E 5 05 500 1 d i iL 0 0 i 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt L gt lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt ref1l gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 XX0031 Tos i 0 NEG SCH i 0 XX0031PO0S Srel 1 POS NEG cht 3 NEG POS SE S VS XX0021 ale 0 VS XX0021 300 0 NEG VA ECH ila 0 VA XX0031 eee I 0 SWITCH Cx nm Te nm 2 gt lt Telose gt lt Top Tde gt lt Te gt lt V CLOP gt lt type gt 11VA XX0031 0 11 XX0031 0 11NEG VA O 11NEG 0 XX0021VA MEASURING 1 SOURCE C lt n 1 gt lt gt lt Ampl gt lt Freq gt lt Phase T0 gt lt Al gt lt SE gt lt TSTART gt lt TSTOP gt 14VS O OTe CU s l INITIAL APOD 75 2NEG la 3POS NEG 150 OUTPUT VS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK 3 5 4 Running the simulation Starting the ATP simulation is supported in ATPDraw in a user friendly way The user just has to press F2 function key to create an ATP input file with the current project file as input and run the simulation The default command that is executed when the user selects run ATP under the ATP menu or when the F2 is pressed can be specified under the Tools Options Preferences tab as it has been described in section 2 6 of the In
321. t nodes can be changed vi CR304 Ok later in the Node dialog box input field Type as shown in Fig 5 35 This window appears when the user clicks on a Type 2 Hel S Model node with the right mouse button Display 4 Useriiamed Fig 5 35 Model node dialog box Note If a model output is used as input for another model the model which produces the output must be USEd before the use of the model that is supplied with this output This can be done by specifying a lower group number for the model with output signals and selecting the Sorting by group number option under ATP Settings Format a icone el EL Sl Model objects also have an icon which represents the Oe Eat Tools Bone object on the screen and an optional help which describes the meaning of parameters If no user supplied help text was given the Help Viewer displays the model definition file mod automatically If you need a help text this feature can be overridden by opening the Help Editor with the button at the right hand side of the dialog box The con Editor appears similarly by clicking on the button Here you can be creative and draw a suitable icon for the new model object as shown in Fig 5 36 When you finished select the Done menu item Fig 5 36 The icon of the new model objects ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 151 SINTEF Advanced Manual The Save or Save As buttons can be used to save the new support file to
322. t number for each phase under Circuit specification of Verify Data dialog The receiving end 1s grounded Mutual sequence AC currents of 1 A with zero phase angle is applied to all phases of the first circuit while the other circuit is open The receiving ends of all phases are grounded Apparently this works only for 6 phase lines b Select PFC For the PFC test the user must specify the power frequency and the base voltage level for scaling of the reactive charging Clicking on OK will result in the generation of a PFC data case called xVerifyF dat and execution of ATP based on the settings of the ATP Command Tools Options Preferences In this case each circuit is tested individually all other phases are left open while a specific circuit is tested The library file describing the electrical model of the line cable is included in a new ATP case an supplied by unity voltage or current sources in order to calculate the steady state short circuit impedances and open circuit reactive line charging The file xVerifyF lis is read by ATPDraw and the short circuit impedances together with the open circuit line charging is calculated in the zero sequence and positive sequence mode The results of the calculations are displayed in Fig 5 31 E Power Frequency results x short circuit impedances and open circuit line charging Circuit ji ohm xo ohm sid ohm x ohm a0 MVA Dal IER 14 01424 O404 O02346 0 0404 1 011 01424 O4046 0 0
323. t of all variable switch closing opening time to LUNIT ITEST Integer Extra random delay 1s added to all switch operations in statistical studies IDIST Integer Select probability distribution of switch 0 zero means Gaussian and 1 means uniform distribution IMAX Integer If 1 printout of extrema to LUNIT 6 for every energization IDICE Integer Use of standard random generator A value of 0 zero implies computer dependent random generator and a value of 1 standard random generator KSTOUT Integer Extra printed LUNIT6 output for each energization NSEED Integer Repeatable MonteCarlo simulations HighResolution On Off Usage of Vintage 1 if possible SortByCard On Off Data file written with BRANCH cards first followed by SWITCH cards and the SOURCE cards SortByGroup On Off The group number given to each object determines the sequence of cards The lowest group number comes first SortByXpos On Off The leftmost object is written first AutoPath On Off Library files are supposed to be located in the USP folder and have the extension When this option 1s enabled the Prefix Suffix option is written to the ATP file AutoError On Off Auto detect LIS file error messages 234 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Appendix AutoErrorCode 0 Default errors to detect Binary format 1 2 4 8 16 31 means that all trigger string is active 1 2 4 8 16 31 ATP Settings ATP Settings x ATP Settings si
324. t produces this output must be USEd before the current model This is done by specifying a lower group number for the model and then select the Sorting by group number option under ATP Settings Format O Output 1 Input signal positive sum up 2 Input signal negative sum up 3 Input signal disconnected necessary only if the node name is user specified Controlled machine node O No control 1 D axis armature current Out 2 0 axis armature current Out 3 Zero sequence armature current Out 4 Field winding current Out 5 D axis damper current Out 6 Current in eddy current winding Out 7 Q ax1is damper current Out 8 Voltage applied to d axis Out 9 Voltage applied to q axis Out 10 Zero sequence voltage Out 11 Voltage applied to field winding Out 12 Total mmf in the machines air gap Out 13 Angle between q and d axis component of mmf Out 14 Electromagnetic torque of the machine Out 15 Not used 16 d axis flux linkage Out 1l7 g axis flux linkage Out 18 Angle mass Out 19 Angular velocity mass Out ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 101 I NT EF Reference Manual 20 Shaft torque mass Out 21 Field voltage In 22 Mechanical power In 4 7 Open Probe dialog box Probes are components for output of node or branch voltages branch current or TACS values and are handled differently than other components you open In the Open Probe dialog you can specify the number of phases of a pro
325. ta is less or equal to 36 Therefore you do not have to click on Add or Delete buttons before pasting ATPDraw uses fixed format 16 character columns to separate the numbers Note Pasting in from a text file with C in the first column is not possible Delete leading C characters first The File section at the bottom of the page contains an nclude field where you can specify the name of a standard text file containing nonlinear characteristic If the Include characteristic button is checked this file will be referenced in the SINCLUDE statement in the ATP file rather than including each of the value pairs from the points table This file must have extension 1ib and be stored in the USP system folder if the Insert Prefix and Suffix cards check box is selected in the ATP Settings Format menu If the file is located outside USP unselect the Prefix and Suffix settings and use the Browse button to specify the complete path to the file The nonlinear characteristic specified by the user can be displayed by clicking on the View button In the View Nonlinearity window Fig 4 45 the min and max axis values are user selectable as well as the use of logarithmic scale if min gt 0 It is also possible to copy the graphic to the Windows clipboard in a metafile format The Add 0 0 check box will add the origo point graphically only Selecting Done will close the nonlinearity display E View Nonlinearity min om mox on IT
326. te yf Exit oe FE Browse uge EEAS Fig 4 24 Specifying your own executable commands When you completed editing the batch job settings click on the Update button and the new commands will be inserted into the ATP menu 78 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual As any other program options the previous settings can be saved to the ATPDraw ini file by using the Tools Save Options command or by selecting the Save options on exit program options on the General page of the Tools Options menu This feature can be used for many different purposes in ATP simulation e g running different ATP versions Salford Watcom GNU MingW32 within ATPDraw running external post processors like TPPLOT PCPlot or PlotX Y or launching any other data assembler 4 2 5 Objects This menu contains options for creating and customizing component support files Support files contain information on data and node values icon and help text Circuit objects in ATPDraw can be either 1 Standard components 4 MODELS components 2 Line Cable LCC components 5 GROUP objects 3 BCTRAN transformer objects 6 User specified USP components Each object has a unique support file which includes all information about the input data and nodes of the object the default values of the input variables the graphical representation of the object and the associated help file Each circuit object has different name internally i
327. ted here gt gt gt gt BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C This comment line here is mandatory SPUNCH MYTRAFO LIB BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK BLANK 172 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Nanci Running the DBM file through ATP will produce a file mytrafo lib that must be stored in the USP folder of ATPDraw KARD 3 3 4 4 10 10 11 11 13 13 L 16 20 20 25 29 KARG 4 6 4 5 5 6 1 7 4 6 2 7 4 5 3 7 5 6 PER 2 8 2 J a SG 2 A 2 A P 2a Ss J F a KEND 8 14 14 8 14 8 814 814 81414 8 814 14 8 RIES sk tah 2 b a RE 2 A tk ft aoa ks l SERASE C lt t t gt Cards punched by Support routine on 2Ze Jan 02 14 10 13 lt tt t gt C ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN C SERASE C 2 30 0 05 ka EE 0205 HOS Z O 2 2 C 1 d E ack HVBUSASTRPNTHVBUSBSTRPNTHVBUSCSTRPNT 9 2 EE LVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSBLVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSB G die 461 14 0 loss 14 0 LDS U I C BLANK SVINTAGE 1 1LVBUSALVBUSC 9121 6157726436 Z2LVBUSBLVBUSA 0 0 9121 6157726436 3LVBUSCLVBUSB 0 0 0 0 91216157 726436 USE AR 1HVBUSASTRPNT 19 966704093183 16716783247242 Z2LVBUSALVBUSC 101 4441679294 0 0 515441471986794 00647606659729 3HVBUSBSTRPNT HA 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 966704093163 16716783247242 4LVBUSBLVBUSA 0 0 0 0 O20 0 0 101 4441679294 0 0 515 41471986794 0064760606059729 SHVBUSCSTRPNT E A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E 966704093163 1 671676324 1242 6LVBUSCLVBUSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 101 4441679294 0 0 515441471986794 006476060597 29 SVINTAGE O
328. th other nodes of the circuit the two node must be given the same name Ref I ph Selecting Ref ph will draw the object LIBREF 1 This object has zero parameters and two nodes Reference objects are not represented in the ATP input data file but serve only as visualization of connectivity Ref 3 ph Selecting Ref 3 ph will draw the object LIBREF 3 This object has zero parameters and two nodes Reference objects are not represented in the ATP input data file but serve only as visualization of connectivity Files Besides the standard components the user is allowed to create User Specified components The usage of this feature requires knowledge about ATP s DATA BASE MODULARIZATION technique The procedure that is described in the Advanced part of this Manual consists of two steps 1 Creating a new support file sup using the Objects User Specified New sup file menu 2 Creating a Data Base Module file LIB which describes the object Selecting Files in the component selection menu executes the Open Component dialog and the existing support files in the USP directory are listed If you select a sup file from the list and click on the Open button the icon of the object will appear in the middle of the active circuit window Henceforth the user specified objects operate similarly than standard objects 124 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual 4 9 12 Frequency comp HFS Source CIGRE
329. the correct sign of NENERG i e gt U for statistic or lt 0 for systematic switch studies Switch controls maach mest fl per Mast oeh ESTOIT NSEED 0 Switch controls ISW If 1 printout of all switch closing opening time appear in the Prediction output LIS file No such printout if J the parameter is set to 0 C Compensation Fig 4 16 Switch UM settings ITEST Extra random delay using DEGMIN DEGMAX and STATFR in STARTUP Possible values are O Extra random delay for all switches 1 No random delay 2 Extra random time delay added to all closing switches 3 Extra random time delay added to all opening switches IDIST Select probability distribution function of subsequent switching operations Zero means Gaussian distribution and 1 means uniform distribution IMAX If 1 printout of extrema iS written to the ATP output LIS file for every energization If 0 zero no such printout IDICE Controls use of the random generator A value of O implies computer dependent random generator and a value of 1 means standard random generator KSTOUT If 0 extra printed LUNIT6 output for each energization Output of the time step loop and variable extrema if Extremal values is selected on the Output tab will be printed If l no such output 72 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 I NT EF Reference Manual NSEED Repeatable Monte Carlo simulations Possible values are O Every simulation
330. the Auto path option is disabled ATPDraw always enters the full path in the S Include call making possible to keep the library files in different directories Unable to resolve path or extension of library file DAATPORAYYS LOCYEXA_ d LIB When ATP option Auto Path is on library tiles must be located inthe USP directory and given the extension LIB Strip off file path and extension Fig 6 19 Un resolvable library file conflict Running the ATP data case will produce simulation results as shown in Fig 6 20 0 00 0 04 0 08 0 12 0 16 s 0 20 file Exa_7 pl4 x var t viSENA v RECA Fig 6 20 Calculated voltages at sending and receiving end of the 500 kV line ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 195 SINTEF Application Manual 6 5 2 JMarti model of a 750 kV line The JMarti line models introduced in this section will be used in the subsequent single line to ground fault study on a 750 kV shunt compensated transmission line with total length of 487 km Transpositions separate this line into four sections Each section of the line is represented by 3 phase un transposed LCC object with JMarti option enabled The ATPDraw project of the SLG study includes four such objects with name LIN750 x ALC where x runs from to 4 The line configuration is shown in Fig 6 21 13 2 m At tower 41 05 m Midspan 26 15 m ER Separ 60 cm 17 5 m e At tower 27 9 m Alpha 45 Midspan
331. the Edit UNDO option provides an easy way to return to an earlier version of the circuit The circuit objects used in the circuit so far were drawn in red color This tells you that no data have been given to these objects You can give data to objects at any time during the building process We will now give data to the objects in the source part of the rectifier To do so simple click with the right mouse button or double click with the left button on an object If you right click on the AC source icon a window as shown in Fig 3 11 appears Component Aci ph sup wl Attributes Group No fo Label Ju Comment T Hide E Lock OK Cancel Help Fig 3 11 Component dialog box of the single phase sinusoidal source 42 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF E EE Data values shown in Fig 3 11 refer to the circuit parameters of Fig 3 2 The name of the numerical fields is identical with that of used by the ATP Rule Book 3 for an AC source This AC source has 7 input data and one node Click on the HELP button to load the on line help if you are unsure about the meaning of parameters Specify data as shown in Fig 3 11 Here U I 0 results in voltage source with default label U U L 1 results in a current source with label I The node names can not be specified in this window Click OK to close the window and update the object values Click on Cancel to just quit the window After you have given data t
332. the Tools menu a Icon Editor Lee D sup Jplsl Depending on how the editor was invoked the file File Edit Tools menu provides different options When called from Open Ctrl 0 the Objects menu Edit Standard User Specified or Save Cie Edit Model sup file the user is allowed to import icons from other support files or cancel the edit operation and close the editor window In this case the Done option in the main menu is seen to accept and store the modified icon in the sup file as shown on Fig 4 28 Import Ctrl l Merge Ct Exit When the icon editor is called from the Tools menu additional options like the Open and Save appears in the File menu Fig 4 32 Icon Editor menus At the bottom of the editor window there is a color palette with two boxes indicating the current foreground and background color selections and the real size image of the icon at right In the color palette the color marked with a capital letter T is the transparent color To select a color from the palette click either the left or the right mouse button in one of the color boxes The selected color will be assigned to the mouse button you clicked until you use the same mouse button to select another color The leftmost box displays the color currently assigned to the left mouse button The one to the right displays the color assigned to the right mouse button The foreground color is normally used to draw with and the background color t
333. the logarithmic space frequencies For the PFC test the input parameters are the power frequency and the voltage level used to calculate the reactive line charging Note The LMFS feature of ATP does not work for Noda models Verify Data xl Verify Data EI Circuit specification Sele Circuit specication Sele Line Model Frequency Scan Line Model Frequency Scan Power Frequency Calculation GG Power Frequency Calculation 1 Line Model Frequency scan Power Frequency Calculation Min treg Hz f Max treg Hz f UDUUUU Points Dec f 0 T View old case IT View old case Fig 5 28 Frequency range specification for the LMFS run left and selecting the line voltage and system frequency for the PFC run right Pow frag Hz 50 Voltage kv 120 DE EE C a Select LMFS Clicking on OK will result in the generation of a LMFS data case called xVerify dat and execution of ATP based on the settings of the default ATP command Tools Options Preferences The sources are specified in include files called xVerifyZ dat xVerifyP dat and xVerifyM dat for the zero positive and mutual sequence respectively The individual circuits are tested simultaneously The receiving ends are all grounded over 0 1 mQ and all sending ends if Circuit number gt 0 attached to AC current sources of 1 Amps The phase angle of the applied current source for the i conductor is 360 i 1 n where n is the tot
334. the same window as the built in Text Editor but with different menu options and capabilities To edit help file of standard objects the user must select the Help Editor speed button in any Edit Component dialog boxes In this cases a Done option appears in the main menu and the Fi e menu provides printing options and a Cancel choice By selecting Done you accept any changes made to the help text To edit help file of a User Specified or Model object the user has two choices to select the Help Editor in the Tools menu or to click on the Help Editor speed button in any User Specified or Model dialog boxes 86 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF When the editor is called from the Tools menu the File menu contains an Open and a Save option as well In that case the text buffer is initially empty so the user must select the File Open first to load the help text of a support file The default font can be changed by selecting the Font option in the Character menu This menu will bring up the Windows standard font dialog box where you can specify a new font name and character style size or color Note that ATPDraw does not remember the current font setting when you terminate the program so if you don t want to use the default font you have to specify a new one each time you start ATPDraw The Word Wrap option toggles wrapping of text at the right margin so that it fits in the window Reference Manual When the built in editor is used as a
335. ting a model object in ATPDraw 1 Manual operation creating a support file manually under Object Model New sup file 2 Automatic operation selecting a mod file directly under MODELS of the component selection menu and let ATPDraw to create the support file 5 5 2 1 Manual operation To create a new a support file manually enter the Objects menu and select the New sup file under Model This menu item will perform the Edit Object dialog In the Standard High precision data field you specify the size of the model number of nodes and number x ee of data as shown in Fig 5 32 Standard data Type Mode R The FLASH 1 MOD file has four nodes 3 input 1 output and four data Num dai E 2 Pset Eset fdel fdur so you must enter 4 in both Num fields Note All Hum nodes 2 i MODELS nodes must be single phase one Fig 5 32 Specify the size of the model After you have specified the node and data values go to the tabbed notebook style part of the dialog box Select the Data page where you specify the values shown in Fig 5 33 The Name of the data must be the same as those used in the DATA declaration part of the mod file The Default value appears initially in the models dialog The default values are taken from the Use Model statements in DC68 DAT you can of course change these values individually for each use of the model Min and Max restrict the legal input range No restriction is applied here to data values
336. ting by pos I Force high resolution DWI TCH gards and Ehe SOURCE Cards Sorting by group number The group number that can be specified in the component dialog box for each object determines the sequence of cards The lowest group number comes first Sorting by xX pos The leftmost object in the circuit window is written first sorting M Sorting by group number Miscellaneous reques Insert Pretix and Suftix cards Additional M Insert GDL A Comments IT Insert Exact Phasor Equivalent card IT Insert TACS HYBRID card ke Printed Humber idth Vid fio Space E Any combination of the three different sorting mechanisms can be specified Force high resolution Use S Vintage 1 1 possible for high precision data input Fig 4 17 ATP file format settings Miscellaneous request Insert Prefix and S Suffix cards If this option is checked ATP run time calls for library or data file via SInclude commands will suppose that these external files are located in the USP folder of ATPDraw and have the extension dibe Having this control enabled only the pure file name need to be specified in the SInclude field of a component dialog box because the default extension lib and the complete path will be appended by ATPDraw using the SPrefix SSuffix features of ATP EMTP Bach library file specification is verified to meet the above requirements If the path of a library file specifies a different folder or the ext
337. tion of the component selection menu Edit D ATPDraw3 Usp Trl32_15 sup Data Modes Standard data Fos A zl Phases 1 IT High precision 3 TI Output enable J M Nonlinear l Type UserSpe zl Mum Data fo Hum Node Zz Dae Save AS Exit Help Fig 5 52 Creating support file for the new BCTRAN object The user specified components can be used in combination with the new grouping feature of ATPDraw as shown in Fig 5 53 In this example the linear part of the transformer model has been completed with winding capacitances as external components and three nonlinear Type 96 hysteretic inductors in delta connection at the 15 kV terminals which represent the nonlinear magnetic core The Compress feature of ATPDraw supports single icon replacement of these 7 objects The inter winding and winding to earth capacitances are input parameters to the group object As shown below the group object s icon can be customized as well An artistic icon may improve the readability of the circuit and help in understanding of the circuit file for others 132715 Eege Fig 5 53 Compressing the transformer model into a single object 174 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF 6 Application Manual 4 ATPDraw for Windows BA 3 5 175 SINTEF Application Manual This chapter begins with some simple examples You will not be shown how to create these circuits but the circuits files Ex
338. tion to resize must be selected first Selected connection nodes are marked with squares at both ends of the selection rectangle Relations are used to visualize information flow into Fortran statements and are drawn as blue connections but have no influence on components connectivity Relations are drawn in the same way as drawing a short circuit connection between nodes except that you have to select the TACS Draw relation option in the component selection menu to start the relation drawing You can then draw multiple relations until you click the right mouse button or press Esc key 3 5 Your first circuit Exa_ adp This chapter describes how to use ATPDraw step by step As an example composing the circuit file of a single phase rectifire bridge see Fig 3 2 is presented Reading this tutorial carefully you will be proficient in the use of the most important ATPDraw functions such as How to select and assemble components How to perform edit operations and give data to components How to give node names draw connections and specify grounding How to create the ATP input file and perform the simulation 38 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Reeg Fig 3 3 Your first circuit sa 1 adp The circuit is a single phase rectifier bridge supplied by a 120 Vims 60 Hz source The source inductance is 1 mH in parallel with a damping resistor of 300 Q The snubber circuits across the rectifying diodes have a resistanc
339. tional Model fitting data field that can be made visible by unselecting the Use default fitting check box For more details please read in the ATP Rule Book Model Type Model fiting data NAME DEFAULT 10 1 LZ Fit27 3 C Bergeron C P Freg matrix Hz Freq SS Hz 0 005 mea fa e eG Fig 5 22 Parameter settings for the Semlyen line model C Ja C Noda GG Semlyen 5 3 1 2 Line Data page settings The data page contains input fields where the user can specify the geometrical or material data For overhead lines the user can specify the phase number conductor diameters bundling conductor positions as shown in Fig 5 23 The number of conductors is user selectable ATPDraw set the grounding automatically or gives warnings if the grounding conditions do not match the fixed number of phases You can Delete last row of the table using the gray buttons below or add a new one by clicking on the Add row command Rows inside the table can also be deleted but it must first be dragged down as last row To drag a row click on its identifier in the first column hold the button down and drag the selected row to a new location or use the and W arrows at right Model Data Fab Fb poe Mover vind Fee ek fon E fied for fem Joe 1 13 Bo 45 0 55 1 55 0 0565 17 5 27 4 d 2 e 0 55 1 55 0 0565 0 ev 13 BO dh d 3 17 0 55 1 55 0 0565 17 6 27 4 13 BO dh d 4 fo 0 3 Dn 0 304 13 2 41 05 26 15 0 0 0 5 q0 0 3 0
340. tive sequence open circuit reactive power is then calculated by the formula O Imln E oI where E is the line to line voltage Using the voltage between two adjacent phases for an n phase circuit gives E V 2 sin m ol The calculation is based on an ATP calculation with E 1 0 Using this value for 4 implies that 2 G t SE 2 4 sin n n ATP also automatically calculates the reactive power supplied by the source Q Q The open circuit reactive power can thus also be calculated by taking the average of these quantities for all phases and multiply by a factor 2 since a peak value 1 0 is used in the calculation and the line to line voltage is specified as rms Im 236 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF ee _y 2 Q Q O On The zero sequence open circuit reactive power is calculated as well The same voltage is then applied to all terminals at one end of the line The zero sequence current is the average value of the current injected into the terminals This current J is calculated by ATP with Ep 1 0 Using this value for J implies that LZ x 0a 4 sin m n In this case ATP automatically calculates the reactive power Q injected into the circuit from the source Similarly to the positive sequence values the zero sequence open circuit reactive power is also equal to Im Zo SE 2 D Oo Zo n For a line cable with several circuits each circuit is test
341. u Under Structure the user specifies the number of phases the number of windings the type of core not supported yet except for single phase cores triplex and three phase shell type and the test frequency The dialog box format adapts the number of windings and phases The user can also request the inverse L matrix as output by checking AR output An Auto add nonlinearities button appears when an external magnetizing branch is requested Under Ratings the line voltage rated power and type of coupling must be specified Supported winding Connections are A auto transformer Y wye and D delta The Phase shift menu adapts these settings with all types of phase shifts supported If the connection is A or Y the rated voltage is automatically divided by 3 to get the winding voltage VRAT Under Factory test the user can choose either the Open circuit test or the Short circuit test 154 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Advanced Manual Ratings HY LV IN L L voltage k Lag WER fia Power MWA 250 250 75 Number of phases Ed E Number of windings Type of core shell core Test frequency Hz E M AR Output P Auto add nonlinearities Connections Ja sl Ja sl D Fhase shift deg fo x 330 sl Factory tests aueeeonneeeeennaueeeeseunenennaueneanag Performed at Tv sl Connect at Tv sl Zero sequence data available positive sequence 100 U2 140 Positive core magnetization Views Cop ic
342. ub _ DUM PULSI PULSZ PULS3 PULS4 PULSS PULSO MIDI MIDA MIDS DON CATEL GATEZ GATE3 GATE4 GATES GATH6 VAG RAMP1 COMPIL DUM DCMP1_ DLY6OD This file is very similar to the DBM input file but with a different header and with the original DBM file header given at the bottom instead This file is ready to STNCLUDE into an ATP input file by ATPDraw The file must be given a name and extension LIB and stored in the default USP directory The name HVDC _6 LIB is used here as an example When the punch file from the DBM file has been created the next step 1s to create a support file for the new HVDC_ 6 object in the the Objects User Specified menu The process of creating a new object consists of two steps create parameter support and create the icon 168 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel First select the New sup file in the popup menu A notebook style dialog box shown in Fig 5 48 appears where you specify the number of data and nodes The number of arguments on the NUM card s of the DBM file tells you the Number of data which 1s 3 in this example The number of arguments on the ARG card s minus number of arguments on the NUM card s specifies the total Number of nodes which is 5 in this example On the Data tab you specify the names of the data parameters number of digits it must be less or equal the space used in the DBM file which is 6 in this case a default value and the Min Max values T
343. uffix cards Additional M Insert GDL A Comments Widlth fio Space H Under the Format page the user can select precision mode and the ATP file sorting criteria If you select the Format page the window shown in Fig 3 31 appears Select M Sorting by cards First BRANCH then SWITCH and then SOURCE M Printed Number Width request is enabled Width is the total column width of ATP printed output LIS file Space is the number of blanks between columns All other check boxes are unselected Fig 3 31 The ATP file format menu To create an ATP file without starting the simulation you must select the Make File As in the ATP menu This selection will start a procedure which examines your circuit and gives node names to 50 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF E Bean circuit nodes Then a standard Windows Save As file window appears where you can specify the name and path of the ATP file The same name as the project file with extension atp is recommended You can edit this file or just display it by selecting the A7P Edit ATP file menu The ATP file Exa_ 1 atp you have just created will look like as follows BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW December Saturday 1 2001 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2001 PRINTED NUMBER WIDTH 10 2 C Example 1 C Your eech Circulr C Rectifier bridge C ar gt x Tmax gt x lt Xop
344. uncompressed version of this case is also part of the ATPDraw s example collection and is shown in Fig 6 42 Therefore you can see how the grouping feature makes the circuit more readable Chl T jo SC g ee GEN SS EE Fig 6 42 ATPDraw circuit without using compress Exa_11 adp The model of the Ynd11 and the DdO transformers consists of a linear part user specified library object or BCTRAN object and a nonlinear hysteretic inductor The capacitances between the transformer windings and ground have been considered as well These capacitances do not influence the inrush current significantly but they need to be taken into account especially at delta coupled transformer terminals to avoid floating subnetwork found simulation errors For more details about the model parameters please read in section 5 8 2 of the Advanced Manual The compress option of ATPDraw can be used effectively to create new probe type objects as well The 3 phase Flux probe of this example is constructed by integrators TACS Transfer functions General objects time controlled switches to set zero initial conditions and coupling to TACS objects The output of the Flux probe the instantaneous flux linkage of the transformer windings can be used to analyze the operation of the model during steady state no load conditions and during the transformer de energization re energization as shown in Fig 6 43 The circuit breaker of the transformer has a common
345. utput Additional The Additional button enables the user to insert text strings on precise locations in the ATP file Text strings to be written can be specified in an editor like dialog box as shown in Fig 4 18 User specified cards First the user must specify a Dues type 0 8 see the list at right ABSOLUTE U M DIMENSIONS 0 REQUEST then the text string to be written in the ATP file The header of J columns 1 80 helps to locate the 4 string properly according to the 5 STATISTICS 5 proper yo 8 E SOURCE ATP specification The text F INITIAL string will be written after a oo data sorting card at the end of aen other cards belonging to that group REQUEST TACS Be OK etc Fig 4 18 Specification of additional miscellaneous request cards Record ATPDraw supports the RECORD feature of ATP MODELS via the Record dialog box which is shown in Fig 4 19 All MODELS objects in the active circuit window are listed with their USE AS name in the list box under Model When selecting a model in this field variables declared under VAR section of the mod file are listed under Variable Each variable has a default alias name that appears in the Alias field but it can be modified according to the user need 14 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Record Model arable FLASH P trip FLASH_1C energy tire VCap Add in Bemove Alias powerA Record FLASH TA power AS powerA FL
346. ve MS Windows 3 1 style is also supported as shown in Fig 4 4 There is a check box in the Tools Options General tab to switch between the two supported alternatives Open Project Fx EEN rene Exa_l adp dato draws project A Es KW Exa_10 adp E ATFOraw3 Exa_2 adp p E gt Project Exa_3 adp Exa_4 adp Exa_4b adp Exa_b adp Exa_b adp List files of type Drives Project file adp sl Ei d MOBIL H D Mehwork Fig 44 Open file window Win 3 1 style The existing project files in the Project subfolder of ATPDraw are shown below the File name field A specific file can be selected either by typing the name directly or by a left mouse click in the file list Clicking OK will perform the selection made and the file is loaded into a new circuit window Clicking on Cancel will simply close the window 4 2 1 3 Reload The name and location of the recently used project files are listed right to this menu item The user can select and load one of them into the circuit window by a simple mouse click 4 2 1 4 Save Activating this menu item will save the project in the active circuit window into a disk file If the name Noname adp is shown in the circuit window a Save As dialog box will be performed where the user can specify a new name for the current project file name Short key Ctr S 4 2 1 5 Save As The project in the active circuit window is saved to disk under a new name The name of the file can be specifi
347. vels is 1000 132 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF AINIS Manoel Each group has a name GRPxxxxx as shown in the component dialog box header in Fig 5 5 and Fig 5 7 The number following GRP is incremented for every new group The files GRPxxxxx sup are found in the GRP sub directory and are editable as any other component The group support files are stored in the project file and are taken as temporary files in ATPDraw It is safe thus to delete the group sup files when the project is stored on disk but not necessary to perform this operation manually because the program will delete all of them when you finish the ATPDraw session Icon Editor To customize the icon click the con Editor speed button File Edit Tools Done in the lower left corner of the Component dialog box as shown in Fig 5 5 The icon editor will appear where the SEN user is free to modify the icon Fig 5 8 shows the Exa 4 adp circuit after grouping the PWM source and Je ail EE the mechanical load and modifying their icons Such process is convenient for documentation purposes ii ES SS EEEE because increases the readability of the circuit Cuda Fig 5 8 The icon of the PWM source and the load group has been customized Fig 5 9 Customizing the icon of the PWM source 5 1 1 Grouping nonlinear objects Non linearity now can be external data in a group object Up to three objects can share the same external nonlinearity As an exa
348. ville Power Administration program C Programmed by H K H idalen at SEfAS NORWAY 1994 2002 SDUMMY 22000 C aT gt lt Imax gt lt XOpt gt lt Cop gt 5 E 9 2 5E 5 500 3 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 MODELS MODELS INPUT IX0001 v TWR4A TX0002 v XX0016 OUTPUT XX0048 eT 208 ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 SINTEF Application Manual MODEL Flash COMMENCE anna aa ee Front of wave flashover characteristic of the HV insulator Input Voltage accross the insulator Output Close command for the TACS switch A a ee a endcommen INPUT UP UN OUTPUT CLOSE DATA UINF DFLT 650e3 UO DFLT 1650e3 TAU DFLT 8 e 7 UINIT DFLT 1E5 VAR CLOSE TT U FLASH INIT CLOSE 0 TT 0 FLASH INF ENDINIT EXEC U ABS UP UN IF USUINIT THEN TT TT timestep FLASH UINF UO UINF EXP TT TAU IF U gt FLASH THEN CLOSE 1 ENDIF ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL USE FLASH AS FLASH INPUT UP UN DATA UINF 1 4E6 UO 3 E6 TAU Ga E UINIT 3 5E5 OUTPUT XX0048 CLOSE ENDUSE RECORD FLASH U AS U FLASH CLOSE AS CLOSE ENDMODELS C 345678901234567 789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567 8901234567890 BRANCH C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R X lt L gt X lt C gt C lt n 1 gt lt n 2 gt lt refl gt lt ref2 gt lt R gt lt A gt lt B gt lt Leng gt lt gt lt gt 0 ct IXx0001 IX0002 1XX0010XX01067 lOs 200 cken s008 L O O 1XX0012XX0010 lO
349. w for Windows version 3 5 Advanced Manual SINTEF POS U CPOS U A U ANEG Pos U A U BNEG Pos U A U CNEG POs U A SWITCH 11U APOS GATE1_ 11U BPOS GATE3__ 11u CPOS GATES 11NEG U A GATE4 11NEG U B GATE6 11NEG U C GATE2_ BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C lt OM in the 1 column is mandatory herel PUNCH BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The header section of the DBM file starts with an ARG declaration after the special ATP request card DATA BASE MODULE It s function is to specify the external variables numerical node names and the sequence of arguments for the SINCLUDE procedure The NUM card tells what arguments are numerical DUM card lists the dummy or local variables which are typically internal node names ATP gives dummy nodes a unique name and thus let you use the same DBM file several times in a data case avoiding node name conflicts The rest of the DBM file describes the rectifier bridge in a normal ATP data structure except that sorting cards TACS BRANCH SWITCH etc are used in a special way Sorting cards are required but no BLANK TACS BLANK BRANCH etc indicators are needed The 3 phase thyristor bridge has a 3 phase AC input node and two single phase DC output nodes The firing angle is taken as input data and the snubber parameters are also practical to consider as numerical input to the model The model created here accepts external reference signals for the zero crossing detector alternatively the DBM
350. witches The rest of program options and circuit parameter settings for a statistical study is very similar to that of any other time domain simulations There is one addition however You need to specify the Switch study and Switch controls under ATP Settings Switch before generating the ATP file Switch LM Unless you need special settings the Switch controls parameters need not be modified At the time of writing of this manual ATPDraw does not write the BLANK STATISTICS request card at the end of the ATP file In consequence of the missing request card the statistical systematic study D evaluation results do not appear at the end of the LIS file To get this Num Dm valuable part of a statistical simulation enter this request manually by means of the Edit ATP file feature as shown below and run the simulation with the corrected file by using the Run ATP file option Le do not use F2 command key to run the simulation BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BLANK STATISTICS BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK RI Switch controls mach mesch oer Mach och Kerourhb verpoh Fig 6 48 Setting the parameters of the statistical study 6 9 2 Results of the statistical study As worst case assumption the fault which precedes the 3 phase reclosing in one or more phases has not been considered here Taking that the inductive voltage transformers play a significant role in eliminating the trapped charge in the hea
351. you can post messages To do this you simply send e mail to atp emtp I listserv dfn de Your message then will be submitted to moderators who decide whether or not to accept it The task of moderators 1s maintenance of the quality of communication and discussion The language of communication is English Messages written in any other language are not accepted The author of each submission must be clearly identified This includes name organizational affiliation and location Attachments especially encoded files are not allowed They can be forwarded later to interested persons by private e mail Any subscriber who sends a message to this mailing list gives up his right to confidentiality This is regardless of the message s possible declaration in auto attached legal disclaimers which are removed by moderators Subscribers of the ATP EMTP L mailing list must fulfill the ATP license requirements Specifically they are forbidden to disclose to non licensed persons ATP information that is received from this mail service 2 8 Available circuit objects in ATPDraw At the time of writing of this manual ATPDraw s standard component library contains 194 circuit object support files These 194 files support more than 100 of ATP s components i e many components have several versions in ATPDraw Standard components Linear branches Resistor Inductor Capacitor RLC RLC 3 phase symmetric and non symmetric Inductor and capacitor with initial condition
352. yright E 1995 2001 SINTEF Energy Research Morsay Graphical pre processor ta ATP Bonneville Power Administration USA Programmed by H K H idalen Windows version and enhancements by D Fig 4 40 About window of ATPDraw ATPDraw for Windows version 3 5 95 Reference Manual SINTEF 4 3 Shortcut menu The Shortcut menu provides access to the most frequently used object manipulation functions To show and activate the shortcut menu hold down the Shift key while you click the right mouse button on an object or a selected group of objects in the circuit window Most of the items on this menu are identical with that of the Edit menu section 4 2 2 The Open menu item at the top of the menu is an addition to these normal edit functions If this command is performed on a single object the Component dialog box appears If you select this command for a group of selected objects the Open Group dialog box appears Open Open Enables the component customization by bringing up the Component dialog box of the object Cut Cut Copy Provides access to the standard clipboard functions Copy Delete Duplicate Delete Flip Rotate Rotates and flips the objects icon Duplicate Select Unselect Select unselect the object s Compress replace a group of selected objects with a single icon Rotate Flip Extract The group is extracted on the current circuit layer Edit Group The group is extracted in a separate window H

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"